The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About7050 GALL BLVD (38)� � � __w�� 1 1 ' � � � � 1 � � � � SPECIFICATION FOR � - _ � ' RA:DIOLOGY AND ELEVATOR RENOVATION - - - � `;,�°�`�1,`�_;:; � ; . EAST PASCO MEDICAL CENTER - - - � ZEPHYRFiILLS FLORIDA - � � JOB NO. 98165.01 � JANUARY 22, 1999 � �I ' __ '-`� \ i = _:�;-,l,- _, ; ., _-�� f - � �; �� ,� '� �,- __ �.._.. .,,;� = I � � � ' I � ' I � C i � ' � � -a�-� g 1 � � - � � 1 � ' EARL SWENSSON ASSOCIATE3, INC. 210 0 T�TEST END AVE. � � SUITE 1200 � � NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE 37203 , � I . � � � _ � I � � DIVISION 0 HIDDING AND CONTRACT REOIIIRE�NTS � , i — i Sec;tion 00000 Cover Sheet Section 00050 Table of Cont.ents � Section 00070 State of Florida Codes & Standards ' � (Local Codes are Referenced on Drawings Title Sheet) • Sec�tion 00700 General Conditions of Contract � Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions i � DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREN�NTS rI Section 01010 Summary of Work � � Section 01031 Alteration Project Procedures , Section 01040 Contract Coordination � Section 01045 Cutting and Patching � Section 01200 Project Meetings - � Section 01300 Submittals ' � Section 01310 Construction Schedules ; �Section 01400 Tests and Inspections � Section 01500 Temporary Facilities � �, Section 01630 Product Options and Substitutions � Section 01700 Contract Closeout Section 01710 General Cleaning and Final Finish Cleaning � Section 01720 Project Record Documents � � Section 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01740 Year 2000 Compliance � ' i-�DIVISION 2 SITEWORR � NOT USED '� I DIVISION 3 CONCRETE I I i Se�tion 03300 Concrete � � � DIVISION 4 MASONRY � j NOT USED " . � ; ' � DIVISION 5 METALS � I Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal I DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY ' � Seltion 06102 Fire Retardant Wood Blocking � 1 ' DIi2SION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07193 Plastic Vapor Retarder � Section 07213 Fibrous Insulation Section 07253 Sprayed Fireproofing Section 07270 Firestopping � I January 22, 1999 00050-1 98165 . 01 I � ' � Section 07900 Sealants � DIVISION 8 DOORS & WINDOWS I Seation 08100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames � Section 08215 Wood Doors Section 08300 Access Doors Sel�tion 08700 = Finish Hardware � ' DIVISION 9 FINISHES i Seltion 09100 Metal Stud Framing System 'I � I Section 09260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems i Section 09500 Acoustical Ceilings � Section 09650 Resilient Flooring (For Reference Only) Section 09680 Carpet Glue-Down Installatian (For Reference Only) � � Sectio � n 09800 Special Coatings ' Section 09900 Painting � ' Section 09952 Vinyl Wallcoverings . � , DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES � � I � Section 10260 Bumperguards and Corner Guards Section 10400 Interior Signage/Exterior poor Signage ' ! DIVISION 11 EOUIPMENT � NOT USED � �-� � ; DIVISION 12 �'LTRNISHINGS � I � Section 12300 Hospital Casework I � DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Se�tion 13090 Radiation Protection � � � i DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS I � � NOT USED DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL ' Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions Section 15020 Identification and Painting � Section 15025 Equipment Identification Section 15030 Cleaning Mechanical Systems � Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods � i Section 15170 Motors � Section 15250 Insulation � Section 15862 Centrifugal Roof Fans Section 15864 Centrifugal Cabinet Fans � Section 15886 Air Filters Section 15890 Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pres'sure i � � January 22, 1999 00050-2 98165 . 01 ,� 1 � � ; � 1 � Section 15910 Sheet Metal Accessories � � Section 15971 Controls - Pneumatic Section 15990 Testing and Balancing of Mechanical Systems Critical Systems Checklist � I DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions � Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods Section 16111 Conduit Section 16113 Wall and Ceiling Raceway Systems Section 16120 Wire and Cable Section 16130 Outlet and Junction Boxes Section 16140 Wiring Devices and Plates � Section 16160 Panelboards � I Section 16190 Supporting Devices and Hangers ! Section 16400 Distribution System and Grounding Section 16500 Lighting Fixtures ' ' � Section 16720 Fire Alarm and Detection System Modifications Section 16740 Telephone Raceway System , Section 16760 Nurses Call Raceway System � � Section 16775 Connection to Owner-Furnished Equipment Section 16781 Data Processing Raceway Systems Critical Systems Checklist � , END OF SECTION � � � � �I 1 � � 1 � � � t � � � � � 1 . � � � ' January 21, 1999 00050-3 98165 . 01 � I � I � � ' SECTION 00070 � STATE OF FLORIDA CODES & STANDARDS � I (LOCAL CODES ARE REFERENCED ON DRAWING TITLE SHEET) � � PA IT I GENERAL � 1 . 0,1 THE FOLLOWING CODES & STANDARDS WERE UTILIZED IN THE DESIGN OF THIS PROJECT. � � 1. Oi2 CODES & STANDARDS i � NFPA-10 (1990) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers NFPA-11 (1994} Standard for Low Expansion Foam and � ; ! Combined Agent Systems NFPA-11A (1994) Standard for Medium and High Expansion ; Systems � i� NFPA-12 (1993) Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems � NFPA-12A (1992) Standard on Halon 1301 Fire ' Extinguishing Systems NFPA-12B (1990) Standard on Hal:on 1211 Fire Extinguishing Systems � NFPA-13 (1994) Standard for the Installation of � Sprinkler Systems � NFPA-13A (1994) Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems � -� j NFPA-14 (1993) Standard for Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems ! NFPA-15 (1993) Standard for Water Spray fixed Systems � for Fire Protection ' � NFPA-16 (1991) Standard for Installation of Deluge Foam Water Sprinkler and Foam Water Systems I NFPA-16A (1994) Standard for Installation of Closed Head � � Foam Water Sprinklers and Foam Water � Spray Systems , NFPA-17 (1990) Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing � Systems NFPA-17A (1990) Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems � i NFPA-20 (1993) Standard for Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps , � NFPA-22 (1993) - Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection � ' NFPA-24 (1992) Standard for Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their � Appurtenances � NFPA-25 (1992) Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Base Fire Protection Systems ' NFPA-26 (1988) Supervision of Valves Controlling Water � i Supplies for Fire Protection � NFPA-30 (1993) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code i � � January 22, 1999 00070-1 � 98165 . 01 � � i � NF A-31 19 Standard for the Instal � P ( 92) lation of Oil Burning Equipment NFPA-33 (1989) Standard for Spray Application Using R Flammable and Combustible Materials �� NFPA-34 (1989) 5tandards for Dipping and Coating Processes Using Flammable or Combustible n Liquids u NFPA-35 (1987) Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings NFPA-37 (1994) Installation and Use of Stationary �� Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines NFPA-40E (1993 ) Standards for the Storage of Pyroxlin Plastics a NFPA-43A (1990) Standards for the Storage of Liquid and Solid Oxidating Materials NFPA-43B (1993 ) Standards for Storage of Organic Peroxide Formulation �� NFPA-43C (1986) Standards for Storage of Gaseous Oxidizing Materials � NFPA-43D (1986) Standards for Storage of pesticides in Portable Containers NFPA-45 (1991) Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals � , NFPA-49 (1991) Hazardous Chemicals Data NFPA-50 (1990) Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites NFPA-51 (1992) Standard for the Design and Installation � of Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems- for Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes __ NFPA-51B (1994) Standard for Fire Prevention and Use of � Cutting and Welding Processes NFPA-54 (1992) National Fuel Gas Code NFPA-58 (1992) Standard for Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases � NFPA-68 (1988) Guide for Venting of Deflagulators NFPA-70 (1993 ) National Electrical Code NFPA-70B (1987) Recommended Practice for Electrical � Equipment Maintenance NFPA-70E (1988) Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplace � NFPA-71 (1989) Standard for the Installatiori, Maintenance and Use of Central Station Signaling Systems NFPA-72A (1987) Standard for the Installarion, � Maintenance and Use of Local Protective Signaling Systems NFPA-72B (1986) Standard for the Installa�ion, � Maintenance and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems NFPA-72C (1986) Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Remote Station � Protective Signaling System NFPA-72D (1986) Standard for the Installa�.ion, Maintenance and Use of Proprietary � Protective Signaling Systems January 22, 1999 00070-2 98165 . 01 � � ' I ' NFPA-72E (1987) Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors � NFPA-72F (1985) Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications Systems ; NFPA-72G (1988) Guide for the Installation, Maintenance � and Use of Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling 5ystems NFPA-72H (1988) Testing Procedures for Local, Auxiliary, � Remote Station and Propriety Protective , Signaling Systems ! NFPA-74 (1989) Standard for the Installation, � Maintenance and Use of Household Fire Warning Equipment NFPA-75 (1992) Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing � Equipment i NFPA-77 (1988) Static Electricity NFPA-78 (1986) Lightning Protection Code ' NFPA-80 (1992) Standard for Fire Doors and Windows ! " NFPA-82 (1994) Standard on Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment � � NFPA-85A (1987) Standard for the Prevention of Furnace , I Explosions in Fuel Oil and Natural Gas- Fire Single Burner Boiler-Furnaces NFPA-85B (1989) Standard for Prevention of Furnace � Explosions in Natural Gas-Fire Multiple Burner Boiler-Furnaces NFPA-85D (1989) Standard for Prevention of Furnace -= Explosions in Fuel Oil-Fire Multiple ' Burner Boiler-Furnaces NFPA-85E (1985) Standard for Prevention of Furnace � _ Explosions in Pulverized Coal-fire � Multiple Burner Boiler-Furnaces NFPA 85F (1988) Standard for the Installation and Operation of Pulverized Fuel System , NFPA-86 (1990) Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, Design, Location and Equipment , NFPA-88A (1991) Standard for Parking Structures 1 ; NFPA-88B (1991) Standard for Repair Garages NFPA-90A (1993) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems � NFPA-90B (1993) Standard for the Installation of Warm , Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems � NFPA-91 (1992) Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust System � � NFPA-96 (1994) Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and � � Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial � Cooking � � NFPA-99 (1993) Standard for Health Care Facilities NFPA-99B (1990) Hypobaric Facilities NFPA-101 (1994) Life Safety Code ' ' NFPA-101M (1992) Manual on Alternative Approaches to Life Safety t ' Janluary 22 , 1999 00070-3 � 98165 . 01 � NFPA-102 (1992) Standard for Assembly Setting, Tents and � � Air _Supported Structures NFPA-105 (1993) Recommended Practice for the � Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating 5ystems ' NFPA-110 (1993) Standard for Emergency and Standby Power � Systems NFPA-110A (1989) Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems � - NFPA-171 (1986) Public Fire Safety Symbols NFPA-172 (1986) Symbols for Architec.tural and Engineering Drawings NFPA-204M (1985) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents � and solid Fuel Burning Appliances NFPA-211 (1992) Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents � and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances � NFPA-214 (1992) Water Cooling Towers NFPA-220 (1992) Standard on Types of Building Construction NFPA-231 (1990) Standard for Indoor General Storage � NFPA-231C (1991) Standard for Rack Storage of Materials NFPA-231D (1989) Standard for Storage of Rubber Tires NFPA-232 (1991) Standard for the Protection of Records � NFPA-241 (1993 ) Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations NFPA-251 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Testing of Building Construction and Materials � Tests of Door Assemblies NFPA-252 (1990) Standard Methods of Fire Test of Door � � Assemblies '� NFPA-253 (1990) Standard Methods of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source �NFPA-255 (1990) Standard Method of Test of Surface , Burning Characteristics of Building - Materials ' NFPA-256 (1993) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Roof � Coverings NFPA-257 (1990) Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies � NFPA-259 (1987) Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials NFPA-260B (1983) Standard Method of Test for Determining � Resistance of Mock-Up Upholstered Furniture Material Assemblies of , Ignition by Smoldering Cigarettes � NFPA-262 (1985) Method of Test fqr Fire and Smoke , Characteristics of Electrical Wires NFPA-321 (1991) Basic Classifications of Flammable and • Combustible Liquids � NFPA-327 (1993) Standard Procedures for Cleaning or Safeguarding Small Tanks and Containers NFPA-386 (1990) Standard for Portable Shipping Tanks for � Flammable and Combustible Liquids January 22, 1999 , 00070-4 98165 . 01 � � ; � NFPA-418 (1990) Standard for Rooftop Heliport � Construction and Protection NFPA-490 (1993 ) Code for Storage of Ammonium Nitrate � NFPA-497M (1986) Classification of Gases, Vapors and ' ' Ducts for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous (Classified) Locations , NFPA-600 (1986) Private Fire Brigades � NFPA-655 (1993 ) Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur � Fire and Explosives , , NFPA-664 (1993) Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosives in Wood Processing and ' Woodworking Facilities NFPA-701 (1989) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Films NFPA-703 (1992) Standard for Fire Retardant Impregnated � Wood and Fire Retardant Coatings for � Building Materials NFPA-704 (1990) Standard System for the Identification � ' I of the Fire Hazards of Material NFPA-801 (1986) Facilities Handling Radioactive ' Materials ' NFPA-850 (1990) Fossil Fueled Steam and Combustion Turbine Electric Generating Plants ' ; NFPA-1221 (1991) Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Public Fire �' Service Communications , , NFPA-1962 (1993) Standard for the Care, Use and Maintenance of -Fire Hose (Including � -� ' Connections and Nozzles) NFPA-1963 (1993 ) Standards for Screw Threads and Gaskets � for Fire Hose Connections I � ASTM E136 (1987) Standard Test Method for Behavior of I Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees Fahrenheit � i ANSI-A17 . 1 (1987) Elevator Codes � Chapter 4A-3 , F.A.C. The State Fire Prevention Code (1990 edition) , Chapter 4A-47, F.A.C. The Uniform Fire Safety Standards for ' ' Elevators (1990 edition) Chapter 59A-3 , F.A.C. Hospital Licensure (Revised 7/97) i Chapter 59A-4, F.A.C. Nursing Homes and Related Facilities � (Revised 7/97) ' Chapter 59A-5, F.A.C. Ambulatory Surgical Centers (Revised 6/97) � Chapter 10D-38, F.A.C. Intermediate Care Facilities for the � Mentally Retarded � Standard Building Code (1997 Edition) � ' , � ; � � Jarivary 22 , 1999 00070-5 98165 . 01 � � � � � r Florida Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Implementation Act and Americans with Disabilities Act � Accessibility Guidelines (October 1, 19.93 ) . END OF SEETION � � � �. r � � _= s � � � � � . � � January 22 , 1999 00070-6 98165 . 01 , ' � i I i r � � ' SECTION 00700 � I GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTR.ACT � 1 ; PART 1 GENERAL � 1 . 0,1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE � I A. Supplementary Conditions: SECTION 00800 . i � , 1 . 02 STANDARD FORM5 i A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Standard Form � A201, 1987 edition, of the American Institute of � Architects, are hereby made a part of the Contract � , Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. � � , END OF SECTION � 1 � � , i �� 1 � ' I � I I I I � i 1 ; � ' ' 1 � � 1 � - 1 � � � � � i January 22, 1999 00700-1 98165 . 01 ' � � � I I SECTION 00800 ' I SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS , , , The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the� General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987 . Where any article of � the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, or clause itheireof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph, or , , clause shall remain in effect. i ; � � PART 1 GENERAT, 1 . 01 MODIFICATIONS OF GENER.AL CONDITIONS A. Article 1 : General Provisions � � Add the following to subparagraph 1 . 1 . 8 : � , ; 1. 1 . 8 . 1 The term "product" as used in these Supplementary Conditions includes materials, systems and � � equipment. � , 1 . 1 . 8 .2 The term "or equal" as used in these Supplementary Conditions means "an equal approved by the ' �� , Architect" . I 1. 1 . 8 .3 The term "provide" as used in these Supplementary 1 Conditions means "furnish and install . " ' i 1. 1 . 8 . 4 Wherever technical standards, such as � (but not limited to) ASTM, are referenced in the Project I Manual, it shall mean the standards current on the ' date the Contract Agreement is finalized, unless , otherwise noted. 1 � . B. Article 3 : Gontractor ' � Add the following to subparagraph 3 .2 . 1 : � � 3 .2 . 1 . 1 Revise as follows : It shall be the responsibility � I of the Contractor, prior to submitting bids, to � I notify the Architect in writing of conflicting information in the plans and s�ecificati�ns s• an Addendum may be issued to all bidders . In the I � � event of failure to submit such notice, the more expensive material or process shall be included by the Contractor for a complete project. The 1 Architect will rule as to the material or process to be furnished. " ; I � January 22 , 1999 00800-1 98165 . 01 � ' Add the followin sub ara ra hs 3 . 4 . 3 3 . 4 . 4 3 .4 . 4 . 1 an � J P g P , , d 3 . 4 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 3 Provide a list showing the name of the � manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products identified in the General Requirements of � the Specifications (Division 1) and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor. � 3 .4 . 4 The Architect will reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable , objection to any such proposal . If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the Owner' s Representative may state � that action will be deferred until the Cont_actor provides further data. Failure of the Owrer to reply will constitute notice of no reasonable � objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer will not constitute a waiver of any o= the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must � comply with such requirements . 3 . 4 . 4 . 1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner ' will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those _= specified only under the conditions set forth in ' the General Requirements of the Specifications (Division 1) . 3 . 4 . 4 .2 By making requests for substitutions based on , subparagraph 3 . 4 . 4 . 1, the Contractor: a. Represents that he has personally investigated the , proposed substitute product and determined trat it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; � b. Represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified; � c. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Cor_tract � but excludes the Architect' s redesign costs , and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and , d. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required ' for the work to be complete in all respects . January 22, 1999 00800-2 98165 . 01 , � � I � , � � C. Article 4 : Administration of the Contract ' i i Add the following subparagraph: � 4 . 5 . 8 Any arbitration hearings necessary hereunder shall � � be conducted and held in Nashville, Tennessee. I D. Article 5 : Subcontractors I, ' Delete the last sentence from subparagraph 5 .2 . 1. Add the I I following subparagraph: i , ' 5 . 2 . 1. 1 No work shall be commenced until approval of such ; subcontractors has been given in writing by the Owner. If required, the Contractor shall furnish � I evidence satisfactory to the Owner, showing that any or all proposed subcontractors are competent ; to execute the various parts of the work covered � i by their subcontracts . i. Article 7 : Changes in the Work � Make the following changes to subparagraph 7 .3 . 6 : � In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable � allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute "an ; allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the ' schedule set forth in subparagraph 7 .3 . 6 . 6 below. " ' ' i Add new subparagraph 7 .3 . 6 . 6 : � I ' The allowance for overhead and profit combined, included ' in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule: � ; 1. For General Contractor, 15� of the cost of the work � performed by own forces . ' 2 . For each subcontractor, 100 of cost of the work performed by own forces . � 3 . Markup for General Contractor, for work performed by � � , his 5ubcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the � Sub-subcontractor. � � 4 . In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals shall be accompanied ; by a complete itemization of costs including labor, � � materials, and Subcontracts . Labor and materials shall � be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where � � major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be , itemized also. � I � ' January 22, 1999 00800-3 � 98165 . 01 � � . � � F. Article 9 : Pa ents and Com letion � Ym P Add new subparagraph 9 . 3 . 1.3 : � 9 . 3 . 1 .3 The Owner will retain 10� of the amount due the Contractor on the project . (See contract for � changes if any. ) Add the following to subparagraph 9 . 10 .2 : ' 9 . 10 .2 . 1 Releases of liens shall be furnished bv the Contractor on AIA Document G706A or a� form approved by the Architect . Subcontractors and ' materials suppliers lien releases may be provided by the Contractor and submitted with eac=z pay request. � G. Article 11 : Insurance and Bonds 11 . 1 . 1 Modify the first sentence of subparagraph �1 . 1. 1 ! to read as follows : The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in ' a company or companies licensed to do business in the State in which the project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from � � claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor' s operations under the _� Contract and for which the Contractor may be ' legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by �.nyone � directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be � liable: Add new subparagraph: , 11 . 1 . 1 . 8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: ' Premises-Operations (including X-C-U) i Independent Contractor' s Protective � Products and Completed Operations Personal Injury Liability. � Contractual - including specified provision for � the Contractor' s obligations under Paragraph 3 . 18 Owned, non-owned, and hired motor vehicles � January 22 , 1999 00800-4 98165 . 01 � � � � � , � � � � I � Broad Form Property Damage including Completed ' Operations ; i � � Umbrella Excess Liability , i Add to subparagraph 11 . 1 .2 the following clause: ' � , � 11. 1 .2 . 1 The insurance required by subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 � shall be written for not less than the ifollowing, or greater if required by law. � � 1 . Worker' s Compensation: I a. State: Statutory Limit ' ; � b. Applicable Federal : Statutory Limit ' c . Employer's Liability: $100, 000, without ' restriction as to whether covered by wor]anen' s ' � compensation law. ' � 2 . Comprehensive General Liability (including ' i Premises- Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage) : � � a. Bodily Injury: � --� � $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence $1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate I ' b. Property Damage: I $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence � $1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate ' ' c . Maintain Products and Completed Operations , Insurance for period of two years after final ' � payment. ' ' d. Property Damage Liability Insurance will ' I include X, C and U (explosion, collapse and ' � underground) coverage. i I 3 , Contractual Liabilit y (Hold Harmless Coverage) : � I . a. Bodily Injury: , � � $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence I b. Property Damage: $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence � � � $1, 000, 000 Annual A ggregate � � January 22 , 1999 00800-5 98165 . 01 � � i I � 4 . Personal Injury: � ' a. $1, 000, 000 Annual Aggregate ' 5 . Comprehensive Automobile Liability (owned, non- owned, hired) : , a. Bodily Injury: $1, 000, 000 Each Person � $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence b. Property Damage: � $1, 000, 000 Each Occurrence 6 . Excess Limits Liability Policy (Umbrella) : , a. $5, 000, 000 , 11. 1.2 .2 Each policy shall provide either in the body of the policy or by appropriate endorsement (rider) to the policy, that such policy cannot be , altered or canceled in less than ten days after the mailing of written registered notice to the Owner of such alteration or cancellation, cr not ' less than five days after actual receipt by the Owner of such written notice. ' Add the following to subparagraph 11 . 1 . 3 : ! 11 . 1 . 3 . 1 Furnish one copy of each Certificate of Insurance herein required for each copy of the , Agreement, which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by 11 . 1 . 1, 11 . 1 .2, and 11 . 1 .3 . The form of the certificate , shall be AIA Document G705 or a form approved by the Owner/Owner' s Representative. Furnish to - the Owner copies of endorsements that are � subsequently issued amending coverage or limits . Add the following subparagraph to 11 . 3 . 1 .1 : The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed ' Value . Add the following subparagraph to 11 .3 . 1 .2 : , If by the terms of this insurance any mandatory I deductibles are required, or if the Owner should elect to , increase the mandatory deductible amounts or purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the amount of the � deductible in the event of a paid claim. January 22 , 1999 00800-6 981��5 . 01 ! I ' , , i I � i Add the following subparagraph: , � 11 . 4 . 3 The bonding company shall furnish a letter to � the Owner from the home office acknowledging the ' � bond(s) . Separate bonds are preferred; however, � a single bond providing the stated coverage will be acceptable. IPAR.T 2 PRODUCTS ' Not Used. ' PART 3 PRODUCTS II Not Used. � , � ! END OF SECTION i � ' � � ' I I I ' ' � � � ' , � � � � . ' � ' i - ' ' ' ' I . � � ' Jaivary 22, 1999 00800-7 98165 . 01 _ I ' , I � � SECTION 01010 , � i SiTNlNIARY OF WORK ' PART 1 GENER.AL � 1 . 0;1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' I A. Renovate an existing ultrasound room into a new x-ray I room. This renovation also includes the reworking of an ' i existing oildraulic elevator cab for the purpose of using this elevator for the transport of patients in beds . , � ' 1 . 02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. AIA A201 1987 Edition. ' � B. Supplementary Conditions to AIA A201. 1 . Oi3 OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT I , A. Equipment furnished by Owner to be installed by Contractor is listed in Owner Furnished/Contractor Installed � Equipment Brochure. 1 B. Owner' s Responsibilities : ' �- 1. Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's instructions, and certificates to the Contractor. ' 2 . Submit claims for transportation damage. � 3 . Inspect deliveries jointly with the Contractor. ' ' � 4 . Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or � i missing items . ' � � 5 . Arrange for manufacturer's field services . ' � i 6 . Arrange for and deliver manufacturer' s warranties and bonds to the contractor. I C. Contractor's Responsibilities : � I I 1 . Review shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals . The contractor shall notify the architect ' ' and engineers of any conflicts in vendor drawings and � � that of the contract documents before proceeding with I installation. , i 2 . Receive and unload products at the site. 1 � ' ; Jaivary 22, 1999 01010-1 98165 . 01 � I , � � 3 . Inspect deliveries and record shortages, and damaged or defective items . , 4 . Protect equipment from damage and from exposure to elements . 5 . Handle products at site including uncrating, inventory ' and storage of equipment. 6 . Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and rinish ' products . 7 . Provide installation inspections required by public � authorities . 8 . Repair or replace items damaged by the Contractor or ' his operations . 1 . 04 FIXED EQUIPMENT LIST , A. FIXED EQUIPMENT LIST includes items to be: 1. Owner specified, Owner furnished and Contractor ' installed. 2 . Owner specified, Owner furnished and Owner installed. ' 3 . Architect specified, Contractor furnished, and _� Contractor installed. ' 1 . 05 WORK SEQUENCE A. A scheduling sequence meeting should be held with � Administrator prior to any renovation work being done. Coordinate progress schedule with the Administrator and/or ' � a delegated representative of the hospital staff . ' B. Construct work in stages to provide continuous public usage. Do not close off public usage of facilities until use of one stage of work will provide alternate passage. , 1 . 06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Coordinate use of the premises under direction of ' Architect or Hospital ' s Representative. Contractor will submit plan or discuss locations on the site of storage � areas, layout areas and offices to or with the Architect for approval . B. Do not unreasonably encumber site under this contract . , C . Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. ' January 22 , 1999 01010-2 981b5 . 01 � � � � � I � � D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping � � of products stored on premises . E. Obtain and pay for additional storage and work areas if ' required for operations under this contract . � F. Keep site clean and building broom clean at all times . Vacuum passages between existing and new or renovated � spaces on a daily basis and/or as the need occurs . 1. O17 OWNER OCCUPANCY , A. Owner will occupy premises during entire construction ! period to conduct his operations . Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to ' � facilitate Owner usage. B. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for ' � designated portion of work prior to Owner occupan,cy. Allow: � 1. Access for Owner personnel. 1 ' � ' ' 2 . Use of parking facilities . , I I 3 . Operation of HVAC and electrical systems . C. On occupancy, Owner will provide for occupied areas : ' '�' , 1. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems . i 1 ; 2 . Maintenance � � 3 . Security � , � � PART 2 PRODUCTS � Not used. I , ; PART 3 EXECUTION � Not used. I ' j , END OF SECTION , � i i ; � 1 � � Jaivary 22, 1999 01010-3 98165 . 01 I I � ; i ' ' � , � SECTION 01031 ; I ' ' � ALTER.ATION PROJECT PROCEDURES i ' PART 1 GENERAL � • 01 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES i � A. Schedule work in the sequences and within times specified ' � in Section 01010 . , I . B. Submit separate detailed subschedule for alterations work, � coordinated with the Construction Schedules . Show: ' � , 1. Each stage of work and dates of occupancy areas . � 2 . Date of Substantial Completion for area of alterations , work, as appropriate. I ' 3 . Trades and subcontractors employed in each stage. 1 . 02 ALTER.ATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION i 1 i A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching, I � to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to � cause the least damage to each type of work, and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work. ' '' B. Perform cutting and removal work to minimum necessary, and i in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. ' � 1 . Cut finish surfaces such as mason ; ry, tile, plaster or metals by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight � line at a naturaY point of division. ' � �C. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section 01045 . � I ' , �D. Protect existing finishes, equipment and adjacent work, � � which is scheduled to remain, from damage. ' � 1 . Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes � of temperature. ' � a. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. � b. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and ' � humidity control as needed to prevent damage to � remaining existing work and to new work. ' I � � � � I ' January 22 , 1999 01031-1 98165 . 01 i i � E. Provide tem ora enclosures as s ec ' � ' P rY p ified in S�ction 01500, to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by the Owner, and to provide w�ather ' protection. F. Discoveries of construction, furnishings and articles ' having a historical or private value remain the property of the Owner. 1 . ^Promptly notify the Architect, t 2 . Protect discovery from damage from elements or work. 3 . The Architect will promptly transmit the decision for ' disposition of discovery. 4 . Store items to be retained by the Owner in a safe, dry ' place on the site. Dispose of items the Owner releases . , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 SALVAGED MATERIALS � A. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material ' to replace damaged work of existing construction, when material is not readily obtainable on the current marl�;et. -" 1 . Use particular care in removal and salvage of the ' following items : a. Light Fixtures , b. Doors c . Plumbing Fixtures ' d. Ceiling Tile 2 . Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on the , site. 3 . Items not required for use in repair of existing work ' remain the property of the Owner. 4 . Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new ' construction except with permission of the Architect. 5 . Dispose of serviceable material not wanted by the Owner � in a proper manner and identify this credit te the project. � January 22 , 1999 01031-2 98155 . 01 ' � I I ' II � 2 . 0�2 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING , ' A. General requirements that work be complete: , 1 . Provide same products or types of construction as that ' ; in existing, structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. , a. Generally, the Contract Documents will not define j standards of workmanship present in existing construction; the Contractor is expected to ' I ; determine products by inspection and any necessary I I testing, and wor]ananship by experience. i 2 . Presence of a product, finish or type of construction ' requires that patching, extending or matching be iperformed as necessary to make the work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality unless the � , i existing standard of quality is less than desirable as determined by the Architect. ' 3 . Patch, replace and/or repair finishes disturbed in ' , areas where work is done under the terms of the contract but where no other finish work is required. ' PART 3 EXECUTION ' -3 . 01 PROCEDURES A. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who ' are capable of matching existing quality of wor]Qnanship. � Quality of patched or extended work is same as that for i new work. , 3 . 02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Tn�here partitions are removed, patch floors, walls and ' ceilings with finish materials to match existing and/or � replace both areas with new materials and finishes approved by Architect. ' II 1 . Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces ! becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads . , I I 2 . Where extreme change of plane (2" or more) occurs, request instructions from the Architect as to the ' I method of making transition. i I IB. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new , floors . ' � January 22 , 1999 01031-3 98165 . 01 I � I ' , ' 3 . 03 DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished ' surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored- or shows other imperfections, with matching material . 1 . Provide adequate support of substrate prior to pa�.ching , the finish. 2 . Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces ' in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over the entire surface. ' 3 . When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish the entire surface to the nearest intersections . ' � 3 . 04 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW A. in�hen new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, ' make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Match existing adjacent work with patched work in texture and appe�.rance so that patch or transition is invisible at five feet_ ' 1 . When finished surfaces are cut in such a way t=zat a smooth transition with new work is not possible, ' terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and -_, provide trim appropriate to finished surface. ' 3 . 05 CLEANING A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in , Section 01700 . 1 . Clean Owner-occupied areas daily and/or as the need ' , occurs . . 2 . Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust , in Owner-occupied areas immediately. B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make ' surfaces ready for work of successive trades . ' C. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return to a condition suitable for use by the Owner. ' END OF SECTION , , � January 22 , 1999 01031-4 98165 . 01 � ' , i , , I � SECTION 01040 ' CONTRACT COORDINATION ' PART 1 GENERAT, � 1. 0;1 RELATED WORK 1 , A. Sequence of construction: Section 01010 . � B. Owner occupancy: Section 01010 . , C. Cutting and patching Section 01045 . , D. Project meetings : Section 01200 . ' E. Substitutions and product options : Section 01630 . ' F. Closeout submittals : Section 01700 . � , 1 . 02 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various ' i i sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. , �-_, B. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01010 . ' 1 . 03 MEETINGS A. In addition to ro ress meetin s p g g specified in Section 01200 , hold coordination meetings and preinstallation ' � conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure � coordination of work. , 1 . 04 COORDINATION OF 5UBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section ' � 01300 . ; B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent , responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and , � placing in service, such equipment . � C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure ' ' ' compatibility of space, of operating elements, and effect on work of other sections . ' I � � � � � January 22, 1999 01040-1 98165 . 01 � � �i . ' ' 1 . 05 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of , installation of inechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on the drawings . �ollow routings indicated for pipes, ducts and condui�s as ' closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for ' other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs . B. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate ' locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements . 1 . 06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT , A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of ' portions of the work designated for Owner occupancy designated in Section 01010 . B. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate ' Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. C. After Owner occupancy of the premises, coordinate access ' to site by various sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with the Contract -; Documents, to minimize disruption of the Owner' s ' activities . D. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01700 . ' PART 2 PRODUCTS , Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION ' Not Used � END OF SECTION � ' ' January 22 , 1999 01040-2 98165 . 01 ' i ' i - , i � SECTION 01045 ' � CUTTING AND PATCHING ' PART 1 GENER.AL � 1 . 0,1 DESCRIPTION � � A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the work and to: , I I 1 . Fit the parts together and properly integrate with � other work. ' � ! 2 . Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. ' i 3 . Uncover work to provide for Owner's observation of covered work. i 4 . Remove and re lace noncom 1 in work ' P p y g performed under � contract. � 5 . Remove samples of installed work for testing. � 6 . Provide openings in non-structure elements for penetrations of inechanical and electrical work. ' ' B. In addition to requirements above, upon written instructions of Owner: ' ' 1 . Remove samples of installed materials for testing. ' 2 . Remove items to provide for alteration of existing ' work. 1 . 02 PRECAUTIONS ' A. Do not endanger work when cutting or altering. ' ; �B. Do not cut or alter work of another trade without � consulting the trade involved and the Superintendent of � construction. ; 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS ' ' I � A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section ' � 01300 . i I B. Prior to cutting any structural member, submit written � I notice to the Structural Engineer requesting consent to ' � proceed with cutting including: i ' I � � January 22 , 1999 01045-1 98165 . 01 1 1 . Identifications of project. ' 2 . Description of affected work. , 3 . Necessity for cutting. 4 . Effect on other work, and on structural integrity of ' ' project. I 5 . Description of proposed work. Designate scope of : , a. Cutting and patching b. Trades required to perform work. ' c . Products proposed to be used. ' d. Extent of refinishing. 6 . Alternatives to cutting and patching. ' 7 . Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching. ' C. Submit cost estimate for cutting and patching requested by Owner prior to starting work. � D. Should conditions of work, or schedule, require a change __, of materials or methods, submit written recommendations to ' Architect, including: 1 . Conditions which cause requirement for change. 2 . Recommendations for alternative materials or methods . , 3 . Submittals as required for substitutions . ' 4 . Cost estimate for changing materials and methods . E. Submit written notice to Architect designating time work ' will be uncovered for his observation. 1 . 04 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COSTS ' A. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, and wor}c not complying with requirements of contracts, including costs ' of additional services of the Architect or other consultants shall be paid by the party responsible for ' ill-timed, defective, or noncomplying work as determined by the Architect. ' B. Cost of work done on instructions of Owner, other than defective or noncomplying work will be paid by the Owner. , January 22 , 1999 01045-2 . 98105 . 01 , , I I ' I � ' PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2 . OI1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials required for original construction. ' ' B. For any change in materials, submit request for � , substitution as specified above. ' � I iPART 3 EXECUTION 1 ' I � 3 . 0,1 INSPECTION � � I A. Inspect existing conditions including elements subject to I movement or damage during: ' ; � 1 . Cutting and patching. ' B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting � installation of new products . I ' 3 . 02 PREPAR.ATION ' A. Before cutting: 1 . Shore, brace, and support as necessary to maintain structural integrity. , _� I 2 . Protect other parts of project from damage. ' 3 . 03 PERFORMING WORK A. Fit and adjust materials to provide a finished and � � complete installation. � � B. Cut and remove materials, to ensure other work will not be � damaged, and new materials can be properly installed. , ; � ; �C. Restore work to ensure compliance with specifications . ' � D. Refinish surfaces to provide an even uniform appearance. I 1 . Continuous surfaces : Refinish to nearest intersections . , 2 . Assemblies : Refinish entire assemblies . � � - , I I END OF SECTION � ' � ' I . I Jaivary 22, 1999 01045-3 98165 . 01 i I 1 � � i � i � � � � � : � SECTION 41200 � � I � i PROJECT MEETING� i , � PART 2 GENERA.L � 1. 0�1 MEETTZVGS - GENERAL ' � A. Contractor' s Responsibilities : i � � 1 . Schedule and administer meetings throughout duration af ' � I wark. I 2 . Prepare agenda for mee�ing� . ' � 3 . Distribute written notice of each meeting seven days in � advance of ineeting date. . ' I ! � ? � 4 . Make physical arran.gements for mee�ings . � ; i 5 . Preside at rneetings. � � 6 . Record �.he minutes; include a3l si �a.ifzcarzt ' � g proceedings ' � and decisions . � � '? . Reproduce and distribu�e copie� of minutes wi�hin three � ! days af�er each meeting. ' -� i i � 8 . Provide one copy ta: � a. All participan�.s in t�he meeting, including the , ; � Architect. i I ! b. All parGies affected by decisions made a� the ' � I meeting. i � � B. Par�icipants: ' ' , 1. Qua3.zfied representative af cantractar�, ' subcontractors, and suppliers authorized to act on ' ' behalf of the parties they represent. ' ' i I � 2 . Architect � � � 1 . 02 PRE-CON�TRUCTION MEETING � A. Schedule meetin.g within the early stages of Con.struction � as determined by the General Contraetor. 1 � iB. Suggested Agenda: Prepare writter� matexial, distribu�e ' �.ists and discu�s: � � ( � � � January 22, 1999 01200-1 98165 . 01 � � ' 1 - ' . Identification of ma�or subcontractors and suppliers . 2 . Projected constru.ction schedules . ' 3 . Critical work sequencing. 4 . Major equipment deliveries and priorities . t 5 . Project coordination, including designation of ' responsible personnel . 6 . Procedures for, and processing of: a. Field decisions ' b. Proposal requests ' c. Submittals d. Change orders ' e. Applications for payments 7 . Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents , ' 8 . Procedures for Maintaining Record Documents , 9 . Use of Premises : -' a. Office, work and storage--areas ' b. Owner' s requirements 10 . Construction facilities, construction aids and ' controls . . 11. Temporary utilities ' 12 . Safety and first aid procedures , 13 . Security procedures 14 . Housekeeping procedures . ' 1. 03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular monthly meetings and as necessary, � schedule additional meetings .. ' B. Suggested Agerida: � 1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2 . Review of work progress since previous meeting. ' January 22•, 1999 01200-2 98165 . 01 ' ! ' I � _ . � � I I I I 1 � 3 . Field observations, problems, and conflicts . � I � I 4 . Problems, which impede construction schedule. i � � I 5 . Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules . � � 6 . Corrective measures and procedures required to regain I � projected schedule. � I I 7 . Revisions to construction schedule. � 8 . Plan progress and schedule for succeeding work period. 9 . Coordination of schedules . • � 10 . Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. � � 11. Maintenance of quality standards . 1 ' I i 12 . Review proposed changes for: � a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion ' I f date. � ib. Effect on other contracts of the Project. ' f 13 . Other business . � I =s � � � I END OF SECTION � � i � � � � � ; � � � � �1 1 I � ! � � � � January 22, 1999 01200-3 98165 . 01 i � � � � � i SECTION 01300 , � � ' SUBMITTALS , � PART 1 GENERAT, I ; 1 . Oi1 SUBMITTALS � � A. Submittals include shop drawings, design calculations, ; j diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, � nomenclature charts, brochures and other data which are � prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, ! Manufacturer, Supplier, Fabricator, or Distributor and � i which illustrate some portion of the project. ; B. The Contractor shall understand that the submittal of the required documents does not constitute compliance with the � I - requirements of the contract documents; only drawings reviewed by the Architect/Structural Engineer constitute ; compliance. � C. It is the Contractor' s responsibility to furnish � I equipment, materials, and labor for the project, which � � meets the requirements of the codes and authorities quoted, as well as the contract documents . Proprietary ' ' items specified herein only establish a minimum functional ; � and aesthetic standard and it is incumbent upon the � �_� I Contractor to ascertain conformance of these proprietary items or any proposed substitution with the codes and , � authorities . � �D. Contract documents shall not include shop drawings, vendor ! drawings, or any material prepared and submitted by the � , I contractor or subcontractor. 1 . 02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES I ,' A. The individual specification sections identify when i submittals are required. ; iB. Submit all requested items to the Architect for review. � � � � ,C . Al1 submittals and samples shall be accompanied by � transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing project name, � i Contractor's name, number of drawings, titles, and other � pertinent data. Identifv on transmittal work and product � by Specification Section. Transmittals which do not � i identify the specification section number will not be processed by the Architect. � I � i D. Provide required blank space on each submittal for the I contractor's and the Architect/Engineer' s stamps . � � � i � � January 22, 1999 01300-1 98165 . 01 i � E. Indi � vidual Specification Sections establish forns of submittals required. � 1 . 03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each � drawing with project name and number; identi�y each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, of Contract documents . � B. Reproduction of Contract Drawings for shop drawings is not acceptable. � C. Identify field dimensions, show relationship to ad�acent or critical features of work or products . D. Submit three blueline prints and one transp�rency � (reproducible sepia) of each shop drawings . Upon completion of the review by the Architect/Engineer the � transparency and one print will be returned to the contractor. The contractor, is responsible for providing additional prints for his needs . E. A copy of the marked-up shop drawings with the Architect � and/or Engineer' s review stamp is to be maintained at the jobsite. � F. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2" x 11" . 1 . 04 PRODUCT DATA � A. Submit four (4) copies of product data. Submit only nages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed � data to identify pertinent products, referencecl to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics, and capacities; � wiring and piping diagrams and controls, component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances . B. Modify manufacturer' s standard schematic drawings and � diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information which is not applicable. � C. Provide manufacturer' s preparation, assembly, and installation instructions . � 1. 05 SAMPLES A. Submit full-page range of manufacturer' s standard finishes �, except where more restrictive requirements are specified, indicating colors, textures, and patterns . � January 22 , 1999 01300-2 981E5 . 01 � i � � � ( � I I I ( B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of � j i products, including parts and attachments as required by Architect/Engineer. i � � � C. Approved samples, which are of proper size, may be I I incorporated in work. � D. Label each sample with identification. ' � , I E. Field Finishes : Provide full samples at Project, at � location acceptable to Architect as required by individual � Specification Section. Install each sample complete and ifinished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in � , completed work. � I 1 . OI6 CONTRACTOR REVIEW � ' A. Review submittals to determine and verify field � I measurements; field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalog numbers, and compliance of submittal witlz - i requirements of Contract Documen�s before transmittal to ' � the Architect . � � B. Stamp and sign each sheet of shop drawings and product ' � data, and sign or initial each sample to certify I compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. � � Notify designated recipient in writing at time of � ' submittal of deviations from requirements of Contract � ��._� Documents . � C. Work requiring shop drawings, whether called for by the ; contract documents or requested by the Contractor, shall not be commenced until the submission has been reviewed by , �I the Architect/Engineer. Work shall be in accordance with ' , and performed from the reviewed drawings and the � � I Contractor or his Subcontractor shall make certain that proper shop drawings are at the site of the work. � � � f �D. By reviewing, approving and submitting shop drawings, the i Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and ' verified all field measurements, field construction � ! I criteria, materials, member sizes catalog numbers, and similar data and that he has checked and coordinated shop � drawings with the requirements of the project and of the contract documents . � 1 . 07 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW � � ' �A. The Architect/Engineer will review submittals with � � reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The � Architect/Engineer' s review and/or corrections refer only � ' , to the general arrangement and conformance of the subject , of the submittals with the design concept of the project ' and with the information given in the contract documents . j � Under no conditions should the Contractor consider the � � January 22, 1999 01300-3 98165 . 01 I � � � review to include the dimensions, quantities, and details of the items nor the approval of an assembly in which the item functions . The Architect/Engineer' s review o.E shop �, drawings shall not relieve the Contractor or responsibility for any deviation from the requireme�ts of the contract documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect/Engineer in writing of such deviation at the � I time of submission and the Architect/Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation; nor sha_1 the � Architect/Engineer' s review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions from the shop drawing. � 1 . 08 RESUBMITTALS � A. When shop drawings are returned to the Contractor with the '�� Architect/Engineer' s corrections the Contractor shall make � the required corrections . Upon request, resubmit or_e set - of corrected drawings . The Contractor shall direct �1 specific attention in writing or on the submitted drawings to revisions other than requested by the Architect/Engineer on previous submission. 1 . 09 DISTRIBUTION � A. Distribute re roductions of sho p p drawings, copies of � I product data, and samples which bear the _ Architect/Engineer' s stamp of approval, to job site file, �-_, Record Documents file, subcontractors, suppliers, other � affected contractors, and other entities requiring information. PART 2 PRODUCTS � Not used. � PART 3 EXECUTION � Not used. END OF SECTION � � . � � January 22 , 1999 01300-4 98165 . 01 � � � I � I � SECTION 01310 I � � � CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES , PART 1 GENER.AL ; 1 . Q1 FORMAT �� ; A. Prepare network analysis system using similarities to the i i critical path method, as outlined in The Associated � ' i General Contractors of America publication, "The Use of � CPM in Construction - A Manual for General Contractors . " � I � � ' B. Sequence of listings : The chronological order of the start � • of each item of work � C. Scale and spacing: Prepare to allow space for updating. �� I . 1 . 02 CONTENT I , A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with � dates for the beginning and completion of each element of construction. � B. Identify each item by major Specifications section number. �', C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically � �_� ; grouped activities . I D. Provide subschedules to define critical ortions o p f the � entire schedule. �E. Show accumulated percentage of completion for each item, I � , i and total percentage of work completed, as of first day of i each month. F. Show delivery dates for (Owner furnished products) and �' (products specified under allowances, if any) . � 1 . 03 MONTHLY PROGRESS REVISIONS � A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal � � and projected completion date of each activity. I I IB: Show changes occurring since previous submission of � � schedule for the following. I � � 1 . Major changes in scope. � � 2 . Activities modified since previous submission. � � I 3 . Revised projection of progress and completion. � i , i � ' January 22, 1999 01310-1 98165 . 01 � � it �. 1r Provide a narrative report as needed to define. 1 . Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on ,� the schedule. 2 . Corrective action taken or recommended, and its effect. �I , 3 . The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors . �r, ( 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Distribute copies of revised schedules to Owner, after ,�� review, resubmit required revised data as required. B. Submit revised progress schedule with each monthly � I Application for Payment. 1 . 05 INSTRUCTIONS �1 A. Instruct Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other parties whose actions affect scheduled work, to promptly report inability to comply with schedules . Provide a detailed � explanation and suggested remedies . � END OF SECTION I .-__� � � � � �. �' � � � January 22 , 1999 01310-2 98165 . 01 � i � � ( � I � � � � , � f SECTION 01400 � ' I TESTS & INSPECTIONS � � PART 2 GENERAL � 1. 0i1 The Tes�ing Agenc� will be selected by the Architect. The � � Owner will pay for tests and anspections unl.ess otherwi�e ! � specified. • i i ( 1 . 0;2 The responsibility of the Testa.ng Agency shall be to tes�, ��, j � z.nspect and report. Work and materials not complying wi�h " i � these specifications and referenced codes, standards and � � ( specificatians shall be reported ta the Contractor and Architect immedia�.ely. Field notes confirming such ' � notification are to be submit�.ed with te�t anc3 inspection 1 I reports . Gopies af field no�.es are to be left with the '� � � proaect sup�rintendent priar �o leaving the construction , � site. Field nates shall anciu.de the message given to the Con�rac�.or, date and time of znessage, name of Contractor' s � ; Representative in£ormed, nature of discrepancy, action taken by Contractor, and narne of Te�ting Agency � � Representative. � ; 1 . 03 Tests and i.nspections of materials and pracesses will be required as set forth in the apprapriate �ections of the�e I f specificatians and as directed by the Archztec�. � �-_� � Labaratory and fiel.d p�rsonnel are ta be qualified with a minimum of �wo year� experience. � 1 . 04 Dispose of or correct ma�.erials and work n.ot complying with the specifications in. an approved manner. Should the contrac�or elect ta accept ma�.erial or wark not complying � � ta the �pecifications, he thereby a�sumes full responsibility for the material ox work and design, tes�G, inspection, and correc�.ive ac�.ion should the material nat canfarm to appropriate codes . � �.. 05 Whenever extra testing desi.gn andJor znspectians are ' n.ecessi�ated by the fault or error o� the Cantractar, ar � � � by �,he nancompl.iance o� the materials or warkmanship with � � the requirements of these plans an.d speci�ica�ionS, or for � f the conv'enience of the Con�.ractor, the Owner will pay far i � � �uch extra te�ts and inspec�ions but will deduct the � , ; amounts of such payments £rom paymen�s due ta the i Con�.rac�.or. Addztional work for the Archi�ect shall be � at the rate of 2 . 5 times direct personnel expense plus the � ( cost of direct e�ense. � � I � 2. 06 The reports shall indicate that the materials were �.ested � in accordance with the requirements of the Specificatiora.s � � and referenced codes, and �ha1.l state whe�her the material ; ar material� passed or failed ta pass thase requirementS . � i Janua 22, 1999 01400-1 98165 . 01 I � � i ll �r The Architect or his representative (Testing and Inspection Agency) shall select the samples of mat?rials for testing. In no case shall the vendor be considered a �r representative of the Architect for this purpose. 1 . 07 Copies of test or inspection reports are to be issued ;'� within 48 hours of the test or inspection. The following information is to be included: Name and Address of Test Agency �� Date Project Name �� Project Location Project Contractor - Material Supplier Specified Strength �� Type of Material Time Sampled Name of Person Performing Tests ` Quantity Represented y Weather Conditions Results of Tests 1� Date Tested Location of Material Tested Remarks Distribution of Reports 1 . 08 Make the premises available to the Architect and to the �-_; Testing and Inspection Agency and shall cooperate with the � Testing Agency. 1 . 09 Notify the Testing Agency 24 hours prior to the required testing and inspection. � 1 .10 The Architect will make decisions or set guidelines for acceptance or rejection of materials based on test 1� results . 1 . 11 Advise the Architect immediately of improper testing procedures, unqualified personnel performing �.est, �, unnecessary testing or incorrect test results . 1 . 12 Neither the observations of the Architect in his � administration of the contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the �' work in accordance with the Contract Documents . END OF SECTION � � January 22 , 1999 01400-2 98165 . 01 � I - � ' � � j SECTION 01500 � � �; i TEMPORA.RY FACTLITTES � i � PART 1 GENERAL � 1. 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS � ; � � A. Contrac�or' s use of premises : Secta.on 01010 . i I � j B. Final cleaning: Section 01700 . � 1 . Oj2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING i � A. Provide service required for construc�ion operations, wi�.h � pol.es, branch wiring, distribu�ion boxes arzd other � I appurten.ances loca�ed to allaw service and lighting by � � means of canstructi.on �ype power cords . Pay for costs of energy used. B. Arrange with IocaZ electric power company and pay fees far � tapping onta existing electric power source and providing � meter for temparary construction la,gh�.s and power. � i � C. Connect to existing service inside the meter for 11Q and � 220 valt pawer for lights and pawer required, and provide , � branch. wiring and distributian boxes loca�.ed to all.ow �� _, i service and lightirzg by means af con�tructian type pawer i cords . ' 1 . Do not use the �wner' s �ource for operatian o� electric � ' heat. i � I 2 . The Owner will pay costs of energy used except as � � � follows : i , I a. If higher vol.tages are required, znake arrangements � , � with local elec�ric power company; make connections � to primary source; and pay installation fee� and ' i meter charges . � � D. Provide lighting for construction aperations . � i E. Existing and ,permanent �ighting may be used during � , � construction. Main�.ain lighting and make rou�ine repairs . , � F. When temporary items are n.o longer required, remove the system. � � � i ' I � � ' Jar�.uary 22, 1999 01500-1 98165 . 01 � � I � .�. , r 1 . 03 HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for � construction operations and to protect materials, finishes and equipment from damage due to temperature and humidity. B. Coordinate use of existing facilities with the Owner. � . Extend and supplement with temporary uriits as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations and to protect materials, finishes and equipment from damage due to temperature and humidity. C. Obtain approval of Owner' s Representative priar to � operation of permanent facilities for temporary purpa�ses, verify that installation is approved for operation, and that all filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation and maintenance. • , I}. Provide smoke free temporary heat required for performance ��. of work. Operi fires will not be permitted. E. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, � to disperse humidity, and to prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases . 1 . 04 TELEPHONE SERVICE � A. Provide telephone service to the field office. Toll calls . by parties other than the Contractor will be at their own � ' expens e. �-' 1 . 05 WATER � A. Provide service required for construction operations . Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses . Pay meter charges . � B. Arrange with the local water company and pay fees for tapping existing water mains and providing meter for � temporary construction water. C. Connect to existing facilities inside the Owner' s meter. -- Extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is � available by use of hoses . The Owner will pay meter charges . 1 . If the existing water supply is not sufficient, either � tap the line inside the meter where sufficient Taater supply may be obtained, or make arrangements with the � local water company to tap a water main. If it is necessary to tap a water main, pay tapping fees and meter charges . �� '. � D. When temporary piping is no longer required, remove it . � January 22, 1999 01500-2 98165 . 01 �� I � � E. Provide drinking water in approved sanitary containers and �� i i disposable cups for workmen. 1 . 0�6 SANITARY FACILITIES � A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures ' for use by workmen. � ' B. Construct facilities to be weathertight, and in compliance i i with applicable legal and health requirements . I � i C. Keep facilities clean and sanitary and maintain facilities , until construction is completed. ; � ; D. If temporary facilities are placed over manholes, use I flushing type fixtures . _ I E. Do not allow workmen to use Owner's facilities . � 1 . 07 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ' ' A. Designated existing stairs may be used by construction � personnel . Coordinate with the Hospital's Representative. � ; B. Designated existing and permanent elevators may be used by �` � construction personnel and for transporting lightweight , materials . Do not exceed 80� of the elevator' s rated load � capacity. Provide protective coverings for finish � �-_n � surfaces of cars and entrances . C. Do not use existing elevators for construction purposes � I unless the Hospital 's Representative grants permission. � 1 . 08 ENCLOSURES � , A. Provide temporary insulated weathertight closures of I openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow � j ! for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of I unauthorized persons . Provide doors with self-locking ! hardware and locks . r � i �B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to , � separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent � I penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied � areas, and to prevent damage to existing areas and i i equipment. i � 1 . Construction: Frame and cover with sheet materials � � � with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections � I with existing surfaces . � � 2 . Sound rating: STC 35 in accordance with ASTM E90 . I � � � Jaluary 22 , 1999 01500-3 98165 . 01 I � � � 3 . Fire rating: Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84 . 4 . Finish: Paint surfaces e osed to view i � xA n Owner occupied areas to match surrounding. 1 . 09 BARRIERS � A. Provide as required to prevent public entr� to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations . � 1 . 10 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish, and � periodically dispose of off-site. ' B�. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. � Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations . The barriers are to be constructed to resist the passage of dust. � C. Also see Section 01710 for further cleaning instructions . 1 . 11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS � A. Provide a weathertight building or an office trailer u�.�ith: A 1 . Lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and � ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture. 2 . Job telephone as specified above. �� 3 . Space for Project meetings, with table and chai_s to accommodate a minimum of 12 persons . � 4 . Work table large enough to accommodate working drawings . 5 . Files, drawings, racks, and shelves to maintain order � and neatness . B. Provide janitor service for the office. � , C. Provide lighted, weathertight storage sheds, for tools, materials and equipment with adequate space for orga�ized storage and access . Provide heat and ventilation for � products requiring controlled conditions . D. Locate these facilities to preclude interference with •work �' and as directed. � January 22 , 1999 01500-4 98165 . 01 � � i� I I �� I I � 1. 1i PARKING FACILITIES � � , A. Parking space at the site is limited. ; i ,� B. Make arrangements with the Hospital' s Representative to secure parking spaces for workmen. Do not park in spaces other than those designated by the Contractor. � � C. If designated area is insufficient, contractors and �� , I workmen will be required to make their own arrangements � i for parking. � ; 1. 1�3 REMOVAL � i I A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and � � construction prior to Substantial Completion. � B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of � � - temporary facilities . Remove underground installations to a depth of two feet and grade as indicated or directed by , i the Architect. � � C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to , � specified, or to original condition. �' I I � PART 2 PRODUCTS �-= No t Us ed. � � � I I . � PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used - 1 � � � � I I END OF SECTION � ! I ' I. ' ' � I � � � � I I � I I i � � January 22, 1999 01500-5 98165 . 01 � � � � i � � i i SECTION 01630 � � PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS i � PAR.T 1 GENERAL � 1 . 0,1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED � � A. Contractor's option in selection of products . � � I B. Products list. � C. Requests for substitution of products . ' 1 . Q2 OWNER & ARCHITECT'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT � I I A. Under terms set forth below, reasonable requests for � - substitution will be considered. If, in the opinion of Owner and Architect, substitute items are equal to the � products specified and are satisfactory for incorporation � in the Work, then the substitute items will be approved. � � , 1 . 03 CONTRACTOR S OPTIONS � � ' A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by � Description Only: Select a product meeting those standards or description. � -'� I B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers , � with an "or equal" statement: submit a request for substitution for a manufacturer not specifically named. � � � �C. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers : Select ; products of a named manufacturer meeting specifications . � I �D. Products Specified by Manufacturer, Brand Name, Type or I � Catalog Number: Specification is for purpose of � establishing standards of quality, and style desired. � i Specification does indicate Owner and Architect' s preference, but reasonable requests for substitution may ' � be submitted. , IE. Product Specified by Manufacturer, Brand Name, Type or Catalog Number and Followed by Words "No 5ubstitutions : " � � Provide Products Specified" . � � , i 1 . 04 LIMITATIONS OF SUBSTITUTIONS , � �A. Submit requests for substitutions prior to issuance of subcontracts or purchase orders . Subsequent request will � be considered only in case of product unavailability or � , other conditions beyond control of Contractor. � � � January 22 , 1999 01630-1 98165 . 01 � � r B. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without senarate formal request, when requested directly by a subcont�actor � or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents . C. Do not order or install substitute products without � written acceptance. D. Only one request for substitution for each product w_11 be � considered. Ti�hen substitution is not accepted, provide specified product. 1. 05 CONTRACTOR' S REPRESENTATION � A. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents : . � 1 . He has personally investigated proposed product or - method, and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified or the credit or � addition offered represents a fair or superior difference in value. 2 . He will provide the same warranty for substituted ,� product as for product or method specified. 3 . He will coordinate installation of accepted '� substitution into Work, making such changes as may be _� required for Work to be complete in all respects . � 4 . He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently become apparent . 5 . Cost data is complete and includes all related cost � under his Contract, but excludes the Architect' s I design. 1. 06 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with � complete data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: 1 . Comparison of the qualities of the pro�osed � substitution with that specified. 2 . Changes required in other elements of the Work because � of the substitution. - 3 . Effect on the construction schedule. ' 4 . Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. �� January 22 , 1999 01630-2 98165 . 01 � i � � 1 , ; i ' � i i 5 . Any required license fees or royalties . � ' 6 . Availability of maintenance service, and source of � replacement materials . � � B. Identify product by Specifications section number. i Provide the manufacturer's name and address, trade name of - � product, and model or catalog number. List fabricators � and suppliers as appropriate. I j � C. Attach product data as specified in Section 01340 . , � D. List similar projects using the proposed product, dates of I installation, and names of Architect and the Owner. � � E. The Owner and Architect will review requests for ' substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify � Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or � ; C- reject the requested substitution. Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute a waiver of requirements I, � of Contract Documents . , � 1 . 07 PRODUCTS LIST � � A. For products specified only by reference standards (ASTM, etc . ) , include with listing of each product: 1 . Name and address of manufacturer. .� �� 2 . Trade name. � 3 . Model or catalog designation. � 4 . Manufacturer' s data to include performance and test i � i � data and reference standards . ' B. For products which will affect structure or be affected by � structural considerations, include drawings, diagrams, � illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, test data, and reference standards . i ` PART 2 PRODUCTS I � Not Used. � I I I � ' PART 3 EXECUTION � � Not Used. � END OF SECTION � � Jarivary 22, 1999 01630-3 98165 . 01 � ii � � � j i � � � SECTION 01700 � CONTRACT CLOSEOUT i I � PART 1 GENER.AL � - i 1. 0�1 DESCRIPTION �� A. Definitions : Closeout is hereby defined to include , general requirements near the end of Contract time, in � j I preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar � actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific � requirements for individual units of work are specified in � j sections of Divisions 2 through 16 . Time of clos�eout is i directly related to "Substantial Completion and; therefore, may be either a single time period for entire � ' work or a series of time periods for individual parts of � the work which have been certified as substantially i complete at different dates . That time variation (if any) � � ; shall be applicable to other provisions of this section, ; I regardless of whether resulting from "phased completion" � originally specified by the contract documents or , i subsequently agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. � 1 . 0,2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 1 �� A. General: Prior to requesting Architect's inspection for certification of substantial completion, as required by General Conditions (for either the entire work or portions � thereof) , complete the following and list known exceptions � in request: � � 1 . In progress payment request coincident with or first � � following date claimed, show either portion of work � � claimed as "substantially completed" , or list ; I incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons � ' for being incomplete. Include supporting documentation , for completion as indicated elsewhere in these contract ' documents. i � , 2 . Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. , 3 . Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover _ requirements . � 4 . Submit specific warranties, worl�nanship/maintenance jbonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and ' similar documents . � � � I January 22 , 1999 01700-1 98165 . 01 i ' � � 5 . Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner' s fu11 and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and � utilities, including (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases . 6 . Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of mate��ials, \� and similar physical items to Owner. 7 . Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to � Owner, and advise Owner' s personnel to changeotier in � security provisions . _ 8 . Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions ' of Owner' s operating/maintenance personnel . Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with � construction tools and facilities, mockups, and similar elements . 9 . The Contractor is responsible for making all punch � lists and execution of same prior to his request for substantial completion. � B. Inspection Procedures : Upon receipt of Contractor' s - request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. � Following initial inspection, Architect will either " prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise --_, Contractor of work which must be performed prior to � issuance of Certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form � initial "punchlist" for final acceptance. 1 . 03 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. General: Prior to requesting Architect' s final inspection � for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following � and list known exceptions (if any) in request: 1 . Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and � accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2 . Submit updated final statement, accounting for � additional (final) changes to the Contract Sum. 3 . Submit certified copy of Architect' s final punchlist of ' itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Architect. � January 22 , 1999 01700-2 98165 . 01 � i , � i r � ' � ' 4 . Submit final meter readings for utilities, measured � record of stored fuel, and similar data as of time of substantial completion or when Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the I work. � � I - � 5 . Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents . I � � 6 . Complete final cleaning up requirements, including I � I touch-up of marred surfaces . ' �i ` � 7 . Submit consent of surety. � ' � 8 . Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, , � acceptable to Owner. � 9 . Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage � complying with insurance requirements until Owner takes final acceptance (i . e. final payment) , or sooner by mutual agreement. � I i � B. Reinspection Procedures : Upon receipt of Contractor' s notice that work has been completed, including punchlist - , items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting � ; incomplete item delays because of acceptable i circumstances, Architect will reinspect work. Upon ' i completion of reinspection, Architect will either prepare � -_y � certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure � ; will be repeated. 11 . 04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS � A. General : Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in individual sections of the specifications . i Do not use record documents for construction purposes; I � protect from deterioration or loss in a secure, fire resistive location; provide access to record documents for Architect' s reference during normal working hours . � B. Maintenance Manuals : Organize maintenance-and-operating � manual information into suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and � , indexed (thumbtabbed) ; examples : Elevators, Finish Floor, � Maintenance, Lawn and Plant Maintenance, Roof Maintenance. � Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, � warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turnaround" � cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product � data, and similar applicable information. Bind each � manual of each set into a heavy duty 2" , three ring vinyl � ' covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded 0 I , Jan�uary 22 , 1999 01700-3 98165 . 01 � I � � sheet information. Mark identification on both fro�t and spine of each binder. C. The Contractor and his mechanical and electrical � subcontractors will each keep one set of drawings in the job office and make a daily record of all changes in � location of equipment, partitions, materials, etc . , as _ approved by Architect. At the conclusion of the job, the Owner will furnish sepias to the Contractor and the � mechanical and electrical subcontractors who will incorporate all changes on the sepias . This includes all Change Order sketches issued by the Architect during the progress of the Work. The revised sepias are to be �.urned � over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project . PART 2 PRODUCTS � NOT APPLICABLE � PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES � ' A. General Operating/Maintenance Instructions : Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance � (by Owner) or operation, to meet with Owner' s personnel, __� at project site, to provide basic instruction needed for � proper operation and maintenance of entire work. Include instructions by manufacturer' s representatives where installers are not expert in the required procedures. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, � spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities . For ' operational equipment, demonstrate start-up, shutdown, � emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar operations . Review maintenance and operations in relation � with applicable warranties, agreements to maintain bonds and similar continuing commitments . 3 . 02 FINAL CLEANING r A. General: Specific cleaning for specific units of work is � specified in sections of Divisions 2 through 16 . General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions : 1 . Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, � consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of w�rk to � normal "clean" condition e ected for a first class XP buildin cleanin and maintenance ro ram. Com l � with g J A J P � � January 22 , 1999 01700-4 98165 . 01 ' I � ' " � I i I manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations . D ; The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required: i � a. Remove labels which are not required as permanent � ; ' labels . b. Clean glazed materials, including mirrors and � window/door glass, to a polished condition, � removing substances, which are noticeable as vision � obscuring materials . Replace broken glass . � I c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surface � finishes, including metals, masonry, stone, � '1 concrete, painted surfaces, plastics, tile, wood, ' special coatings, and similar surfaces, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, films and : similar noticeable distracting substances . Except � D � as otherwise indicated; avoid disturbance of ' ; natural weathering of exterior surfaces . Restore ! reflective surfaces to original reflective � condition. � d. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical � equipment clean, including elevator equipment and similar equipment in addition to that specified in Divisions 15 and 16; remove excess lubrication and ' other substances . �I � � e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, � equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar � spaces . � f. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom � ; clean. � g. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft � � surfaces . I � i h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, � � free of stains including those resulting from water ' � exposure. I i. Clean food service equipment to a condition of � sanitation ready and acceptable for intended food _ I service use. ; i j . Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function � � with full efficiency. I � � k. Clean project site (yard and grounds) including � landscape, development areas, of litter and foreign - ; substances . Sweep paved areas to a broom clean � I � Jaivary 22 , 1999 01700-5 98165 . 01 , ,� condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits . Rake grounds whic�z are � neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even textured surface. B. Removal of Protectian: Except as otherwise indicatad or � requested by Architect, remove protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of tYie work to protect previously completed work during remainder of � construction period. C. Compliances : Comply with governing regulations for � cleaning operations . Do not burn waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on Owner' s property, or discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site � and dispose of in a lawful manner. � 1 . Where extra materials of value remaining after � completion of associates` work have become Ow-ner' s property, dispose of these to Owner' s best advantage as directed. 3 . 03 CONTINLTING INSPECTION5 � A. General: Except as otherwise required by specific � warranties, agreements to maintain, worlananship/ maintenance bonds, and similar continuing commitments, -_� comply with Owner' s request to participate in inspections � at end of each time period of such continuing commitments . Participate in general inspection of the work � approximately one year beyond date (s) of substantial completion. � END OF SECTION M � � � . � - � January 22 , 1999 01700-6 98165 . 01 � i , � � � � ; � � � SECTION 01710 aj GENERAL CLEANING & FINAL FINISH CLEANING I � � � PART 1 GENER.AL I i 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED � ! A. Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by operations . � B. At completion of work remove waste materials, rubbish, � tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials . Clean � all sight-exposed surfaces . Leave project clean and ready � � for construction work to follow, and ready for occupancy, I as applicable. � C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with � D ; local ordinances and anti-pollution laws . � ( 1 . Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on � I' project site. � ; 2 . Do not dispose of volatile waste such as mineral � ! ; spirits, oil, and paint thinner in storm drains or ; sanitary sewers . � -_, D. Hazard Control : I 1 . Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and � remove from premises daily. i j 2 . Prevent accumulation of waste, which might cause i hazardous conditions . � i� 3 . Provide adequate ventilation during use of vo�atile and inoxious substances . � , I PART 2 PRODUCT i � ' 2 . 01 MATERIAL , A. See only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of � surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by � cleaning material manufacturer. � � ' � IJan�uary 22 , 1999 01710-1 98165 . 01 . � ' � PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 DURING CONSTRUCTION � A. Clean building and grounds and keep free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish._ � B: At reasonable intervals durin g progress of work, but in no � case less than once a week, clean site and public � properties and dispose of waste materials, debris and � rubbish. ° � C. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste , materials, debris, and rubbish. Type of container is at Contractor' s option. Containers with adequate capac�ty to accommodate anticipated needs . If containers do not have � adequate capacity, increase intervals of waste removal until adequate capacity is provided. - � D. Vacuum interior building areas, , where work is performed � prior to painting and other finish work. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for , occupancy. . E. Minimize handling of materials . Do not drop or throw _ materials from heights . - � F. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust - and other -_� contaminants resulting �rom cleaning process will not fall on wet, new painted surfaces . � � 3 . 02 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners for � � final cleaning. B. In� preparation for substantial completion and occupancy, � conduct inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed open spaces . C. Remove rease dust dirt stain � g , , , s, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior - and exterior finished surfaces of this work. Polish so � designated surfaces . Remove debris, rubbish, dirt, etc. , � from open concealed spaces, chases and above ceilingse " D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified 1' finish and to match adjacent surfaces . E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean surfaces of � grounds . � ' - F. Remove ice and snow from access to building. � January 22 , 1999 01710-2 98165 . 01 � , e . � � � G. Replace air-conditioning filters, when air-conditioning � ; and heating units are operated during construction � END OF SECTION � I Y � � � , � � � � • � � � � I i • �� I � � . I • � i � � i � I 9 ! � � � � � � � � � ' � � January 22, 1999 01710-3 98165 . 01 d � i. � � a ' ' SECTION 01720 D ' � PROJECT RECORD DOCLTMENTS ' � � DPART 1 GENERAL ' 1 . 01 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE � j A. Maintain copies of the following documents for record � , purposes : � I 1 . Contract drawings . Di i 2 . Specifications (Project Manual) . � � 3 . Addenda. I ,� 4 . Reviewed shop drawings . � ; 5 . Change orders . I � � ' 6 . Other documents which modify original contract. a ; 7 . Field test records . ! 8 . Manufacturer' s certificates . � �_� 9 . Fixed equipment manuals . I I 10 . Revisions . ,� � B. Store record documents in a file in the field office, apart from the documents used for construction. Provide ! I files, racks and secure storage for Record Documents . � � C. Label and file Record Documents in sequence with section �, i number listings in Table of Contents of this Project � � Manual . Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in the lower right hand corner in neat, large printed letters . i I ' �D. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible � condition. I �E. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes . � I iF. Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection ' � by the Owner' s Representative. � � 1 . 02 RECORDING i I � ; A. General Contractor shall transfer all changes on sepia � prints . All work shall be neat and legible. � I � January 22 , 1999 01720-1 - 98165 . 01 � r � 1 . Use separate colors for recording information about each major system. � 2 . Establish a code to denote the color for each trade and indicate by schedule placed on the front sheet of the Record Drawings . � B. Marking Drawings : 1 . Keep markings current. i 2 . Do not conceal work until required information has been � recorded. 3 . Neatly and legibly mark Record Set to indicate �ctual construction, including: � a. Depth of footings in relation to first floor level . b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground i utilities, valves, etc . referenced to building I exterior lines . Show direction of flow of pipe and ,� depth of piping underground. c . Field changes of dimensions and details . d. Changes made by Contract Modifications . , -=a e. Details not on original Contract Drawings . � C. Marking Project Manual : 1 . Neatly and legibly mark Project Manual with black, � permanent ink: a. On appropriate pages, record references to Adaenda, � Amendments, Modifications, Change Orders, and Field Orders . � b. On appropriate pages, enter trade name, � manufacturer, catalog number, and name of supplier of each product and item actually installecl, if different from that specified. � c. Other items installed but not originally speci=ied. D. Maintain documents listed in Paragraph 1 . OlA, above. i 1 . 03 SUBMITTAL � A. At Contract Closeout, deliver Record Documents to Owzer' s Representative . � January 22 , 1999 01720-2 9810'5 . 01 � � i i ; � � �i ' ' � B. Submit Record Documents under cover of a transmittal � � letter containing: � 1. Date. � 2 . Pro 'ect title and number. � i � 7 i I ; i 3 . Contractor' s and subcontractor's names and addresses . � 4 . Title and number of each Record Document. � 5 . Certification that each document submitted is complete � and accurate. I - ' 6 . Signature of Contractor or his authorized � representative. � ' � PART 2 PRODUCT Not Used. Y ' ' PART 3 EXECUTION � � i Not Used. i ' i END OF SECTION � ; ---- � ' , � I � � � I � I � � � � I � Jar�uary 22, 1999 01720-3 98165 . 01 I ` � ,I � �� SECTION 01730 I � � OPER.ATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA � ' PAR.T 1 GENER.AL I 1. 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS I � A. Submittals - Section 01300 . ' B. Contract Closeout - Section 01700 . �I C. Project Record Documents - Section 01720 . aD. Warranties and Bonds - Section 01740 . i � ' E. Warranties - Division 15 and 16 . � I I � - 1 . 02 GENERAL I, � A. Compile product data and related information appropriate i � for Owner's maintenance and operation of products I - ! furnished under the Contract. I ! � � � � B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in , � this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections � of Specifications . � l �� C. Ins�ruct Owner' s personnel in the maintenance of products ', �' and in the operation of equipment and systems . '� � 1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Have data prepared by personnel: � � 1 . Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products . ' 2 . Completely familiar with requirements of this Section. � 3 . Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4 . Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required � drawings . 1 . 04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS , A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner' s personnel . Submit three (3) copies of manual to Owner' s Representative. � � � � January 22 , 1999 01730-1 98165 . 01 , � ' . , B. Format: 1 . Size: 8-1/2" x 11" . , 2 . Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages . 3 . Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly , typewritten. C. Drawings : , 1 . Provide reinforced punched binder tab; bind in with text. , � 2 . Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages . D. Product Literature: � 1. Provide flyleaf for each separate product, or each . � piece of operating equipment. 2 . Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. � 3 . Provide indexed tabs . � E. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title � "OPER.ATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. " � F. List: _ � 1 . Title of Project. 2 . Identity of separate structure as applicable. � � 3 . Identity of general subject matter covered in manual . � � , G. Binders • , 1 . Commercial quality three ring binders with durable and i cl.eariable plastic covers . 2 . When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into ' related consistent groupings . 1. 0 5 CONTENT OF M�TIJAL: � A. Prepare a neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order, to include: 1 . Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and � telephone number. � January 22, 1999 01730-2 98165 . 01 , , , a � � a � � 2 . A list of each product required to be included, indexed D ! to the content of the volume. ' 3 . List, with each product, the name, address, and � telephone number of: � � ' i a. Subcontractor or installer. i � ; b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. i c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. � j d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement . � 4 . Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents . B. Product Data: a � - 1 . Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the ; specific product. ' ' aI 2 . Annotate each sheet to: i � � a. Clearly identify the specific product or part � � , installed. �I � i � b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the I � -�_a installation. , i � c . Delete references to inapplicable information. ' a ' C. Drawings : � � ' l . Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to �i � � clearly illustrate: i a. Relations of component parts of equipment and � � � systems . , , b. Control and flow diagrams . II � I � 2 . Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record iDocuments to assure correct illustration of completed � � ; installation. ''� � 3 . Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance � � drawings . , �i � ; � ! D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for � the particular installation: 1 . Organize in a consistent format under separate headings � ; for different procedures . � I ; January 22 , 1999 01730-3 98165 . 01 I ' , 2 . Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. warrant bond and service contract is � , E. Copy of each y, , ssed. F . Provide information sheet for Owner' s personnel giving: � 1 . Proper procedures in the event of failure. 2 . Instances which might affect the validity of warranties � or bonds . _ a. If a system shall be placed in operation prior to ' substantial completion, the warranty shall begin at the time the system is placed in operation as directed by the Owner's Representative. , 1. 06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit three copies of complete manual� in final form. , i B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, ' and finishes : 1. Manufacturer' s data, giving full informati:on on products . ' a. Catalog number, size, composition. � b. Color and texture designations . � c . Information required for reordering specially , i manufactured products . 2 . Instructions for care and maintenance. 3 . Manufacturer' s recommendation for types of cleaning , agents and methods . 4 . Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are i detrimental to the product. 5 . Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance . ' C. Content, for moisture protection and weather erposed ' products : � 1 . Manufacturer' s data, giving full information on products . ' 2 . Applicable standards . 3 . Chemical composition. � I January 22 , 1999 01730-4 98165 . 01 � � I D I � � I � 4 . Details of installation. D � ' D. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. ' E. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The � respective sections of Specifications . � F. Provide complete information for products of applicable � • sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited � , to, the following types of materials : � � a , 1 . Metal fabrications . I 2 . Joint sealants . � 3 . Doors and frames . ,. 4 . Windows . � ! - 5 . Hardware. . ,� 6 . Glazing. a � i i 7 . All finish materials . 8 . Toilet accessories . a � � 1 . 07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS � � � A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. � B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as � appropriate: i1 . Description of unit and component parts . � � 2 . Function, normal operating characteristics, and i limiting conditions . � I 3 . Performance curves, engineering data, and tests . � 4 . Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all ' replaceable parts . I �C. Operating Procedures : � 1 . Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating � instructions . ' I � 2 . Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency ' instructions . � � 3 . Summer and winter operating instructions . � I January 22 , 1999 01730-5 98165 . 01 � I _ ' � 4 . Special operating instructions . D. Maintenance Procedures : ' 1 . Routine operations . 2 . Guide to "troubleshooting. " ' 3 . Disassembl.y, repair, and reassembly. 4 . Alignment, adjusting, and checking. E. Servicing and lubrication schedule. � 1 . List of lubricants required. F. Manufacturer' s printed operating and maintenance , instructions . G. Description of sequence of operation by control i manufacturer. H. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, ' assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. l . Predicted life of parts subject to wear. ' 2 . Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts . q I . As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. � J. Each contractor' s coordination drawings . ' 1 . As-installed color coded piping diagrams . K. List of original manufacturer' s spare parts, � manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. L. Other data as required under pertinent sections of , Specifications . M. Content, for each electrical and electronic system, as , appropriate: 1 . Description of system and component parts . � a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions . - ' b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests . c . Complete nomenclature and commercial numbe-r of � replaceable parts . January 22 , 1999 01730-6 981�5 . 01 ` i � i �, � � ! � 2 . Circuit directories of panelboards . a3 . Electrical service. � � � i 4 . Controls . � � � 5 . Communications . � a ; 6 . As-installed color coded wiring diagrams . 7 . Operating schedules : � I i � a. Routine and normal operating instructions i � b. Sequences required. . D ! . � c . Special operating instructions . a ' 8 . Maintenance procedures : i a. Routine operations . � �' b. Guide to "troubleshooting. " c . Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. � ' d. Adjustment and checking. , ; � -__, 9 . Manufacturer' s printed operating and maintenance instructions . � 10 . List of original manufacturer' s spare parts, � � manufacturer' s current prices, and recommended � quantities to be maintained in storage. � ' I 11 . Other data as required under pertinent sections of I � ! Specifications . � ; �N. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such ' ' data becomes apparent during the instruction of Owner' s ; �; personnel . � ! '0. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications . , I P. Provide complete information for products of applicable sections of the Project Manual including, but not limited � ! to, the following types of materials : ' � 1 . Plumbing systems . � 2 . Domestic water conditioners . � 3 . Fire protection. � I ; January 22 , 1999 01730-7 98165 . 01 � ' 4 . Power or heat generation. 5 . Air distribution. ' 6 . Controls and instrumentation. 7 . Motors . ' 8 . Power generation and transmission. , 9 . Service and distribution. 10 . Lighting. , 11 . Communications . 12 . Chemical Treatment. � 1 . 08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE ' A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to start of work. B. Submit one copy of completed data in final form prior to ' final inspection or acceptance. , C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in ' final form after final inspection or acceptance. �' 1 . 09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL � A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner' s designated operating and maintenance personnel in ' the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment, and systems . B. For each item, record the following information: ' I 1 . Time an of i t d date ns ruction. . , 2 . Name (s) of personnel providing instruction. 3 . Name (s) of personnel receiving instruction. , 4 . Items covered during instructions . C. Use operating and maintenance manual to constitutE the , basis of instruction. 1 . Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail ' to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. � , January 22 , 1999 01730-8 98165 . 01 � ; - � I � , ' i ' PART 2 PRODUCTS aNot Used. ' � P T 3 EXECUTION � Not Used. � I � END OF SECTION ' � I - ' I � ' � � ' ! m � ' ' ' � ' I � ' i � � ' Janua 22 1999 01730-9 � �' � 98165 . 01 � , I i 1 f I ' I � I � SECTION 01740 , � YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE I I ' ; PART 1 GENERAL � i � 1. 01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS ' � 'A. Submittals - Section 01300 . , � ' ; B. Project Record Documents - Section 01720 . ! �C. Operating and Maintenance Data - Section 01730 . , ; 1 . 02 GENER.AL I � A. Al,l vendors and licensors are to represent that all ' computer licensed software will support the year 2000 ' format. ; �B. Al1 date related calculations will produce correct results ' j for multi-century scenarios and after the year 2000 . This � includes age calculations, duration calculations, i scheduling calculations, etc . ' ;C. All manipulations and comparisons of date related data � produce the desired results for all valid dates within the ' �-_� i scope of the application. This includes : current date, ; pre-year 2000 date, rollover from 1999 to 2000, year 2000 I leap year, post-year 2000 date, calculations including ' � more than� one century. i I 1. 03 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE � � IA. All related software to be produced or altered by personnel trained and experienced in maintenance and ioperation of software. , 1 . 04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ' i �A. All appropriate shop drawing submittals to relate to and explain that software complies with this requirement . I ' � PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. ' � I PAiT 3 EXECUTION � �Not Used. � END OF SECTION � ' January 22 , 1999 01740-1 98165 . 01 I � I r ' � I � SECTION 43 3(l 0 , CONCRETE � � ; PART l GEl�tERAL i I 1. 01 WQRK INCLUDED 1 ( A. Provide con.crete indic.ated on. the drawin.gs, described in ' these specificatians, or otherwise required for proper , � completion of �.he work. Refer to the drawings to determine the locatian and types of cancrete used. � � • , 1. 42 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEU�FIERE A. Section Q130Q Submittals ; � 1. �3 REFERENCES � 4A. ACI 214 - Recommendations � B. ACI 301 - Specifications far S�ruc�uralConcrete Builda.ng� . iC. ACI 302 - Guide for Con.cre�e Floor and Slab Placement . � �D. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Cancrete. � ' !E. ACI 305 - Hot W�ather Concreting. ; C � �F. ACI 306 - Co1d Weather Concreting. I j �G. ACI 308 - Recommended Prac�ice for Curing Concrete. ( � H. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice far Consolidation of Concrete. � �I . ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements fc�r Rein�orced , � Cancrete. j �J. ASTM C31 - Standard Method of Making and Curing Cora.crete , Compres�ive and Flexural Strength Test �pecimens in. the FieJ.d. � i K. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates . 1 L. ASTM C39 - Standard Me�hod o:� Test for Campressive � Strength af Molded Concre�e Cylinders. ! � M. ASTM C94 - Standard Specificatian far Ready�--Mixsd ' Concrete. ' ' � � f Jaivary 22, 1999 03300-1 98165 . 01 � i ' � N. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, �ield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. ' 0. ASTM C143 - Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. P. ASTM C150 - Standard Specifications for Portland Cement . ' Q. ASTM C172 - Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. ' R. ASTM C173 - Standard Method of Test for Air Conte�t of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. , S. ASTM C230 - Standard Specifications for Flow Table or Use in Test of Hydraulic Cement. T. ASTM C260 - Standard Specifications for Air - Entraining ' Admixtures for Concrete. U. ASTM C309 - Specifications for Liquid Membrane - Forming � ' Compounds for Curing Concrete. V. ASTM C494 - Standard Specifications for Chemical ' Admixtures for Concrete. W. ASTM C618 - Standard Specifications for Fly Ash and Raw or , Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement. _1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Coordinate and schedule in a timely manner with the Owner' s Testing and Inspection Agency the following quality control items : . ' 1 . Examine concrete in truck to verify that concrete appears properly mixed. ' 2 . Perform a slump test for each concrete load. Record if water or admixtures are added to the concrete at the , job site. Perform additional slump tests after job site adjustments . 3 . Concrete - Mold four specimens per set for compressive ' strength testing one set each 75 cubic yards placed. For each set molded record: a. Slump ' b. Air content c . Unit weight ' d. Temperature, ambient and concrete , January 22, 1999 03300-2 98165 . 01 ' ' ' � � e. Location of placement , ! � f. Any pertinent information addition of water, � addition of admixtures, etc . � ' i I� Perform one 7-day and three 28-day compressive strength tests . (Use one as a spare to be broken as directed by the Structural Engineer if compressive strengths do not , � ; appear adequate from the first two 28-day tests . ) i i i 4 . Report in writing, as directed by the ' � Architect/Structural Engineer, on the same day that � � test are performed. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and � number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete , testing agency, concrete design compressive strength, � location of concrete placement in structure, concrete I mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking , ; strength and type of break. � �B. The ready-mixed concrete plant shall be certified for � conformance with the requirements of the National Ready _ ' ' Mix Concrete Association. 1 . 05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN � A. Establish concrete mix design proportions per ACI 318, � � Chapter 4 . � _ �; ' � B. Submit three copies of the concrete mix designs . Include the following: ' � 1. Type and quantities of materials � � 2 . Slump ' � 3 . Air content , I � 4 . Fresh unit weight , � ! � 5 . Aggregates sieve analysis ' 6 . Design compressive strength � i � 7 . Location of placement in structure ' ! 8 . Method of placement i � � 9 . Seven day and 28-day compressive strengths �I � I ' , ' ; January 22, 1999 , 03300-3 98165 . 01 ' C . The concrete supplier shall submit certificates that t ' he materials used meet applicable ASTM Specifications . Mix designs not conforming to the above will be rejected. ' Payment for the concrete mix design will be by the supplier. , 1. 06 SLUMP , A. Design concrete with a sl 'ump of five inches maximum. , B. If a slump greater than 5 is desired it sha11 be achieved with a high range water reducer. Design the concrete mix � with a high range water reducer slump of two and one-half ' inches plus or minus one and one-half inches . The maximum slump after high range water reducers are added shall be eight inches . ' 1 . 07 FRESH UNIT WEIGHT A. Provide normal weight concrete with a fresh unit weig:�t of ' 140 to 152 pcf. 1 . 08 AIR CONTENT , A. No air content is required in concrete placed beloc�� the design frost line. , B. Provide air content of f ive percent plus or minus one and ___, one-half percent for normal weight concrete with required ' compressive strength less than 5000 psi. C. Provide air content of three percent plus or minus one and one-half percent for normal weight concrete with required ' compressive strength equal to or greater than 5000 psi . PART 2 PRODUCTS ' ' 2 . 01 MATERIALS ' A. Materials designated by specific manufacturer' s Lrade names are approved, subject to compliance with the quality and performance indicated by the manufacturer. ' Instructions and specifications, published by the manufacturer of such materials are included in and �.re a part of these specifications . Upon request, provide a ' certificate from manufacturer or supplier that materials designated by reference to ASTM and ACI standards meet the requirements of these agencies of latest edition. 2 . 02 CONCRETE STRENGTH , A. Provide concrete strengths indicated on the drawings . ' , January 22 , 1999 03300-4 98165 . 01 , � ' I � 2 . Q 3 CEN[ENT ' I A. Provide Type I portland cement per ASTM G150, unless noted otherwise. Use ane brand only. � � 2 . i� AGGREGA`I'E � I �A. Pravide fine aggregate in accardance wi�h ASTM C33 . � ' ' Provide coarse aggregate of gravel or crushed stone in I E accordance with ASTM C33 for normal weight cpncrete. Size coarse aggregate in accordance with ACI 318 . , IB. Pra�ride lightweigh� aggregate per ASTM C330 �ar concrete. � � Do not blend 1.ightweight aggregates wi�h normal weight � ' � agg�ega�es for structural I.zghtweight concrete. I 2 . �5 WATER . ' EA. Provide po�able waGer free o� deleterious substances per I ACI 318 . j , � 2 . 06 .AIR ENTRAINZNG .AGENT I , A. Provide air entraiz�ing agera.t per ASTM C260 . � � ' 2 . 07 WATER REDUCER i 1 A. Pro�cride water reducing agent per ASTM C494. � ��__� � 2 . �8 HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCER I � �A. Provide high range wa�er reducers (superplasticizers) per ASTM C494. � 2 . 09 CHLORIDE � � � A. Use no chloride� of any form in conere�e. � 2 , 10 CURZNG COMPQUND , � � � A. An acrylic cure campound with a minimum solid content af ' j 20 percent may� be used at the Contrac�.or'� op�ion per AS'�'M 309 . ( f ' 2 . 11 FLY ASH I, 1 � iA. Provide Type F fly ash with a loss on ignition o� Iess , than 5 percent or Type C �ly ash with a loss on ignition ' j I o f 1.es s thara. 1 percent per ASTM C 61.8. � � I � � E ; , '. Jai�.uary 22 , 1999 03300-5 98165 . 01 ( ( ' . ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCERS ' A. High range water reducers are to be added as recommended by the manufacturer. The slump of the concrete shall be ' one to four inches at the time the high range water reducers are added. Do no permit fresh concrete containing superplasticizers to come in contact with fresh � concrete not containing superplasticizers . 3 . 02 ADDITION OF WATER AT JOB SITE ' A. Water may be added to the batch only if neither the maximum permissible water-cement ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. ' 3 . 03 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE A. Deposit concrete as near as practical to final position. ' Maximum free fall shall be six feet. B. Do no flowing of concrete with vibrators . ' C. Place floors and slabs per ACI 302 . D. Use no aluminum equipment in placing and finishing , concrete. � E. Place thickened slabs for partitions integral with floor ' slabs . F. Prepare place of deposit, mix, convey, place, and cure ' concrete per ACI 301, ACI 304, and ACI 318 . Wet forms before placing concrete. G. Prepare place deposit, mix, convey, place, and cure ' concrete containing fibrous reinforcement per ACI -544 . 3 . 04 TIME LIMIT ' A. Deposit concrete within one and one half hours after � batching. � 3 . 05 VIBRATION A. Consolidate concrete per ACI 301 and ACI 309 . , 3 . 06 CURING COMPOUND , A. Cure concrete per ACI 308 . Keep the concrete surface moist. If an acrylic cure compound is used, apply per manufacturer' s recommendations to surfaces of concrete not � protected for five days for formwork. Do not use curing January 22 , 1999 03300-6 98165 . 01 � i � � ' � I ' � compound in areas to receive material that does not adhere ' to concrete cured with a curing compound unless the cure compound is water soluble. ' � 3 . 07 ENVIRONMENTAL PROVISIONS I A. Perform cold weather concreting per ACI 306 . Perform hot weather concreting per �CI 305 . rrotect concrete from � drying and excessive temperature for the first seven days . Protect fresh concrete from wind. ' 3 . 08 CUTTING CONCRETE , A. Obtain Architect or Structural Engineer' s written approval prior to cutting concrete for installation of other work. ' � 3 . 09 PATCHWORK AND REPAIRS I � t i A. Notify Architect or Structural Engineer of any defective i areas in concrete to be patched or repaired. Repair and patch defective areas with non-shrink grout. Cut out ' ; defective areas over 2 inches in diameter to solid � concrete but not less than a depth of one inch. Make i edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. , i 3 . 10 CONCRETE FINISHES , A. Finish Concrete per ACI 301. Finish concrete level within � ' -�_n � class A tolerance. � ' END OF SECTION t ' ' � � � ' , � I - ' i . I , I i ' I - January 22 , 1999 03300-7 98165 . 01 - - � -- - - i 1 � ' � ! SECTION 05500 1 ' � MISCELLANEOUS METAL ' � PART 1 GENER A T, 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED - ' A. Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to ; I and should include all metal required to complete all ' ; � openings and supports for the project: 1 . Loose steel angles for reinforcing metal deck. ' 2 . Steel angle frames above ceilings to support mechanical systems and electrical systems . I � 3 . Steel bracket and gussets for supporting counter tops . ' ' 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit all items to Structural Engineer in accordance with Section 01300 . ' B. Mill Certification: Upon request, submit mill i certification that steel supplied meets requirements of ! these specifications and referenced specifications above. ' 9 C. Shop Drawings : Submit four copies of prints of each drawing. ' ; 1 . Indicate profiles, sizes, locations, connections, and , � method of attachment. ' � 2 . Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding ' symbols . ' � ' 1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTING A. Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test , ' miscellaneous steel work. In addition, Structural Engineer may inspect infrequently. Inspections will be made by AWS Qualified Inspectors . 1 i IB. Inspections and tests will include: � � 1 . Visual inspections of: welded connections; fit-up I welded joints; welds, and bolted connections . ' ' , i 2 . Observation of welding procedures . � 3 . Inspectors may inspect fabricator' s shop to observe ; work in progress . i � I I January 22 , 1999 05500-1 98165 . 01 , ' ' 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE . A. Qualifications of Fabricator: Approved by American ' Institute of 5tee1 Construction Quality Certification Program, Category II. � ' , B. A Fabricator not approved may be acceptable to Structural Engineer provided he has tests made (and pays for such t , tests) as set forth in Section 01410 - Testing Labo'ratory Services . Approval or rejection will be at Owner' s discretion and without recourse. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I � A. Deliver items installed by others in sufficient time not ' to delay that work. Provide drawings and directions required for proper installation. B. Handle and store materials to preclude damage. ' � C. Store materials to permi�t easy access . Keep steel off of ground. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2 . 01 MATERIALS 9 A. Steel Sections - ASTM A36 . ' B. Welding Materials : Comply with AWS Code. ' C. Primer: Fabricators standard rust resisting primer. ' 2 . 02 FABRICATING ' A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent ' surfaces. Each exposed edge to small, uniform radius . C. Supply � components required for anchoring metal ' fabrications . 2 . 03 FINISH , A. Clean surfaces prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or ' where field welding is required. � C. Prime paint items scheduled with one smooth, uniform coat. � January 22, 1999 05500-2 98165 . 01 ' I i I � ' I � � � � I I � I PART 3 EXECUTION � � � � 3 . 01 PREPARATION � I I. Obtain Structural Engineer's approval before site cutting, I I or making adjustments not scheduled. � � 3 . 02 INSTALLING � � _ j A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free � i i from distortion and defects . I B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1 . 1 and ` � i I Section 05100 . � IC. Attach steel angle counter brackets through legs of steel i studs and drywall with toggle bolts . Coordinate with � Sectian 06410 for proper mounting height. � 3 . 03 FABRICATIONS � �A. Workmanship: � j � i 1 . Clean all metal surfaces of mill scale, flake rust and , ; rust pitting. � � _ ,i 2 . Surfaces shall be well formed and finished to shape and � size with sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces . ' ' i � 3 . Weld or rivet all permanent connections . ' � I , 4 . Grind welds and flush rivets smooth on surfaces that � will be exposed. � i I 5 . Thickness of inetal and details of assembly and supports � shall give ample strength and stiffness . I � ' � I 6 . Provide holes and connections for work of other trades . � � 7 . Conceal fastenings where practical . ' I , � �B. Castings : � I I 1 . Casting shall be uniform quality, free from blowholes, � � I porosity, hard spots, shrinkage distortion or other defects . I ' i � 2 • Castings shall conform to the dimensions indicated with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch. ' I � j 3 . Castings shall be smooth and we11 cleaned by shop � blasting or other approved method. I , � ' � January 22 , 1999 05500-3 98165 . 01 I � � i t C . Shop Painting: 1. Properly clean all ferrous metals, except stai.nless ,, steel and galvanized surfaces, and apply one coat of paint. � 2 . Coat all anchors built into masonry with asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. 3 . 04 TOUCH-UP � A. After steel items are in place, touch-up welds, scratched � � and damaged surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION ,� � � � --_� � . � , � � � � . - ;� . � January 22, 1999 05500-4 98165 . 01 � i i I ' ,' � � I SECTION 06102 IFIRE RETARDANT WOOD BLOCKING � � � PART 1 GENER.AL I I ; 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED � A. Blocking in metal stud/gypsum drywall walls & partitions , i for attachment of, but not restricted to, wall mounted: � � � 1 . Cabinets & casework 2 . Fire extinguisher cabinets � ' 3 . Handrails & similar items � � 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE � j � A. Lumber grading rules and wood species : Provide lumber ' � complying with voluntary product standard PS 20 . � 1 . 03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS � A. Testing: ASTM E84 or U.L. Test 723 maximum flame spread j rating, 25 . � _1 . 04 SUBMITTALS � � A. Submit all items to Architect in accordance with Section � i 01300 . I 1. 05 PRODUCT HANDLING � ' � A. Keep material dry at all times . � PART 2 PRODUCTS � � � I 2 . 01 MATERIALS � 'A. Lumber: Graded in accordance with Section 1 . 02 . � � 1 . Provide #2 or better grade fire retardant lumber for � � all blocking. IB. Plywood: Graded in accordance with Section 1 . 02 & comply 1 with 1 . 03 and fire treated. ; 1 . Panels for electrical and telephone equipment to be interior grade, fir faced, with exterior glue, C-D or � ! better faces, thickness as required for work being done. i � I ; January 22 , 1999 06102-1 98165 . 01 � ' , � 2 . 02 ACCESSORIES i � ' A. Nails & Sta les : Galvanized coati i p ng, size & type to suit application. 2 . 03 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS � A. Preservative & Fire Retardant Treatment: Dricon fire � retardant treated wood by the Hickson Corporation or Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc . , Thomson, Georgia. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 I 3 . 01 LUMBER TYPES & LOCATIONS .- ALL TO BE FIRE RETARDANT � �I A. P.rovide fire retardan.t treated wood for all interior, - exterior framing, blocking, nailing strips, and plywood gypsum board back up and electrical equipment boards . �� 3 . 02 INSTALLING WOOD , A. Install as required by individual situation with ood � g quality workmanship. Fasten to steel stud systems with Tek screws . Other fastenings with bolts as required. B. If wood is to come in contact with a "wet" substance such --_; as a poured concrete roof deck, separate the wood frorn the � concrete with a 6 mil poly barrier between the wood and the concrete. END OF SECTION � ,I � �, � � . � � January 22 , 1999 06102-2 98165 . 01 �� i 1 i I ' � ' � ' ' SECTION 07193 � ' PLASTIC VAPOR RETARDER � PART 1 GENERAT, i 1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEVJHERE: � � � 1 . Metal Studs - Section 09100 . 2 . Gypsum Wallboard - Section 09260 . � � I ' PART 2 PRODUCTS � � 2 . 01 MANUFACTURER: � � - 1 . Visking Corp. "Visqueen. " I 2 . 02 MATERIALS: � ' � 1 . Vapor Retarder: 6 mil polyethylene shee� (clear) . I , j 2 . Adhesive: 3M Co. No. 4693 at studs . � � ' 3 . Tape: 3M Co. No. 396 (single faced) at joints . � �, � -= ; PART 3 EXECUTION i 3 . i1 INSTALLATION: � � � 1 . Adhere over interior face of inetal stud s before ' i installation of wallboard. � � � ' 2 . Extend from structural floor slab to bottom of � structure above, using adhesive application on metal ' � studs and deck. � ' 3 . Make vertical splices on metal stud, lapping vapor � � barrier 6 in. minimum. � 4 . Seal all laps and intersection with structural slabs continuously with adhesive or pressure sensitive tape. � 5 . Exterior wall to be vapor tight at completion of work. � � � I END OF SECTION � � � � , � � January 22 , 1999 07193-1 98165 . 01 � ! � ' � � , i SECTION 07213 �� , � � FIBROUS INSULATION � � I � I 1' � PART 1 GENERAL I I ' 1 . 01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE � j A. Coordinate delivery with job progress and affected trades � ' � to minimize job storage time. � i ' � B. Store materials in clean dry space and protect against ' moisture. � � � � 1 . i02 QUALITY ASSURANCE iA. Deliver materials in original unopened packages, � � � containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer's labels.. � Labels shall indicate brand name, UL fire rating iinformation, where applicable, R-value and other � � descriptive data confirming compliance with this � specification. , � ' �B., Provide insulation having a flame spread rating of 25 or � less, in accordance with ASTM E84 tests. i � �'_PART 2 PRODUCTS , � � 2 . 01 MATERIALS � !A. Thermal Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglass, or Knauf, unfaced, or approved equal, blanket type or batt type, in widths to fit stud spacing. Provide insulation having an � ' � "R" value of a minimum of R-19 for walls and a minimum of R-30 for roof/ceiling. Flame spread rating shall be less � than 25 . � B. Sound Attenuation Blankets : U. S. Gypsum "Thermafiber" , or j approved equal paperless, semi-rigid, spun mineral �, fibermat, of thickness indicated. � C. Safing Insulation: U.S. G sum "Thermafiber" T e I � YP , yp , � � Class "A" , listed by Underwriter' s Laboratories, Inc . , or 1 approved equal. i 1 . Provide galvanized steel safing clips, "stik-clips" � ; and/or galv. wire to keep insulation intact in walls . � I I I 1 � �� ' I January 22 , 1999 07213-1 98165 . 01 � � � � PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION � A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. � B. Verify mechanical and electric services within spaces have been installed and tested. � 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install thermal insulation �etween metal studs or_ all � exterior walls . 1. Fit insulation snugly into framing with "stik-clips" or � galv. wire threaded through insulation to keep intact. Do not staple insulation by forcing the insulation into � reduced thickness, thereby losing the required R value. � 2 . Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be insulated. �' 3 . Insulate small spaces between closely spaced framing members . A finished insulated wall shall be free of all voids . � 4 . Carefully fit insulation around pipes, conduits, and _ --; other obstructions . � 5 . Where pipes and conduits are located in stud s�ace, place insulation between exterior wall and pipes and conduits . � 6 . Where building heat is in operation during the installation of exterior wall insulation, install vapor � retarder immediately to prevent condensation. � ' B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated. � �`. 1 . Fit insulation into framing and maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be insulated. Use - "stik- clips" or galv. wire threaded through insulation � • to keep intact in walls . C. Install safing insulation, where indicated, strictly in � accordance with manufacturers' instructions. D. Install curtainwall insulation, where indicated, strictly in accordance with manufacturers ' instruc.tions . � END OF SECTION � January 22', 1999 07213-2 98165 . 01 � � i � � I I � i , I ; SECTION 07253 � I , SPRAYED FIREPROOFING i � � I PART 1 GENERAL I I � 1 . 01 QUALITY-ASSUR.ANCE � �A. Sprayed on fireproofing work shall be performed by a firm ' �� having experience in the installation of similar materials � i to those specified herein in projects comparable to this project. The firm shall be licensed or otherwise approved � ' to apply the specified materials by the manufacturer of i � said materials . �B. Before proceeding with fireproofing work, approvals of the proposed materials, densities and thickness shall be �� ' obtained from the architect and other necessary authorities . ' C. At the request of Project Architect, Applicator may be � asked to spray a single bay or select area as a Mockup for � approval which will serve as a guide for remainder of � project. 1 . 02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �_, IA. Owner will engage a Testing Laboratory to inspect and test � � j fireproofing to ensure that applied thickness and density meets U.L. fire rating requirements . ASTM E605 "Standard � I Test Methods for Thickness & Density of Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials . " � B. Additional inspecting and testing because of noncompliance � � � with Project Documents will be paid for by Owner and deducted from payments to Contractor. I � - , C. Patch test areas as required to reestablish fireproofing � integrity. I � � D. Testing laboratory to cross reference tested density (ASTM E605) to manufacturer air erosion tables to establish air erosion (E859) of . 000 gm/sq. ft. � 'E. All fireproofing thicknesses to be figured on unrestrained beam thickness values . � 1 .iO3 REFERENCE STANDARDS � � A. U.L. Fire Hazard Classification � ',�B. ASTM E84 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials . � � I � , January 22, 1999 07253-1 98165 . 01 � ' . � ' C . ASTM E119, E605, E736, E759, E760, E761, E859 and E937 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS �. A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section � 01300 . B. Submit four copies of shop drawings of the following: � 1 . Plan drawings showing systems and thickness designations for each column, beam and as�embly � required to provide a complete fireproofing protection job. 2 . Reports of reputable independent testing agenc�r, of � products proposed for use, which indicates compliance with ASTM E84 and E119, or equivalent tests, - requirements . . � 1 . 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. An air and substrate_ temperature of 40° F (4 . 4°C) must be � maintained for 24 hours before, during and for 24 hours � after application of the sprayed fireproofing. If necessary for job progress, provide enclosures with heat � to maintain temperatures . --_, B. Provide ventilation to allow for proper drying of the � fireproofing during and subsequent to its application.. In poorly ventilated areas lacking natural ventilation, forced air circulation will be required. 1 . 06 PROTECTION � A. Provide adequate ventilation in areas to receive � fireproofing during and 24 hours after application. � B. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage . Mask � adjacent work as required. � C . Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. ,� D. Close off and seal ductwork in areas when fireproofing is being applied. ' E. Protect applied sprayed fireproofing from damage. 1 . 07 DELIVERY AND STOR.AGE � A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and proc�uct identification. � January 22 , 1999 07253-2 98165 . 01 � � � r � ; i �B. Keep materials dry, under cover and away from damp � , surfaces . � � PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2 . 01 MATERIALS � A. Asbestos-free Fireproofing: "Cafeco" Blaze-Shield II by � � Isolatek International . Blaze Shield type DC/F, or C/F to I � ; match UL Assemblies indicated. Alternate manufacturers � are acceptable providing the alternate assemblies are the same as originally specified except for the fireproofing � manufacturer and fireproofing type. See Section 01630 . � ! B. Water: Clean and free from elements which might adversely , affect quality of fireproofing. �� C. Density: Minimum densityZto be 15 lb/FT3 (ASTM E 605) or _ as required for . 000 gm/FT air erosion. � i � PART 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 PREPARATION � �A. The Contractor shall coo erate in the coordination and , P scheduling of the work of this section to avoid delays in I � -__o , j ob progress . � B. Clean substrate of foreign materials which might interfere � � � with proper bonding. Material must adhere to substrate � properly. ' i 'C. Sprayed fireproofing shall be applied to the concrete slab � � underside. � �D. Insure that erection fastenings (Clips, hangers, supports, � sleeves, precast concrete panel connections and other � I attachments to the fireproofing bases, as covered under � � other sections of the specifications) are placed by other trades before the application of fireproofing material. I �E. Ducts, piping conduits or other suspended equipment that � � could interfere with the uniform application of the ; sprayed fireproofing are to be positioned after the , � application of the sprayed fireproofing. � i �F. Fireproof thicknesses are to be calculated on unrestrained � � beam values . � � � � � - � � January 22 , 1999 07253-3 98165 . 01 � � �i ' � 3 . 02 APPLICATION A. , Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of ,. I substrate material of surrounding air is below 40° F. B. Mix in clean machine, and in accordance with �, manufacturer' s printed instructions . Apply with clean _ powered sprayers in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instructions . -� , C. Apply proper thickness to comply with UL requirements for ratings indicated. Use UL formulas to determine correct -- thickness of application for sizes of steel members . The � average thickness shall be equal to or be greater than the approved thickness . D. Patching of fireproofing shall be the responsibility of � this contractor as defined in cooperation with the general contractor. � E. Equipment and application procedure shall conform to the materials application instructions . 3 . 03 CLEAN � A. Remove excess and overspray, droppings and debris . � � B. Remove spray fireproofing from materials and surfaces not --_; specifically scheduled to be fireproofed. � END OF SECTION � . �� - '� - � _� �� January 22 , 1999 07253-4 98165 . 01 � � � i I i �� I SECTION 07270 � FIRESTOPPING I I 'r PART 1 GENER.AL 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED � i !A- Provide firestopping in accordance with the latest edition ' ' of U.L. Handbooks ' I 1 . Empty hole penetrations through fire rated floor slabs. i � 2 . Openings between curtainwalls and floor slabs are to be � � Fibrous Insulation Section 07213 . 3 . Openings between tops of fire rated walls and floor or +� roof slabs are to be fire caulked as per U.L. details . ■ � 4 . Through penetrations of fire rated walls, per U.L. � , details . ' 1 . 02 RELATED WORK � I � ,A. Refer to Section 07900/07213 for sealing of openings and ! penetrations in sound barrier applications, not work of ' this section. I � 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: � ,A. General : Provide firestopping materials that expand to ; fill cavities or provide adhesion to substrates, and that will maintain seal under normal expected movements of � , substrates . i ; B. UL Classification: Provide firestopping materials that are i I currently classified with UL as "Fill, Void, or Cavity I i Materials, " and "Through Penetration Firestop Systems . " � � jC. Fire Tests : Provide firestopping materials that have been ' � tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 "Methods for Fire � Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops" and UL 1479 i "Fire Test of Through-Penetration Firestops . " I � �� D. All through-penetration firestops are to be as per the U.L. fire resistance handbook, latest edition, and are to ' ; carry U.L. system numbers and an appropriate F or T � � number. 'I � � �E. The same type/manufacture of firestopping should be agreed _ ' to and used by all subcontractors on the project. I � � � � � � Janua 22 19 - � ry , 99 07270 1 98165 . 01 I � -- � � � 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical product ,, data, including product description, technical data, and installation instructions in accordance with Section 01300 . � Identify the U.L. Design system numbers for each product or assembly. Provide shop drawings of exact dimensioning, � anchorage, substrate, proprietary system, etc . , and identify typical locations for each. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STOR.AGE AND HANDLING: � A. Deliver firestopping materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing � � manufacturer' s name and a label identifying contents . B�. Store firestopping materials out of weather, at '� temperatures below 90 F (32 C) , and as recommended by manufacturer. Store as per manufacturers specified instructions . � 1 . 06 SAMPLE Mockup A. See Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard Systems, for the � construction wall mockup. Provide fire rated systems as required for this mockup. � � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANiJFACTURERS � i A. Provide materials by one of the following manufacturers : 1 . Dow Corning Corporation. � 2 . Minnesota Mining� and Manufacturing Company (3M) . �` 3 . Metalines, Inc . 4 . Tremco � 5 . Hevi-Duty Nelson 6 . USG Fire Stop Systems ,�' 7 . Hilti � 8 . General Electric 9 . Specified Technologies, Inc. � I January 22, 1999 07270-2 98165 . 01 � L � � 1 ' � � 10 . CAFCO T. P. S. i � I - 11 . USG Acoustical caulk for non-rated sound wall terminations at floors and decks above as per drawings ! I and specifications . � � , 2 . 02 MATERIALS , � A. Provide materials specifically tested for the location � proposed. Provide primers, sealants, tapes, foams, dams, ' etc. , as required to provide a complete proprietary � system. � I PART 3 EXECUTION � I - 3 . 01 EXAMINATION: � �A. Verification of Conditions : Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed, and identify conditions detrimental to proper and/or untimely ( completion. � � 1 . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory ; conditions have been corrected. ' � 2 . Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in � '�' suitable condition for application of firestopping. � 3 . 02 INSTALLATION: � ,A. Perform work using methods and materials specified in i firestopping systems indicated in referenced standards . ' , 1 . Consult with Architect to establish acceptable modified � , versions of referenced standards for conditions not specifically illustrated in referenced standards . � �B. Install firestopping, at least equal to barrier fire- � rating, in and around penetrations of floor structures, i exterior walls and interior walls indicated as time-rated fire barriers or smoke barriers . � �C. Install firestopping to close clearances around and within - � sleeves, and around cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, � � equipment enclosures, or other apparatus causing penetration of barrier. I � D. Patch penetrations caused by cutting or presence of unused � � I or abandoned openings or boxes, using materials compatible � with barrier construction and with fire-rating equal to i or greater than barrier rating. � � ' � I , January 22, 1999 07270-3 98165 . 01 I � �1 I E. In smoke barriers, firestopping shall resist the passac�e of smoke. 3 . 03 TO EXTENT PRAC'I'ICABLE, CONSTRUCT Fire-rated WALL ' � S AFTF�R PLACEMENT OF PENETR.ATING MATERIALS, FITTING RATF��D CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TIGHTLY TO OR DIRECTLY ON MATERI��L � OF PENETR.ATION. A. Where large openings are created in barriers, to permi.t � later installation of pipes and ducts, close unuse:d portions of opening with solid fill equal to barrie:r rating and with applicable firestopping sealant syste�m � around penetrating items . B. Fire-stop spaces in structural floor openings with rate:d Firestop concrete, or other rated assembly only wher•e � both horizontal dimensions exceed thickness of rate:d barrier. Provide dowels and reinforcement, within such fill, equal to reinforcing specified for slab. Install � applicable Fire-stopping system around all penetratin.g items . C. Fire-stop spaces in rated concrete or masonry wall � openings with fire rated solid fill only where both height and width exceed thickness of rated barrier. Install applicable Fire-stopping system around all � penetrating items . � -_� D. Fire-stop penetrations through full thickness of � barriers . Where required thickness of firesto�ping sealant system is less than thickness of barrier, use fiber fill, solid fill, or fiber packing to make up remainder of barrier thickness . � E. Completely fill void spaces of each penetration with fire-stopping material . � F. Provide forms and dams to permanently secure fire- stopping materials . � 1. Install fire-stopping in floors to flush with top of slab, sleeve, or housekeeping pad. G. Apply firestopping directly to penetrating item. Do not � anchor or bond fire-stopping to combustible or non =ire�- rated materials such as plastic or fiber coverings . �' H. Where sleeves have been installed surrounding pipes o:r other penetrations, fire-stop annular space betwee�z � sleeve and its contained pipe, cable, or duct wit;n resilient fire stopping sealant system to permit movemen�t of pipe or duct without damage to firestopping sealant. END OF SECTION � January 22 , 1999 07270-4 98165 . O:L � I ' �; , � I � � SECTION 07900 � I ; i SEALANTS I � � PART 1 GENERAT, , 1 . 01 WORK INCLUDED � j A. Joints between hollow metal frames and masonry walls . 'B. Joints between aluminum frames and walls . � ' ,C. Interior wall joints where two materials of different � types meet. � �D. Other caulkin or ealin i � g s g ndicated. � 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section � � I 01300 . { B. Product Data: Submit four copies of manufacturer's product specifications, handling/installation/curing instruction � ' and performance data sheets for each sealant product , specified. Include chemical characteristics, performance � criteria and limitations . � --., I 1. 03 JOB CONDITIONS �. Weather Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of � -� � sealants under unfavorable weather conditions . Install i ielastomeric sealants only when temperature is in the , temperature range recommended by manufacturer. � � 1 . 04 INSTALLERS' QUALIF'ICATIONS � A. Employ only workmen skilled in application of sealant materials, and regularly engaged in sealant work. ' , I I � j PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2 . O1 MATERIALS � � � I A. Sealant for Interior at Painted Areas : Acrylic - latex � _ ' � caulk, permanent flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding � j by Tremco or approved equal . IB. Sealant for Interior at Vinyl Wallcovering and Cabinetry: -- � One part silicone, SILPRUF by General Electric or pow � Corning 795 or Pecora 895 or approved equal . Countertop sealant is by hospital casework installer, Section 12300 . � ! ; Januaxy 22, 1999 07900-1 98165 . 01 -� � � I C. Interior at Plumbing Fixtures and Tubs : One part si�icoxie � sanitary sealant by General Electric Sanitary Silicone � 1700 or pow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Sealant or Pecora 863/898 or equal . � D. Interior at Tile Wall: One part silicone sanitary sealant � � by Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant Sealant or General i Electric Sanitary Silicone 1700 or Pecora 863/898 c�r approved equal . , 2 . 02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide type recommended by sealar.lt `� manufacturer for 'oint surfaces to be 7 primed and sealeci. All exterior sealant to be primed unless specificall.y deleted by manufacturer through substrate testing k>y � sealant supplier. B�. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic ta��e ' ,� recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied t:o sealant contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joir.it filler is not desirable. � C. Sealant Backer Rod (for minor joints requiring backup) : Compressible rod stock of flexible, permanent, durabl.e non-absorptive material recommended by sealar.�t � manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates (joint surfaces) and conditions unde:r � which work is to be performed. Do not proceed with join.t sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been ,� corrected. 3 . 02 JOINT PREPARATION � A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation o�f joint fillers, primer/sealer, sealants and caulkin.g compound. Remove dirt, loose coatings, moisture an.d � other items which could interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. B. Prime surfaces unless on site substrate tests indicate � priming not required. Confine p�imer/sealer to areas of sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces . ' 3 . 03 INSTALLATION , A. Com 1 with manufacturers rinted instructions . � P Y P January 22 , 1999 07900-2 98155 . 01 � I 1 � , � 1 B. Install backer rod at depth recommended by sealant � manufacturer for joint width. Install using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing or twisting. Do not leave voids between, rod ends . Size of rod should allow � approximately 25o compression. C. Employ_ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous � ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces . � D. Fill sealant groove to a slightly concave surface. Tool , sealant to form concave surface and to set material against the backer rod and the joint surfaces . � 3 . 04 APPLICATION , ' A. Generally, depth of sealant in joints shall be at least � �� • 1/8" to 3/8" . In larger joints the depth of the sealant I � shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Use silicone filler for backup in knee joints . � B. Use masking tape if necessary to protect adjacent areas . � C'. Use gun nozzles sized to fit joints . Finish joints neatly. Remove any excess materials and leave joints � clean � �__o . Use silicone sealant in channel glazing and back-bedding of glass (unless factory glazed) . � E. Use acrylic latex sealant for � interior work. Caulk where shown on drawings and at all masonry walls butting into other masonry walls . . . � 3 . 05 CURING AND PROTECTING A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with � manufacturer' s instructions . Protect sealants, particularly while there is surface tack to avoid "pickup" of dirt and dust. � END OF SECTION � ' i .� �' � � January 22, 1999 07900-3 98165 . 01 � , ; � • � � � SECTION 08100 � HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I ,� PART 1 GENER.AL 1. 01 FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS � , A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc . , and Warnock-Hersey • I International Inc. fire-ratin tests an , g d labels ar e I � acceptable in usual Local and State requirements . " �B. Affix applicable metal labels to doors, frames, and view � windows designated in door schedule or on drawings . Mylar �I or paper labels are not acceptable. � C. Rated doors at stairs shall meet temperature rise criteria � � an unexposed side of door and shall not exceed 450 degrees � F. at end of 30 minutes when tested by standard fire test. � D. Doors designated a "20 minute" or greater rating require � � UL labeled frame. � � - ' - E. Hollow metal frame view windows in one-hour rated walls to receive a "C" label, 45 minute rated frame. � 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS � � � A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 . i ' . I � B. Submit shop drawings indicating door and frame types, gauge of inetal, sizes, Architect' s numbers,- wall thickness where frames will be installed, fire resistance ratings where applicable, and other pertinent data. � � 1 . Indicate sizes of louver and glazing openings . � 2 . Indicate doors and frames which are to have thresholds, lead-lining and other special features . � 1. 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors and frames shall be shipped in accordance with ' manufacturer' s standard practice. Each door and frame � . � shall be identified by door number on the drawi;ngs . - � � B. Deliver, store, and handle doors and frames in accordance '', � with requirements of manufacturer, and so as to preclude damage. � C. Store off of floor, on dunnage, in a dry protected place, , and with at least 1/4 inch space between individual pieces . I � January 22, 1999 08100-1 '98165 . 01 � � , � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER � A. Manufacturer: Palmetto Metal Products, Columbia, Sout:h Carolina; Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio; and CECO Doc�r �, Products, Birmingham, Alabama. 2 . 02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS � A. Provide flush type, seamless metal doors, 1-3/4 inchE:s thick, fabricated from 18 gauge cold-rolled, furr_ituz�e � � steel plates, properly reinforced, insulated to deade:n sound, and welded. 1 . Continuously weld vertical edges, where face sheet:s � join, and grind smooth so that no seam is visible:. Spot welding and filling with compound is nc�t acceptable. � 2 . Close tops and bottoms of doors with formed steE:l channels welded in place, and ground smooth. � 3 . At all pairs of fire rated fire/smoke doors, provicle factory installed steel astragals . _ 2 . 03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES � ;� A. Provide metal frames with integral stops for doors ar.�d � interior view windows and x-ray control wir_dow�; . Fabricate frames from 16 gauge cold-rolled furniture stee:l plate. � 1 . Line frames with lead wher.e indicated. Use leacl equa.l in thickness to lead used in adjacent walls . , 2 . Form double return flanges on all frames, excepc far � existing openings as shown. Where frames wrap arour.a.d wall openings, form flanges to fit wall thicknesses . � 3 . Miter corners of frames and continuously weld ful.l depth and width of face and throats . Tack welding a.t throat and stops is not acceptable. � 4 . Dress welded joints smooth on exposed surfaces so tha.t joints are not visible when frames are prime paintecl. Use of surface applied fillers to conceal manufacturir.�g defects is not acceptable. 5 . Provide trim angles to be installed at heads of � exterior frames . 6 . Provide 16 gauge steel channel spreaders across botton�s � of frames . January 22 , 1999 08100-2 98165 . 01 � ' I i i � � I ; 7 . Frame Anchors : Provide floor anchors at each jamb and � I mullion. At jambs installed in masonry walls, provide � three masonry anchors at each jamb up to 7 ' -6" high, and one additional anchor for each 18 inches or � , fraction thereof over 7 ' -6" in height. At jambs � installed in metal stud partitions, provide four metal ; � stud anchors at each jamb up to 7 ' -6" high and one � ; additional anchor for each 18 inches or fraction � , thereof over 7 ' -6" in height. � ' j 8 . Hollow Metal View Windows & Sidelite Frames : Provide a ', � �� rated U.L. label fire window frame, "C" 45 minute � rated, which is constructed and installed per U.L. � ; label procedures . Glazing to be wire glass unless 1 � noted otherwise in the documents . 2 . 04 PREPARING FOR FINISH HARDWARE . I. � A. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware. I 1 . Hardware supplier will furnish hollow metal � ; manufacturer approved hardware schedule; and hardware templates for use in preparation. i . � ! 2 . Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise , and concealed hardware. � , 3 . See Finish Carpentry, Section 06200 for mounting � �__.� � heights of strikes . B. Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface � ! mounted hardware. I 1 . Drill and tap mortise reinforcement at factory. i Reinforce only for surface appl:ied hardware. � i ! 2 . Provide 9 gauge steel reinforcement 1-1/2 inches wide x I 10 inches long for hinges . Offset reinforcement so � that hiriges will finish flush with frame rabbet. i 3 . Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for strikes . 1 � i 4 . Provide 12 gauge steel reinforcement for other ' hardware. � ; 5 . Install reinforcement with concealed connections to develop full strength of reinforcement. � � 6 . Install 26 gauge plaster guards to protect tapped � holes . � � ' 7 . Punch frames to receive silencers . � i i � January 22 , 1999 08100-3 98165 . 01 � � . � � 2 . 05 PREPAR:ATION FOR GLAZING A. Where doors and frames have glazed openings, provicie , openings with integral stop on one side. Provide 20 gauc�e steel removable glazing stops for other side. But:t corners of removable stops, and prepare them fc>r � installation with countersunk sheet metal screws spaced ��t not more than 12 inches o.c. 2 . 06 SHOP COATING I A. Level and grind surfaces smooth. � B. Apply full, smooth, even coat of Palmetto' s standard� rust:- , inhibiting primer suitable as a base for finish paint_ � ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 FR.AME INSTALLATION , A. In Metal Stud Partitions : . � 1 . Install hollow metal frames in close coordination wit:h metal stud and gypsum drywall trades . - 2 . Weld anchors for drywall partitions to the frames, four � � per jamb to 7 ' -6" in height. Leave spreaders in plac:e -�� ` until partitions are rigidly installed. � 3 . Where door frames 'are scheduled to be reinforced by structural steel members built into partitions, attac,h jamb anchors to structural steel. � 3 . 02 DOOR INSTALLATION , A. Install doors with proper tolerances at head, jambs, ar.id � sill. 3 . 03 TOUCH-UP j A. After installation, the General Contractor shall touch-L!p � scratched and damaged � surfaces.. � Dented or bent frame:s shall be repaired as required with metal putty, sanded an.d primed with shop coat similar to origznal. , � END OF SECTION � � . � January 22, 1999 08100-4 � 98165 . 01 � I � � I 1 � SECTION 08215 � � � wooD Dooxs � � � PART 1 GENER A T, � , 1.. 01 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS � !A. Division 15 - Metal Louvers . I � � 1 . 02 FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 ' , A. Underwriter' s Laboratories, Inc . and/or Warnock-Hersey ' International, Inc. , fire rating tests and labels are � � acceptable. ,B. Affix applicable �labels to doors designated in door 1 � schedule to have fire resistance classification. � C. Provide doors at stairwells which meet temperature rise I � j criteria that temperature on unexposed side of door will i not exceed 450° F. at the end of 30 minutes when tested by standard fire test exposure. � ; D. Doors designated as "20 minute doors" shall bear actual � i � fire labels whether hung in single, paired or double i i egress openings . If label is not required, provide ° � -;n i manufacturer' s letter of certification. i 1 . 03 QUALITY STANDARD � A. Doors shall meet the requirements of National Woodwork ; Manufacturers Association, "Industry Standard 1 - Wood � Doors, " Commercial Standard CS171 . � B. Doors shall meet the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 01300 . Minimum standard for i � wood doors - AWI PC-5 . ■ I' i 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS , i A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 . B. Submit shop drawings indicating door types, sizes, ' � ; � Architect' s numbers, fire resistance ratings where � applicable, and other pertinent data. � 1. Indicate details of door construction. Include full , � I size molding section detail for glazing and louver , installation. � 2 . Indicate sizes of glazing and louver o enin s . I � i P g � i ' January 22 , 1999 08215-1 98165 . 01 � � 3 . Indicate doors which are to have thresholds, undercL�t bottom edges, lead lining, and other special featl,:res . -� C. Submit finish samples, showing the complete fini�;h appearance, to the Architect for approval . Sample siz;e shall be not less than 8-1/2 " x 11" x 1/4" . Indicate un � the sample the Project, Architect, General Contractoz•, Door Manufacturer, •and a listing of the operations used t:o attain the finish. � 1 . 05 PACKAGING A. Each individual door shall be packaged with dark colore�d � polyethylene or similar material. B. Package doors in normal palletized quantities in such a � manner that the doors will be fully protected durir.�g shipment, handling and storage. 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING , A. Deliver doors to site only after plaster and concrete az•e dry and building has reached average prevailing relative '� humidity of locality. B. Store doors in an area where there will be no appreciabl.e � variations in heat and humidity. I --- 1 . Stack flat on 2 "x 4" lumber, laid 12 inches from encls � and across center. � 2 . Under bottom door and over top of stack, place plywoc�d or heavy corrugated cardboard to protect door surface�; . � C. Handle doors carefully to avoid damage. Tn�hen movir.�g doors, carry them. Do not drag one door across another. � 1 . 07 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee doors for life of installation against defect:s j in materials and worlananship, and against warp or twi�;t exceeding as determined by C5171 . Replace doors nc�t meeting guarantee. � PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2 . 01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS - A. V.T. Industries, Holstein, Iowa. � B. Weyerhaeuser Company, Tacoma, WA. , Marshfield Series . C. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. , Neenah, WI . � January 22 , 1999 08215-2 98165 . Ci1 � 1 . 1 2 . 02 TYPES OF DOORS , A. Non-Rated Doors : � 1. 5 ply minimum hot pressed particleboard construction, 5502 . � , 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match 1 existing, Cut: Plain-Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. � B. 20 Minute Daors : 1 . 5502 particleboard construction. � � 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match � exisiting, Cut: Plain-Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. � C. U.L. "C" Labeled Doors : � , 1. Mineral core 45 minute, 5545 . 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match � existing, Cut: Plain-5liced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. D. U.L. "B" Labeled (60 minute) Doors : � � 1. Mineral core, 5511. � 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match existing, Cut: Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. � E. U.L. "B" Labeled (90 minute) Doors : 1 . Mineral core, 5511 . , � 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match existing, 1 Cut: Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. F. Lead-Lined Doors : � 1. Finger-Jointed staved core, 5511. 2 . Face: Grade I wood veneer, Grade Red Oak-match � existing, _ Cut: Plain Sliced. Veneer Match: Book Matched. 1 � : Jan ary 22, 1999 08215-3 98165 . 01 � _ � 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide glazing stops for installing glazing material an.d � louvers for all doors . B. Provide steel stops meeting fire rating requirements a.t ' "B" and "C" label and "20 minute" doors. 2 . 04 FABRICATION � A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI standards an.d quality assurance technicians who monitor the produc.t process from start to finish. STILES AND RAILS MUST P�E � SECURELY BONDED TO THE CORE AND THEN ABRASIVELY SANDE�D SMOOTH TO THICKNESS TOLERANCE. DROP IN CORES ARE NCiT ACCEPTABLE. � B. Prepar.e doors at factory for finish hardware frc�m " templates furnished by hardware supplier. � C. Make cutouts for glazing and louvers at the factory. D. Doors shall be finished at the factory, in accordance wit.h � AWI TR-6 Finish, All U.L-. labeled (fire) doors shall hav�e all edges sealed, following fitting, per doar � manufacturer's recommendations . � E. Doors provided for "B" & "C" label ratings are to have -__= reinforced stiles on the jamb side to accent full morti�;e � butt hinges . PART, 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 INSPECTION - A. Verify that door frames are of type required for trie � particular type of doors, i.e. , fire-rated frames far fire-rated doors; lead lined frames for lead lined doors . � B. Owner, Architect, or Contractor has the right to randoml.y select and verify construction methods utilized in ar.�y � particleboard core door. Manufacturer will provicLe replacement at no charge. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION � A. Apply finish hardware and install doors . B. Adjust doors and hardware for correct function. � C. Adjust strikes so that there is no play when doors ax-e latched. � 2 08215-4 98165 . U1 I January 2, 1999 � � � � � D. No more than 5/8" undercut will be allowed at any door to � finish concrete floor regardless of any finish or threshold added. �E. Install vision panels as shown on drawings . ' � F. Replace any doors chipped or damaged. � 1 END OF SECTION � � � 1 '� � �� 1 -�� . - � � , 1 1 � - i � � 1 � � � January 22, 1999 08215-5 98165 . 01 � � i 1 ' ' � SECTION 08300 ' I ACCESS DOORS i ' PA�RT 1 GENER.AL I 1. 01 SUBMITTALS � � A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section I 01300 . Submit four copies of manufacturer's brochures and installation instructions . � I 1 . �02 COORDINATION � ', A. Coordinate delivery of panels with applicable trades who ' will install, to avoid delays and interferences . IB�. Coordinate locations so panels will provide proper access , � to equipment to be served. '� � C. Coordinate size, location and quantities of panels with i mechanical and electrical trades . � i 1. 03 DELIVERY � A. Deliver panels in manufacturer's original shipping ' containers . At time of delivery examine panels and doors � �-._ with tradesmen who will install to ensure that they are in � � good condition. If panels and doors are damaged, obtain and deliver new, undamaged items . � � � PART 2 PRODUCTS � � i 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Inryco/Milcor, KARP, or approved equal . � ' 'I - 2 . 02 PANELS I � A. Minimum size: 18" x 18" , Size as required for complete , i access to items requiring the door. Refer to M.P. & E. documents for locations . �I i ' � B. Doors : 14 gauge steel. IC. Frames : 6 gauge steel . � j �D. Latches : Screwdriver operated. � , ' i. Finish: prime coat of rust inhibitive paint. I � ' - January 22 , 1999 08300-1 98165 . 01 I ' . � � F. Types : 1. For drywall ceiling or walls : Milcor, Style v! or , approved equal . 2 . For ceramic or quarry tile walls : Milcor, Style M, , stainless steel or approved equal . PART 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 INSPECTION ' A. Inspect access door openings and assure they meet requirements for type and size. 'B' Label doors wi11 be required for chase, shaft, stairwells etc . when 1-1/2 hour � fire rating must be provided. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION � A. Install access doors in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instruction and anchor in place. � END OF SECTION � -_o ' � � � . � � � , January 22, 1999 08300-2 98165 . C11 � _ , � I � - SECTION 08700 � F INI SH HARIDWARE � PART 1 GENER.AL 1. 01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit the following to Owner's Representative in accordance with Section 01300 . , 1 . Submit four copies of complete schedule of finish , hardware and obtain Owner' s Representative's approval � before delivering finish hardware. �i 2 . Submit four copies of the various hardware manufacturer's catalog data for the items listed in , ' schedule. i 3 . Submit two copies of installation instructions for � items requiring special field preparations . � B. Templates : Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit the '� � necessary hardware templates to those trades and/or manufacturers with whom hardware must be coordinated. Comply with procedures established in ASAHC-NBHA Handbook, , for "Recommended Procedures for processing Hardware ' -_, Schedules and Templates . " - , 1 . 02 QUALITY STANDARDS ,� A. Hardware supplier shall have in his regular employment a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant who will be available to Owner' s Representative and General � Contractor for consultation as required to complete the work. � � 1. 03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Packaging of hardware on a set by set basis is the ' responsibility of the hardware supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from the various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers marked with the door opening number as appears on the drawings . � ; B. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the ' hardware supplier, General Contractor and/or the hardware � � installer until each is satisfied that the quantities are correct. ' � � � � Jan�uary 22, 1999 08700-1 98165 . 01 E _ a � C. The General Contractor shall provide secure lockup for hardware delivered to the project site and control access � so that completion of �work will not be delayed due to losses . PART 2 PRODUCTS - � 2 . 01 HARDWAR.E , � A. Finish: 1. Provide US26D satin chrome finish for hardware. Whe:re ' US26D is not available for the specified item, provi�3e finish to match US26D. 2 . Door closers shall have sprayed lacquer finish to mat�^h � US26D. v B. Keying: , 1. Provide cylinders with six active pins, keyed, keyed � alike, master keyed and grand master keyed as directG�d - by Owner' s Representative. Provide four change keys for each cylinder. Provide six master keys for each master key group and six grandmaster keys for each � grand master key group. ALL keys are to be stamped DO NOT DUPLICATE. Provide cylinders as required for -__.-� ` aluminum storefront doors . ' � 2 . Provide original key blanks of nickel silver alloy only. � 3 . Deliver all permanent keys, master keys, and grand master keys to General Contractors Project Manager, and deliver carbon copies of transmittal documents to the � Owner's Representative. General Contractor shall deliver keys to Hospital Administrator when directed by ' Owner' s Representative, ancl shall deliver copies of � transmittal documents to the Owner' s Representative. The contractor shall review keying witYi Hospital Administrator or the, designated representative. C. Key Cabinet: - , 1 . Provide one Telkee, Inc . key cabinet complete with � � system components and instructions for dual tag system. Allow for expansion 20 percent in excess of actual requirements. � II 2 . Provide a key chart to Owner at completion of work , � indicating the schematic of the keying system. �� ' I January 22, 1999 08700-2 98165 . 01 � � � 1 � i � D. Hinges : Butt hinges listed below are by Hager Hinge Co. � � ' Acceptable substitutes are: The Stanley Works; McKinney ' Manufacturing Co . ; and Lawrence Brothers . Provide three 4- 1/2 " x 4-1/2 " hinges for each door up to 7 feet high. ! Provide one additional hinge for every 18 inches or part � � � thereof over 7 feet. 1 . Interior doors without closers : � a. No. 1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. ' b. No. BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider. 2 . Interior doors with closers : , a. No. BB1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. ' b. No. BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider. 1 3 . Interior UL labeled wood doors . � � a. No. BB1279 for doors under 42 inches wide. � � b. No. BB1168 for doors 42 inches or wider. ' 4 . Exterior doors : I , i a. No. BB1191 for doors under 42 inches wide. , � b. No. BB1199 for doors 42 inches or wider. � c . Provide safety stud feature for all out-swinging � exterior doors . ' i 5 . Where security/safety is a concern provide hospital � tips . (HT) E. Locksets : Schlage (D Series-.Rhodes Design) . No � ; ,I� substitutes . See Finish Carpentry Section 06200 for strike mounting heights . , 1 . Provide only UL listed locksets . Stamp latch bolt i faces to indicate that locksets are UL listed. , 2 . Where knurled knobs are indicated, only the lever on � � the space entrance side needs to be knurled. Provide , i � machine knurled levers . � ' 3 . Where locksets are indicated to be lead-lined, lead- iline the escutcheons . ' � I , � � , � IJ�anuary 22 , 1999 08700-3 98165 . 01 , � ' � i _ � i . , F. Exit Devices : Exit devices shall be manufactured by Von Duprin Series 99 . Acceptable substitutions are Corbin/Russwin ED5000 series and Yale 7000 series . Trim � I shall match lockset design. � 1 . Where panic devices are installed on UL labeled doors, � provide UL labeled panic devices, and indicate that they are labeled by stamping or permanently affixing a tag to each device. � 2 . Through bolt exit devices on all doors . 3 . Provide spacer kits where push pad exit devices cross 1 over lites in doors . G. Door Closers : Closers listed on schedule are by LCN 4000 , Series . Acceptable substitutions are Corbin/ Russwin DC3200 and Yale 3501/3501BF. A11 closers to be standard � application and comply with opening force requirements of � applicable codes . All rated doors to have closers . (IF THERE IS NO PLACE TO INSTALL A WALL STOP, USE A LI�IITING CLOSER. ) � H. Floor Hinges : Rixson Firemark 1 . Provide Series L147-20 with intermediate pivot ML19-20 � for labeled lead lined doors . __, 2 . Provide Series L147 with intermediate pivot ML19 for � non-rated lead lined doors . I . Push and Pull Plates : . 050 gauge. 1 . Push plates 1001-3 � 2 . Pull handle 1013-3 � or sto s listed in schedu r' J. Door Stops : Do p le are by T imco. Acceptable manufacturers are: H.B. Ives, Baldwin Mfg. Co. ; Quality Hardware. ' 1 . Wall bumpers shall be W1274CCS . 2 . Wliere swing of a door interferes with another door, � provide roller bumpers similar to No. 1244 or 1245, as required to suit conditions . , 3 . Provide overhead stops similar to Rixson 55 Seri�s on all doors where there is no place to install a wall � stop. , , January 22 , 1999 08700-4 98165 . 01 ` i � , i ' K. Thresholds, Weatherstripping, Carpet Dividers/Firestops 1 . and Light Seals : Items listed on schedule are by Pemco Mfg. , Inc . Acceptable manufacturers are: National Guard I ; Products; Reese Enterprises; and Zero Weatherstripping ' , Co. 1 . Thresholds : No. 2005AV with vinyl bulb at stop or No. � 271A with No. 222AV door bottom. . � 2 . Weatherstripping: No. 303AV at jambs and heads of doors . � 3 . Light seals & Sound Seals : No. 320CN at jambs and heads I of doors, and No. 412C automatic door bottoms at � � sills . I I 4 . Carpet Dividers : Provide Pemko 236A firestops under � ; all "C" rated doors where carpet occurs each side of door, No . 2364A firestop under all'•'B" rated doors where carpet occurs each side of door, and No . 174C i stop where carpet occurs one side under any fire rated � ; I� door. 5 . Tile Dividers : Provide a 4" wide aluminum plate under , all "B" and "C" label doors where tile occurs each side of door. Butt tile into plate. Plate to match i j thickness of tile. � ��_� L. Rubber Silencers : Provide three per single door, and two , per double doors . , � � � M. Door Gaskets : Pemko S88D in continuous lengths . See Door ' Schedule for doors requiring gaskets at heads and jambs . N. Miscellaneous Hardware: Items of hardware such as flush � bolts, automatic flush bolts, dutch door bolts, etc . are identified in the various hardware sets on Finish , � Hardware Schedule by manufacturer's numbers, and are ' � manufactured by firms listed above. 0. Fastenings : ' 1 . Provide fasteners required to install hardware items, � including wood and machine screws, and through bolts . � Furnish fasteners to match finish of product. Where security/safety is a concern provide spanner head ' screws (SHS) for all items of hardware with exposed i ' fasteners . i � I , ! P. UL Labels : All doors which are labeled are to have UL � ; labeled hardware on them. � ' i � i January 22 , 1999 08700-5 98165 . 01 ' ' 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION � A. See Finish Carpentry, Section 06200 for installation of Finish Hardware. ' B. Install Finish Hardware in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations, using proper templates . � C . Install at heights recommended as industry standards unless noted otherwise or as dictated by applicable codes . � D. Install carpet dividers under all fire rated doors where carpet occurs . � HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. Hardware schedule is generic and hardware items listed �re to ' show basic operation/function of doors . Hardware supplier to furnish items by actual manufacturing catalogue numbers, making sure each item fits door use, and, meets all fire/safety � codes, i .e. , UL etc . , regardless of whether called for in schedule or not as hardware set numbers are used on different types of doors . , 2 . Majority of door hardware functions are listed using ANSI � numbers . V�hen there is no ANSI number to use, manufacturer --_� number is used to establish function onlv. � , HARDWARE SCHEDULE BEGINS ON NEXT PAGE , , � � � � � January 22 , 1999 08700-6 98165 . 01 ' � � � � � SET 1 , 1 SET PIVOTS L147 x ML19 1 LOCKSET D53PD , 1 CLOSER 4041 SNB 1 STOP ! SET 2 ' I 1 SET PIVOTS L147 x ML19 � 1 LOCKSET D53PD I , 1 STOP � II � � SET 3 ' I � � 1 SET PIVOTS ' L147 x ML19 j 1 PRIVACY SET D405 ` 1 STOP � I END OF SECTION i � � 1 -�-=� � . � 1 � 1 , � � 1 � _ 1 i � , � � � January 22, 1.999 08700-7 98165 . 01 ; ' , , f � � I SECTION 09100 , , i METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM ' PART 1 GENERAT, � i 1 . OI1 WORK INCLUDED 1 j A. Steel stud interior wall framing and anchorage. , B. Overhead bracing where required. � ' C. Furring down soffits over casework. - , 1 . 02 RELATED WORK � A. Submittals - Section 01300 . � 1 I B. Miscellaneous Metal : Steel angles, channels, and miscellaneous steel - Section 05500 . ' I - C . Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers Section � 06100 . I - � , D. Fire Retardant Wood Blocking - Section 06102 . i E. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Section 08100 . ' ; � F. Gypsum Wallboard Systems - Section 09260 . , 1 . 03 REFERENCES � I . A. ASTM A446 - Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc � i Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process . � � - B. ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General � Requirements for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by , ; Hot Dip Process . � � C. AWS D1 .3 - American Welding Society, "Structural Welding � � Code-Sheet Steel. " � D. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute, "Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members . " , � I 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS � i i � A. Submit items to Owner' s Representative in accordance with i Section 01300 . B. Submit manufacturer' s product data which clearly describes ' � � quality, performance and galvanizing thickness . ' I I January 22, 1999 09100-1 98165 . 01 ' C . Subm' a turer' s catalo ' it manuf c g illustrations depicting cutaway plan views of wall systems for fire-ratings indicated and manufactures instructions for installing. 1 D. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit drawings prepared by manufacturer/supplier for , approval by the Architect/Structural Engineer. These drawings should include the following: � a. Plans, cross-sections, or elevations as necessary to adequately depict component locations . b. Connection details showin screw t es and ' g YP locations, weld lengths or other fastener requirements . ' 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE � A. Comply with: ' 1 . Manufacturer's installation- instructions . 2 . Underwriters ' Laboratories, Inc. or other approved � t orie r esting laborat s equirements for meeting fire- ratings indicated. , 1 . 06 COORDINATION � A. Coordinate with all trades required to install wo=k in ' walls and partitions . Install studs in proper seGuence with other work. B. Thicken walls as required to accomodate electrical, ' mechanical, plumbing and other in-wall components . - PART 2 ' PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Acceptable manufacturers are Unimast Incorporated and Dietrich Industries . ' B. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable only after compliance with requirements specified in Section 016�0 . ' 2 . 02 INTERIOR WALL MATERIALS , A. Interior Studs (general) : Unimast, or approved equa?, 25 ' gauge roll formed, punched steel, galvanized. ' January 22 , 1999 09100-2 98105 . 01 ' � , i � I 1 ' I � � B. Interior Studs (heavy duty) : Unimast, or approved equal, 1 ! 20 gauge roll formed, punched steel studs, galvanized. ; For use at door and window jambs, window sills and header � framing and for back-up of wall hung cabinet work. ' ; C. Interior Runners : Unimast, or approved equal, galvanized ; i steel runners, 1-1/4 inches deep, compatible with studs . ' , 1 . Where walls include heavier gauge studs, provide , , runners of gauge to match heaviest gauge studs . , D. Furring members for gypsum board on concrete block walls : � Unimast 26 gauge roll-formed, hat shaped, galvanized steel . � 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES - INTERIOR WALLS A. Attachments : ' I 1 . Runner attachment to metal roof deck (with rigid � insulation or insulating concrete only) : U.S. Gypsum , I 7/16" long 5-12 high/low pan head screws. ; 2 . Studs and furring attachment to masonry an3 concrete: � Hilti or approved equal Powder Driven Pins or hardened concrete nails of appropriate size. i I � ' 3 . Stud to runner attachment: USG Type 5-12 , Pan Head ' �:a Screws or approved equal . � 4 . Stud to door and window frame attachment: USG, 3/8" ' , long, Type 5-12 , Pan Head Screws or approved equal . ' 5 . Welding electrodes : Match to material being welded. ' , � 6 . Anchorage Devices : These devices to be used where appropriate Contractor to determine location of powder , actuated devices versus expansion anchors . ' ' Powder Actuated Fasteners shall be manufactured from � I AISI 1062 or AISI 1065 steel austempered to a minimum � ' ; core hardness of 50-54Rc and possess the following ; properties : I � � a. Tensile Strength = 270, 000 psi � b. Shear Strength = 162 , 000 psi � I i c . All fasteners shall meet the requirements of ASTM r ; I B-633-78 . ' i , d. Fasteners shall be a minimum of 9/64" diameter. � e. Fasteners shall be zinc plated. ' I � January 22 , 1999 09100-3 98165 . 01 � ' ' f . Al1 exterior anchors to be galvanized. Minimum Design Values for Powder � I Driven Fasteners in Concrete (Pounds) Shank Dia Penetration Loading T e 3000 psi Conc . 4000 si Conc . I 0 . 145" 1-1/8" Shear 225 265 0 . 145" 1-1/8" Tension 115 145 0 . 177" 1-7/16" Shear 285 330 0 . 177" 1-7/16" Tension 205 275 0 . 205" 1-1/4" 5hear 445 500 0 . 205" 1-1/4" Tension 280 345 Values are for semi-lightweight or normal weight concrete Minimum fastener spacing of 4" and Minimum edge distance of 3 " � See product literature for values in structural steel 7 . Expansion anchors shall be stud type and shall be zinc 1 plated (and galvanized) in accordance with ASTN! B633 , Type III Fe/Zn5 . Expansion anchors shall be a minimum of 3/8 inch diameter with 2 1/2 inch embedment into ' concrete unless noted otherwise in the drawings . PART 3 EXECUTION , __3 . 01 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WALL STUDS ' A. Interior Track Runners : 1 . Anchor stud tracks to floor with powder actuated 1 fasteners staggered at a minimum of 16 inches center- to-center, or as determined by 1 . 04D - Structural Calculations . ' 2 . Attach flange of stud to track with #8 screw thru each flange. 3 . Installing Top Runners : Provide powder actaated � fasteners in composite concrete or concrete floor decks . Provide self tapping screws at roof assem�lies ' or sheet metal closure strip. Tn�here top ru�ners parallel ribs of inetal decic, which are off center of deck ribs, install metal steel closure strip to _natch � gauge of deck to extend across flutes of deck. A��tach steel strips to bottoms of ribs with specified fasteners . Space staggered fasteners 16 inches o. �� . a. Attach top runners to sheet steel strips with pan � head sheet metal screws . Space staggered scre�us 16 inches o.c . , January 22 , 1999 09100-4 98165 . 01 , � i 1 , � � � b. T�here one side of runner lands on ribs of composite � � i deck and the other side lands only on steel strip, � attach to concrete deck rib with powder actuated i I fasteners, spaced 32 inches o.c. , and attach to ' i continuous sheet steel closure strip with pan head � � screws spaced 32 inches o.c . I I c . �There top runners land securely on deck ribs, ' whether running- parallel or perpendicular, attach I i runners to bottom side of deck. Space staggered fasteners 16 inches o . c. , � d. Where stud walls extend to bottoms of fire-proofed I beams, install 2 inch long "Z" clips (at 16" o . c . ) ' required to minimize disruption of fireproofing � materials . B. Interior Wall Studs : ' � 1. Do not install studs until door frames have been set in � place and anchored and braced. All interior wall studs � shall be spaced 16 inches o.c . unless drawings are ; shown otherwise. , � I 2 . Where wall hung cabinetwork and casework is indicated ! � � to have furred down gypsum board, the furred down areas ' shall be installed prior to ceiling grid so that angle ' ' --_� ; for ceiling grid will abut vertical furred walls . 3 . In long runs of walls, install double studs spaced 1/2 , inch apart, at not over 30 ' -0" intervals to act as I i control joints . Back all control joints with safing � , ; ' insulation. � � 4 . Door and Window Jambs : ' � i a. At all openings up to and including 6 ' -0" wide, � � doors and windows . Double 20 gauge studs (fastened , together to make up a sturdy unit) at each jamb, ; � start 25 ga. stud wi:thin 6" from the double studs, each jamb. ' I � Ib. At openings where doors are lead-lined (regardless , of width) , install double 20 gauge studs (fastened together to make up a sturdy unit) with a 20 ga. ' stud 6" away from the double studs, each jamb. The double studs shall be attached to a steel angle � frame by others . Steel angle attached to deck ' i above and floor above � � i � i � � � 1 � � � January 22, 1999 09100-5 98165 . 01 � , I i ' . ' c . At openings over 6' -0" wide in long continuous walls (not cross corridor doors) provide double 20 , gauge studs at jamb and a 20 gauge stud witnin 6" from frame. Provide a steel angle frame from floor to deck above. 5 . Addition and renovation work will require the ins�_aller , to match the size of existing metal studs to keep the walls straight and uniform. ' 6 . Install 20 gauge studs in walls where cabinetwork is shown to be wall hung. , C. Furring: 1 . Hat channels on masonry walls : Space hat channels on � masonry walls 16 inches o.c. Attach to masonry with specified fasteners . D. Bracing and Studs Above Suspended Ceiling: ' 1 . Support top ends of diagonal stud braces approximately ' 32" o .c . with sheet steel angles . Attach steel angles to bottom side of structure with power driven pins . 2 . Attach top and bottom ends to steel angles and vertical � studs with two Tek Screws . -_-� 3 . where stud assemblies are indicated for hanging lights ' and supporting lay in ceilings, attach top runners to structure as specified above. Attach short studs to top and bottom runners with two Screws per stud at top ' and two per stud at bottom to form a hanging assembly. END OF SECTION - ' . , � ' , ' January 22 , 1999 09100-6 98165 . 01 ' ' � , i I ' � SECTION 09260 � � � GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS ; � ' � PART 1 GENER.AL , I 1. 01 SUBMITTALS � A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section 01300 . ' i i B. Submit four copies of manufacturer' s product data and instructions for installing. ' I 1. 02 COORDINATION I I A. Coordinate with all trades required to install work in walls and partitions . Do not install wallboard until such ' I work has been installed and tested. I ' 1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated , , j or required, comply with detailed drawings and/or in accordance with local and state codes if they are more � � stringent to produce a satisfactory fire-rated system. ' -:_1 . 04 HANDLING AND STOR.AGE � A. Handle materials to avoid damage. � ' B. Store materials inside, under cover, in a dry place. � I 1. Stack flat, off floor. ' � I 2 . Su ort boards to revent sa in . PP P JJ J i I , ; 3 . Store adhesives and joint material in a warm, dry I j place. ' � IC. Overloading is prohibited. � � 1. �05 JOB CONDITIONS � � A. Maintain medium constant temperature in areas where work is performed before, during, and after gypsum board and , joint treatment applications . � �� B. Provide ventilation during and following application of ' � adhesives and joint treatment. ' iC. Protect system from drying too fast. ' � � � Jaivary 22, 1999 09260-1 98165 . 01 I i ' ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS ' A. Gypsum Board - General 1 . When double layered board is installed, bottom layer � may be square edged instead of tapered edge. B. Gypsum Board Types : Documents are based on USG. and ' compatible with steel studs and/or other componen�s of rated assemblies identified in drawings or other areas of ' specifications . Alternate acceptable manufacturer Gold Bond or Georgia Pacific and must be a complete system as listed by test results . 1 . USG, Type "X" , tapered edge, 5/8" thick. ' 2 . USG, Type "X" , WR, 5/8" thick. ' C. Fasteners : 1 . Screws : USG, Type S, self-drilling, self-tapping, � bugle head, screws for use with power driven screw drivers . Lengths to fit conditions . D. Laminating Adhesive: � -_a 1 . Use adhesive complying with wallboard manufacturer' s ' recommendations . (For use when second layer of gypsum board is not part of rated assembly) . - E. Sealants : ' 1 . Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant , 2 . Water Resistant Sealant: USG W/R Sealant � F. Joint Treatment Materials : ' � 1 . Adhe ive Joint Treatment: USG Pe - - r s rf A Tape, or app.�oved equal. 2 . Joint Com ound: USG Read Mixed Com - ' p y pound All Pur�ose, or approved equal . 3 . Joint Reinforcement: USG 2 " wide Imperial Glass-�iber � open-weave tape, Type P or approved equal . � � January 22, 1999 09260-2 98165 . 01 ' i � ' I I i , I I I G. Trim: 1 I i � 1 . Outside Corner Trim: USG, or approved equal, No . 100 i I Perf-A-Bead, galvanized reinforcement. ' ; � 2 . Control Joint: USG, or approved equal, No . 093 Control Joint, galvanized. I I 3 . Channel Trim: USG, or approved equal No. 200A, ' � galvanized. I � ' � PART 3 . EXECUTION i ' 3 . 01 PRE-INSTALLATION ACTIONS � A. Notify Local inspecting authorities prior to beginning � � installation of wallboard. ' B. Review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure ' that everything proceeding installation of wallboard has � � been completed. ' C. Ins ect surfaces of a lied wallboard to a p pp ssure that board , � is plumb and true. Do not commence work until � , � deficiencies have been corrected. I � ' D. After tub, shower pan or receptor is installed, place ' �-:, temporary 1/4" spacer around lip of fixtures . Precut board to required sizes and make necessary cutouts for I installation of tile backerboard. ' i 3 . 02 CEILING BOARD INSTALLATION ' �A. Install ceiling gypsum board before board is installed on , i walls unless walls are required to extend to the deck above. Comply with manufacturer' s printed instructions � � for installing. , ; 3 . 03 WALLBOARD INSTALLATION ' ; �A. Install all wallboard vertically and in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instructions : High priority walls j shall be installed first and the lessor priority walls shall be installed thereafter as required. ' I 1 . Leave a 1/4" - 3/8" max. space between floor slab and bottom edge of wallboard and seal with acoustical ' � sealant. i I , 2 . �here double studs are installed to act as control � I joints, leave 1/2 inch wide separation in wallboard for ' , installation of specified metal control joint. Control i joints not to exceed 30 feet on center. I � i January 22 , 1999 09260-3 98165 . 01 � U U , 3 . Where sum board walls form 135 de ree a� les � g g , install alvanized steel an les runnin full g g g height of gypsum board to reinforce joints . � 4 . V�here wallboard extends to bottom of inetal or concrete decks, etc . , cut wallboard to clearances as requi=ed on � drawings . See details for all smoke walls, fire & smoke walls, fire walls, and all other wall types . 5 . Mud & tape all vertical � horizontal drywall joints . � Joints mudded and taped above ceiling spaces need not be sanded. IN NO CASE shall drywall mud be used at � joint between drywall and structure above. This joint shall be caulked as required for type of wall construction. See drawing details . B. Stencil all corridor p�rtitions, smoke, fire, hori�ontal � exit, exit enclosures and other rated partitions with � permanent 2 inch high letters identifying the name and � hour rating of the partition, approximately 8" above the ceiling every 20 feet on both sides of partition, or 10 feet from corners, and identified once in each space having fire-rated or smoke walls . Identify wa11s as � applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE, " "2,-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE, SMOKE RESISTIVE WALL TO DECK, " etc . C. Double Layer Wallboard ' __� 1 . Screw first layer to studs and runners with specified ' screws . Space screws at studs 8 inches staggered o .c . at joint and 12 inches o .c . at intermediate studs . 2 . For non-rated construction: Install first layEr of � ' wallboard with long edges of board vertical and install second layer in accordance with manufact-zrers recommendations . ' 3 . For fire rated construction: Install second layer of wallboard with joints offset from those of first layer. ' Screw attach second layer in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instruct,ions . D. One Hour Walls : ' l . One layer of 5/8" Type X wallboard applied to each side of 3 5/8" metal studs . The wallboard shall be applied ' with the long dimension vertical . The vertical joints shall be staggered one stud spacing on each side of wall . The horizontal joints shall be staggered on each ' side of the wall . The wall shall extend tight to the deck above and be sealed to the deck. All joints not to exceed 1/4" shall be taped and sealed with druwall mud and or Thermafiber safing. ' January 22, 1999 09260-4 98165 . 01 � � 0 � ; � � � 1 � � i3 . 0i WALLBOARD FINISHING � i A. Walls shall be plumb and true and all corners shall be � i plumb and square. ' � B. Finish joints in accordance with wallboard manufacturer' s � I printed instructions . , � C. The contractor shall be familiar with the finishing levels i ; as described by the Gypsum Association from Level 1 to i I Level 5, and apply these finishes as required for final , finish as called for in the drawings, i .e. , painting ' j different types of wall covering, etc . I ' 1 , Examples : (These notes are brief and are guidelines only, � use Gypsum Association pamphlet #GA214-90 . ) � 1. Level 1 - Above Ceilings . ' � � 2 . Level 2 - V�There water resistant 3 . Level 3 - Ti�here hea � board is used. � vy grade wallcovering is used. , � 4 . Level 4 - Where light grade wallcovering and flat ' ' paint is used. I 5 . Level 5 - Where gloss enamel, semi-gloss enamel, , i and epoxy paint are used. ' � D. Employ only qualified wallboard finishers for this work. I � E. After finishing is completed and before paint or wall -- covering is applied, inspect walls and make corrections to ; 9 � provide smooth surfaces free from defects . � ' ' I END OF SECTION � i , ' � I � � � i � � ; 1 ' � � ; � 1 ' � � 1 � � � � 1 ! � ; � � ' � January 22 , 1999 09260-5 98165 . 01 � I . ; , ; � � � � � I , I I SECTION 09500 ' � ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ' I PAR;T 1 GENERAL 1. OI1 INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED , A. Access Doors : SEC. 15050 . 1. OI2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 I A. Qualifications of Installer: t I � 1 . Minimum of three project installations of comparable I extent as proposed project. � f' 2 . Submit written description of material installer, I listing name of material manufacturers, qualifications � of installation personnel, and years of concurrent . , I I contracting experience. � B. Tolerances : , ' � 1 . Deflection: I a. Suspension system components, hangers, and� ' I-__� fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles, and acoustical units : Maximum � deflection 1/360 of the span. ' � � b. Deflection Tests : ASTM C635 . I 2 . Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceilings ' I system: Level within 1/8" in 12 feet. � � � �C. Fire Ratings : � � � � � 1 . Fire Hazard Classification: I I II� ' I a. Maximum flame spread: Underwriter' s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 0-25; smoke developed: 0-450 . i, � i b. ASTM E84 . � , 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS � ' A. Shop Drawings (Include the following) : � � 1 . Layout indication. ' � � 2 . Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details . � • � � I January 22, 1999 09500-1 98165 . 01 1 ' 3 . Splicing method for main and cross runners . 4 . Change in level details . ' 5 . Acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture. B. Manufacturer's Literature: ' 1 . Submit manufacturer' s recommendation for installation ' of suspension system. C. Certificates : , ' 1 . Furnish certification of flame spread index of fire rating organization. 2 . Furnish certification of materials and svstems ' conforming to specification requirements . D. Maintenance Materials : , 1 . Furnish extra materials equal to 1� of each tyoe of acoustical material supplied. � 2 . Furnish suspension system components in amount sufficient to install extra ceiling units . ' 1. 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING � A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective ' packaging, with manufacturer' s labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness and fire rating as applicable, legible and intact. ' B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. ' C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. � D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received. 1 . 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Complete installation of dampening materials before ' beginning work. B. Maintain humidity of 65-75� in area where acous�ical , materials are to be installed, 25 hours before, during and 25 hours after installation. C . Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 to 70 ' ' degrees F prior to and during installation of materials . � January 22, 1999 09500-2 98165 . 01 � � � i � � ' � I IPART 2 PRODUCTS t ( 2 . 0�1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM I A. Type: Exposed Tee Grid. 1 I � 1 . ASTM C635 . � ' � � 2 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty systems . I. � I I 3 . All components of system from one manufacturer. ' I � � I 4 . Size: 24 x 48 in. and 24 x 24 in. (See drawings) . � B. Main, Cross, and Concealed Members : 1 I � 1 . Web design: Single. Exposed flange 15/16 in. wide. I ' � 2 . Cold rolled steel, electro-zinc coated with prepainted I finish to match color of ceiling tile units . � I ' C. Edge Molding: I � 1 . Minimum 0 . 020 in. steel, channel or angle-shaped, with i minimum flange width of 15/16 in. � I D. Hold down clips : I I , i�_.a i 1 . Type as supplied by suspension system manufacturer. I I • i E. Rough Suspension: 1 I i 1 . Hanger wire: Minimum 12 ga. , galv. soft-annealed, mild � steel wire. � I. , � I 2 . Wire ties : 18 ga. , galv. annealed steel wire. I � ; � 3 . Hanger clips : Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening ' , � as required. ' I 4 , Carrying channels : 16 ga. , 1-1./2 in. , cold rolled ' � steel . 1 � � I 2 . 02 CEILING TILE UNITS I � �A. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Units : 1 I I 1 . United States Gypsum, No. 562 , Auratone, Fissured 24 x ' 48 X 3�4�� • ' I i I � I I ' I I � I � I I - � Jaivary 22 , 1999 09500 3 98165 . 01 j � i ' 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION ' A. Suspension System: ASTM C636 . 1. Hangers : t a. Install hanger clips as recommended by ' manufacturer. b. Space hanger wires 4 ft. o. c . , each direction. , c . Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member 6 in. from vertical surfaces . d. Do not splay wires more than 5 in. in a 4 ft. ' vertical drop. ` e. Wrap wire a minimum of three times horizontally, , turning ends upward. f . Saddle tie carrying channels to main structure for ' indirect hung suspension system. g. Znstall additional hanger wire at each corner of � recessed light fixture not supported by regular grid hanger. � 2 . Main and Cross runners : ' a. Space main runners at 4 ft. o.c. , at right angle to ' carrying channel . Level arid square to adjacent walls . Wire clip to channels at all intersections . b. Space cross runners at 2 ft. on centers . ' 3 . Wall molding: a. Install wall molding at intersections of suspended 1 ceiling and vertical surfaces . b. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or ' install corner caps . c . Attach to vertical surface with mechanical ' fasteners . B. Ceiling Tile Units : , 1 . Install in level plane in straight line courses . 2 . Place materials to bear all around on suspension ' members . January 22 , 1999 09500-4 98165 . 01 , ' I � � � � 3 . Minimum width of border tiles : One-half unit dimension.. 4 . Provide field cut, scored, square edges on all tegular � edge tiles, to match factory edge. 3 . OI2 CLEANING � i. Clean soiled or } discolored unit surfaces after installation. � � B. Touch-up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in ipainted surfaces . i ' C. Remove and replace damaged, or improperly installed units. ' END OF SECTION 1 � � � -_=a 1 I r � � � ' ; - � 1 � � 1 ' � I ; _ � January 22, 1999 09500-5 98165 .01 I � _� \ � � \� I I � SECTION 09650 � RESILIENT FLOORING � FOR REFERENCE ONLY � PAiT 1 GENER.AL 1 . 01 RELATED WORK � A. Section 01300 - Submittals . _ I B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Finish troweling � of floor slabs. 1. 02 SUBMITTALS �� A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section 01300 . � B. Submit five copies of manufacturer's product data and install.ation instructions for types of resilient flooring and accessories specified. � � ,'C. When work is completed, submit two copies of j manufacturer' s written instructions for maintenance of � flooring and accessories . � � ~1. 03 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Furnish additional resilient flooring material for ireplacement and maintenance. � iB. Furnish materials of each size, color pattern and type of materials installed. C. Furnish materials at the rate of one carton for each 1500 � � i sq. ft. or fraction thereof installed. 1. 04 DELZVERY AND STORAGE � I 'A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with manufacturer's labels legible and intact . � B. Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions . ' 1. 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature of spaces and materials at a minimum � I of 65 degrees F for at least 48 hours before installation i and for not less than 48 hours after installation. ' January 22, 1999 09650-1 98165 . 01 i i ,� Subsequently, maintain temperature of at least 55 degrees F in areas where work has been completed. � B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been _ completed, but before casework is placed. � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (Refer to Finish Plans for Actual Materials Specified) � 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Vinyl-Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312 , Type IV, 12 " x 12" x 1/8" , asbestos free, tapered or bullnose edge. B�. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 6' -0" wide rolls, . 085 " gauge. � C. Resilient Base: 4" high. Provide factory molded inside and outside corners . � 1 . Standard top-set, cove base on resilient floorin� and carpeted areas . 2 . Standard straight base where areas are carpeted. � -_ D. Resilient Edge (Terminal) Strips: 1/8" thick x 1" or more � � wide, homogeneous rubber, tapered or bull nose on outer edge. E. Adhesive Systems: Use adhesives as specified by the � manufacturer for the specific flooring and substrate as required. F. Integral Base Fillet Strips : Cove stick by manufacturer to � back-up resilient sheet flooring is turned up walls to form an integral base. � G. Cap Strips: 5upplied by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer to cap integral base turned up walls . � H. Feature Strips : Supplied by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for division of adjacent floor finish under doors . � I � � January 22 , 1999 09650-2 98165 . 01 ' i ! � � � � PARi 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 PREPARATION � A. Examine floors and walls for defects which might adversely affect tile work or its appearance. Db not begin work , until defects have been corrected. I •� B. Thoroughly clean floors before applying adhesive. � C. Verify the subfloor is acceptable to begin resilient � � flooring installation. Perform bond and moisture test and calcium chloride test per manufacturer's recommendations . I Acceptance of the subfloor is the responsibility of the flooring contractor. � 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Use care in installing materials so that no stains appear .� � on finished work. B. Apply adhesive with clean notched trowels . � . 1 . Place adhesive only on that amount of area which can be � , covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of� the adhesive. I 2 . Water base adhesive should be allowed to dissipate to � __� i where the mastic changes color before flooring material is placed. � 3 . Place adhesive uniformly. �C. Lay tile from center of space so that no tile less than half size occurs in width or length of the space. � 1. Lay tile square with room axes . La tile with rain of I Y g each tile perpendicular to adjoining tiles . � I � 2 . Cut tiles neatly and fit to and around fixtures, i recesses, pipes and butting surfaces . Fit within 1/64 � � inch. 3 . Butt edges of flooring material tightly together. � 4 . Use a roller, or firmly press tiles into adhesive so that they are well bonded. -� 5 . Neatly trowel adhesive on wall and install rubber base. I iD. WELDED SEAM VINYL FLOORING � � 1. Install flooring as specified above making sure that � all inside and outside corners are consistent, radiuses ' January 22 , 1999 09650-3 98165 . 01 ; � � �i j are tight and true and all work is done in a workmanlike manner. � 2 . Machine route seams, install PVC thread in routed seams, and heat weld seams in accordance with � manufacturer' s printed instructions . E. INTEGRAL BASE 1 . Where flooring material turns up walls to form an � integral base: a. Install cove fillet strips at floor/wall .� intersections with adhesive. b. Turn flooring material or pre-moulded base up walls � as shown on drawings and set to walls with adhesive. c . Carefully miter corners and heat seal seams . � d. Install cap strip at top of base. � F. BASE IN CARPETED AREAS 1. Install straight base in all areas to receive carpet � over 1/2" in height in accordance with the finish schedule. � a. Straight base shall be installed prioi to '� installation of carpet. , 2 . Install. cove base in all areas to receive carpet 1/2" �� in height or less in accordance with the finish schedule. 3 . 03 CLEANING � A. When installation in each space is completed, clean floor and base. Cover floor with heavy paper or plastic � material taped in place. B. Just before final inspection, clean floor and base and �� perform maintenance in accordance with manufacturer' s printed instructions . END OF SECTION �� ,� January 22, 1999 09650-4 98165 . 01 � i � � . � SECTION 09680 � CARPET GLUE-DOWN INSTALLATION � FOR REFERENCE ONLY I PART 1 GENER.AL � 1 . 01 SCOPE & COORDINATION � I � A. Arrange for job site storage in advance of arrival of imaterials . Do not deliver materials to job site until arrangements have been made. � B. Coordinate carpet installation with other trades required I to work in the same areas . l � C. Furnish and install all supplementary or misc. items I incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and I complete installation. , . � �, 1. 02 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS � A. Approved as an installation contractor by carpet � manufacturers whose carpeting is selected. ' B. Employ only experienced, qualified, competent foremen and � __.s I journeymen installers . i 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS � I A. Submit items to Owner's Representative in accordance with � 5ection 01300 . � �B. Carpet Samples, Specifications & Warranties : Submit 3 � carpet samples (minimum size 6" X 6" ) , 4 sets i manufacturer's specifications and 4 sets manufacturer' s �� warranty for each pattern and color used to the General � Contractor for submittal to the Architect . � � �C. Installation Data: Submit four copies ' of manufacturer' s � data for adhesive to be used, and printed instructions for installation to the General Contractor for submittal to the Architect. � D. Maintenance Instructions : Submit four copies of manufacturer's maintenance instructions to General � Contractor for submittal to Architect. iE. Seaming Diagram.: Submit 3 copies of seaming diagram to the , I General Contractor for approval . Location of transition I and edge pieces should be indicated on drawing. Include I � � I January 22, 1999 09680-1 98165 . 01 � . '� ,� samples of proposed manufacturer, model # and color of these transition and edge pieces . � 1 . Submit notarized certificates from carpet manufacturers stating that carpet supplied meets with requireme�ts of this specification. ,� 2 . Submit certified laboratory test reports for flammability in accordance with Part 2 . 02 . � F . Submit copy of letter or other positive approval from State Fire Marshal. See APPROVALS paragraph below. �� 1 . 04 APPROVALS A. Submit, in states requiring it, a certified laboratory � test report for flammability to State Fire Marshal af the state where project is located stating that carpet meets or exceeds required Flame Spread Rating and obtair_ Fire Marshal' s approval before ordering carpet. B�. Comply with State, Local and Federal codes . 1 . 05 USABLE SCRAP CARPET � A. Deliver usable carpet pieces of leftover carpet to Owner. � Neatly package and wrap such carpeting for storage protection. 1 . 06 STORAGE �� A. Arrange, in advance of delivery, with General Contractor , for secure, clean, dry storage space. I B. Owner will not accept responsibility for safeguarding carpet and accessories . � 1 . 07 JOB CONDITIONS , A. Heating and Ventilating: Maintain uniform temperature � between 65 degrees and 95 degrees F in spaces receiving carpet for a period of at least 72 hours before carpet is installed, during installation, and for at least 72 hours �, after installation. Provide ventilation in spaces where carpet is installed during installation and for at least 72 hours after installation. B. Conditioning: Unroll carpet 24 hours before installation. � - .� January 22, 1999 09680-2 98165 . 01 � � I � � � I I � PAR�T 2 PRODUCTS li � 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANiJFACTURERS � A. Refer to finish Drawings for carpet manufacturers, styles and colors . B. Trim and Edge Accessories - Mercer Products Co . or � approved substitute. � 2 . OI2 CARPET PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS � I A. Fire Rating: � � 1 . All carpet shall meet requirements of Standard for Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs, DOC FF-1-70 (Methenamine Pill Test) . � 2 . Carpet shall have a minimum critical flux of 0 .45 per square centimeter as determined by Flooring Radiant Panel Test ASTM E-648 . �, 3 . Carpet shall have a smoke density development of 450 or less per NBS Smoke Chamber Test NFPA 258 . , � B. Permanent Static Protection: 3 . 0 KV or less at 20% � � relative humidity and 70 degrees F, when tested by AATCC 134, Electrostatic Propensity. � � � C. Vermin Proofing: Treat carpet to make it completely moth and vermin proof. � . Dampproofing: Treat carpet materials so that carpet is '� compatible with installation over concrete slab subfloors . � E. Factory Runs : Produce carpet, of each type specified, in one factory run and from one dye lot. Guarantee colors I and shades to be uniform throughout the run of material. � 2 . 03 CAR.PET ACCESSORIES IA. Furnish and install accessory trim pieces at all ��, transitions to another floor material and all exposed edges of carpet. Submit samples in accordance with 1 . 03 E. �� 2 . 04 ADHESIVES AND SEALERS �� A. Adhesives - General : 1. Provide adhesives as recommended by carpet � manu€acturer. � ' January 22 , 1999 09680-3 98165 . 01 I ,� ,� 2 . Comply with requirements for flame spread rating, same as specified for carpet. � B. Water roof cement: As recommended � p by carpet manufacturer. � Comply with requirements for flame spread rating. C. Seam Sealers : Provide sealers and other materials, if � required, in accordance with carpet manufacturer's printed instructions . ' � PART 3 EXECUTION �� 3 . 01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Examine floors for defects or conditions which might � adversely affect carpet installation or appearance. Do not install carpet until defects or conditions are corrected. ' � , B. Clean floors thoroughly of substances detrimental to proper installation. Allow floors to dry completely. � 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet in accordance with approved shop drawings, �, seaming diagram, and manufacturer' s printed instructions . -_� B. Cut carpet, where required, to allow proper seam and � pattern match. Make cuts straight and true, without frayed edges . Small patched areas and seamed pieces of carpet are not acceptable. � C. Locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic . � D. Doorway seams shall be centered directly under the door. ,� E. Join seams so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation. Coat cut edges with seam sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. �, I , F. Spread adhesive in quantity required, after primer application, if manufacturer recommends a primer. �� G. Do not change run of pile where carpet is conti�uous through a wall opening. � ' H. Fit carpet snugly to walls and other vertical surfaces . I . Lay entire carpet tight and flat to subfloor, well '� attached at edges, and so that it presents a uniform appearance. '- January 22 , 1999 - 09680-4 98165 . 01 , I � � � J. Ins�all edge strips and trim in accordanee with manufac�.urer's printed instruc�ions . �, 3 . 0�3 INSPECTING, CORRECTING, AND CLE�NING " - � A, As installation is�. each space is compl.eted, carefully � inspect en�ire installation for defects . Especially � examine seams �or sigrzs of raveling and separation, and ,� , excessive adhesive. �. Make corrections as required. If defects are visible after attempted correction, replace defective carpet. � C. Thoroughly clean carpe�. � D. Owner reserves the right to test installed carpe�. far � f campliance with specificatians within time period covered � by manu�acturer's warranty. ,� 3 . 0�4 PROTECTING .A. Furniture placemen� and heavy tra�fic shall not occtzr for �, � 48 hour� following installation. B. Place pJ.astic ozz carpe� to protec�. from cons�.ruction. dirt ,� and traffa.e. Do not rema-ve until all phases of construction are complete. � � END OF SECTION � � I � � � � � � � . � January 22 , 1999 �- 09680--5 98165 . 01 \� . l . SECTION 09800 �• SPECIAL COATINGS � PART 1 GENERAT, _ 1 . OI1 SECTION INCLUDES: � A�. Troweled on finish. The work required under this section � I consists of surface preparation, application of a skim coat, � primer and finish coat. 1 . Oi2 RELATED SECTIONS � A�. Section 03300 : Cast-in-Place Concrete BI. Section 04200 : Unit Masonry � C. Section 09200 : Lath and Plaster � i. Section 09250 : Gypsum Board 1 . 013 QUALITY ASSURANCE � I. Manufacturer Requirements : 1 . Member in good standing of SWRI (Sealant Waterproofing � �;n and Restoration Institute) . � 2 . Manufacturer of coatings for a period of at least � fifteen (15) years . 3 . Single source manufacturer of surface preparation and coating materials . � ' B. Contractor Requirements : � 1. Engaged in application of special coatings for a �; minimum of three (3) years. � 2 . Employ skilled applicators to execute work with a minimum three (3) years of experience with the materials, methods and requirements of the specified work. � 3 . Successful completion of a minimum of three (3 ) projects of similar size and complexity of the � specified work. 4 . Provide the equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install coatings in compliance with Sto' s � published specifications and details and the project plans and specifications . � 1 January 22, 1999 09800-1 98165 . 01 � � � C . Include on labels or containers : 1. Manufacturers name �� 2 . Product name and number � D. Field quality control : 1 . Request review of first finished area. � 2 . Use the first acceptable area as the project standard � for the rest of the work. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer' s specifications, installation instructions, � product data and cleaning instructions . B. Sample: Three (3 ) , minimum 8" x 8" (200 x 200 m m) hard �� board of coating fixture and color for each color spec_fied. c . Manufacturer' s standard warranty � d. List of project references 1 . 05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STOR.AGE AND HANDLING ,� __� A. Deliver materials in their original sealed containers � bearing manufacturer' s name and identification of product . B. Protect acrylic based products (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) . � Store away from direct sunlight . C. Protect Portland Cement based materials (bag products) from • moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in '� a dr location. Y 1 . 06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS � A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) during application and drying period, minimum � 24 hours after application of coating. B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures � less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) . C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials . � 1 . 07 SEQUENCING � January 22, 1999 09800-2 98165 . 01 � � 1 i i � � A. Install finish coating in sequence to prevent damage from other trades . 1. 0�8 WARRANTY � i A. Provide manufacturer' s standard materials warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2 . 01 MATERIAL - , S SURFACE PREPARATION I � I A. Surface Conditioner � I 1. Sto dispersion diluted 10o with water, roll apply and � i I let dry. � IB'. Patching and Leveling � � 1. . Sto BTS-Plus . I � iC�. Primer - � � 1. Sto Primer - acrylic based tinted primer � 2 . Oi2 MATERIALS - FINISH COATINGS � � . . A. Sto Decocoat - acrylic based textured wall coating with 1/64 in. ( . 4- . 5 m m) coated aggregate . � 2 . 0,3 MATERIALS (NON-PROPRIETARY � , � A. Water: Clean and potable 2 . 0�4 MIXING � A. Plasterweld - mix to uniform consistency per manufacturer's � instructions . � � B. Gypsolite - mix to a uniform consistency per manufacturer's I instructions . C. Sto Primer - mix to a uniform consistency. ,� � � D. Sto Decocoat - mix to a uniform consistency. A small amount � of water may be added to adjust workability. Limit addition of water to amount needed to achieve the finish texture. E. Mix all materials with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer � in a clean mixing pail. F. Mix only as much material as can readily be used. � G. Do not use anti-freeze compounds or other additions . I � ' � ; January 22, 1999 09800-3 98165 . 01 � � -, � ,� PART 3 EXECUTION �� 3 . 01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. Pre-qualify under Quality Assurance requirements of this � specification (Section 1 . 03 B) . 3 . 02 EXAMINATION � A. Inspect masonry or plaster surfaces for: 1 . Contamination - algae, curing compounds, dirt, dust, � efflorescence, firm oil, fungus, grease, laitance, mildew, mold, or other foreign matter. � 2 . Delamination, damage, defects, and deterioration - record location. 3 . Cracks - measure crack width and record location. � 4 . Surface absorption and chalkiness . � 5 . Moisture content and moisture damage - use a mois�ure meter to determine if the surface is dry enough to � receive the coating and record moisture content and any areas of moisture damage. -_.� 6 . Plumbness - record areas that are not within required � tolerances . B. Inspect gypsum wallboard surfaces for: 1 . Installation in compliance with ASTM C 840 . � C. Report results of inspection and deviations from the � requirements of this specification and other conditions that might adversely effect the coatings work to the General Contractor. 3 . 03 SURFACE PREPAR.ATION FOR MASONRY A. Remove surface contaminates (refer to ASTM D 4258 and D � 4261) . B. Remove loose, damaged or deteriorated materials . � C. Repair surface defects . D. Apply surface conditions by brushing on surface. � E. Skim coat or level the surface to required tolerance, fill � all voids, and make mortar joints flush with the surface. January 22 , 1999 09800-4 98�165 . 01 � 1 1 3 . 04 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD ' � A. Replace damaged or deteriorated board. B. Remove dust from surface with soft nylon brush. � , 3 . 05 PRIMING � � AI. Apply primer uniformly to prepared, dry surfaces with brush, � roller or spray equipment. � 3 . Oi6 FINISH COAT INSTALLATION A�. Apply finish coat to dry primed surface to a uniform ithickness in accordance with the following procedures : � 1 . Apply with stainless steel trowel .or s pray equipment. � � 2 . Apply in a continuous application and work to a wet edge. � 3 . Coordinate work to protect work from damage by other trades . � 4 . Apply material to match approved sample or field mock- up. � 5 . Do not apply separate batches side-by-side. � j_.a � 6 . Do not apply over irregular or unprepared surfaces or surfaces not in compliance with the project � I specifications . 3 . Oi7 PROTECTION � A. Provide protection of installed coating from dust and dirt, � freezing, continuous high humidity, and damage from other I trades or building components . � I END OF SECTION � � � � . � January 22, 1999 09800-5 98165 . 01 � � . � SECTION 09900 PAINTING � PAR.T 1 GENERAT, 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Painting. The work required under this section c , onsists � of all painting, finishing and related items necessary to � complete the work indicated on drawings described in the specifications and listed in the Painting and Finishing schedule. � I1. 02 QUALITY ASSUFZANCE � � A. Qualifications: ', � � '' � 1 . Employ only skilled mechanics experienced in applying '� ! commercial painting products . I , B. Include on labels or containers : 'I i � � 1 . Manufacturers Name � � i , 2 . Product Name and Number � � --a 3 . Color I � 4 . Batch Number � C. Field Quality Control: � l . Request review of first finished room, item or area. � 2 . Use the first acceptable room, item or area as the _ project standard for the rest of the work. I� � 3 . Each room, item or area used as a project standard I ' shall be no smaller than 100 sq. ft. in surface area � unless otherwise directed by the Architect. I D. Color Consistency should be maintained in all materials by the manufacturer. Al1 tinting is to be done by the � manufacturer unless the Architect approves other arrangements . � 1. 03 SUBMITTALS i ' A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section ', 01300 . � � � Janua 22 1999 09900-1 I� , rY , 9=1G5 . 01 � � B. Color Selection: 1 . As chosen by the Architect/Owner and referenced in � finish schedule and on drawings . 1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STOR.AGE AND HANDLING: � A. Deliver materials in sealed containers with manufacturers labels intact and legible. � i B. Storage of Materials : 1 . Store materials in a protected area at a temperature � between 35 F. and 110 F. 2 . Open and mix materials in storage area. • � 1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS A. A 1 coatin onl under the followin � pp y g Y g prevailing environmental conditions : �" 1 . Air and surface temperatures are not below 50 degrees � F. or above 120 degrees F. unless otherwise ap�roved by the manufacturer. 2 . Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F. above the � ' dewpoint. � 3 . The atmosphere is relatively free of airborne dust . � B. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted. � 1. 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS , A. Insure that all materials used are in compliance with � current State and Federal EPA regulations with regard to Volatile Organic Compounds (V.O.C. ) . B. Insure that all materials used meet NFPA (National Fire ,, Protection Association) No. 101 Class A requirements for Flame Spread and Smoke Density. C. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for � environmental conditions under which painting systems are applied. � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANiJFACTURERS � A. Materials shall be products of the Porter Paint Co . , as � listed in Section 3 . 06 Painting and Finishing Schedule and January 22 , 1999 09900-2 98165 . 01 � ,� � , . i � to establish performance requirements and a standard of � ' quality, unless otherwise. specified. PPG & Sherwin Williams are accepted as equals . � B. Use products of the same manufacturer for each coating system and for each type of surface. � 1. Requests for substitutions shall comply with all � �� conditions in Section 01340 and the following: ' C. Materials supplied by other non-specified suppliers will 1 be considered if the following prevailing conditions exist: � 1. Performance criteria of the specified materials are ' exceeded by the submitted alternate materials as listed I on the technical data sheets of each specified product. � � 2 . The submittal must compare the performance criteria of the specified material with that of the submitted material and be documented in a side by side manner for � the Architect to review. �� i 3 . Substitute materials must be for complete systems and - not individual products combined with the specified � . materials and the performance criteria for all products within a system must meet or exceed the specified materials . � '=9 4. Only one alternate submittal will be received for this specification and must be accompanied by a detailed � statement of the sum to be added or deducted from the , base bid should alternate materials be accepted. ' 2 . 02 MISCELLANEOUS � A. Oils, tur entine, and other materials re ired to P � accomplish this work shall be first quality materials . � B. Primers shall be specified by manufacturer of the finish paints used and detailed in Section 3 . 06 . � C, Thinners shall be of a type as recommended by the paint � manufacturer for each product specified in section 3 . 06 . � � D. Turpentir�e shall comply with requirements of Federal � Specification TT-T-801. � � Mineral Spirits shall comply with requirements of Federal � Specification TT-T-291 Grade 1. � � ; January 22 , 1999 09900-3 9816.5 . 01 i � . � 2 . 03 MATERIAL PREPARATION A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturers latest � printed instructions . B. Do not use materials beyond manufacturers recommended �. shelf life. C. Do not use mixed . materials beyond manufacturers � recommended pot life. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 PRE-WORK INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions � that would adversely affect the appearance or perfo7-mance of the coating systems and which cannot be put into an , acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified .in � paragraph 3 . 02 . ', B. Do not proceed with surface preparation and application � until the surface is acceptable or authorized to p�_oceed is given by the Architect. 3 . 02 SURFACE PREPAR.ATION � --__� A. General: � 1. Always follow manufacturers recommendations for proper � surface preparati�on for each specified product . Faulty , finish due to improper use of material or workmanship � shall be replaced by the applicator at his own expense. 2 . Dislodge dirt, plaster nibs, mortar spatter and other � � dry material by scrapping or brushing. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming or blowing with high pressure air. � 3 . Remove oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with. mineral spirits or a hot trisodium phosphate solution followed by a water rinse. � 4 . Remove mold and mildew with a household bleach (Sodium Hypochloride) in water solution: 7 parts water to 1 part bleach. Wash off bleach and allow to dry. ��' 5 . Verify that surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, wax, grease or other � contaminants . ; � January 22, .1999 09900-4 98165 . 01 � i 1 � 1 B. Steel . � 1. Remove all rust, mill scale and other foreign matter by the most appropriate method for the service level and � environment as recommended by the primer manufacturer. � C. Nonferrous Metal : �; '� 1. SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning to remove all contaminants . I D. Galvanized Metal : � I � 1 . Remove contaminants and protective mill coating by � SSPC- SP1 Solvent Cleaning or Steam Cleaning. � � E. Concrete, Masonry and Cement Stucco: � -I 1. Allow new concrete and masonry to cure 28 days . � i. 2 . Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with surface. , � � 3 . Patch holes and cracks flush with surface. ,� � 4 . Rake mortar joints clean. F. Plaster. � ��!=., 1 . Allow to cure for 28 days . ' 2 . Remove nibs and other protrusions by scraping flush � with surface. � 3 . Patch voids and cracks with spackling compound to match ,' i texture of surface. � � G. Gypsum Board: � 1 . Sand joint compound smooth and flush with surface using fine grit sandpaper. � 2 . Fill nicks, scratches, holes and uneven spots with spackling compound and after dry, sand flush with surface. � � H�. Wood: - 1 . Remove surface deposits of sap and pitch by scraping � and cleaning with mineral spirits . 2 . Seal knots and pitch pockets with a product � ; manufactured for this specific purpose. 3 . Sand rough spots of smooth siding and finish woodwork. � January 22 , 1999 09900-5 98165 . 01 � � � 4 . After prime coat is dry, fill cracks, holes and scratches with suitable wood filler or spackling � compound and when dry, sand flush with surface. 5 . Sand lightly between coats . I. Concrete Floors : � 1 . Prepare concrete floors by acid etching, ship blasting � or mechanical shot blasting in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedure. 3 . 03 APPLICATION � A. Mix and thin materials in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions . � B. Apply materials at specified film thickness by 7nethod recommended by the manufacturer. �� C. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before recoating. D. Vary color slightly for each successive coat. � E. Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials or colors . � F. Make finish coats smooth, uniform in color and free of -_� brush marks, laps, runs, dry spray, overspray and skipped � or missed areas . G. Prime glazing stops and glazing beads before glass is ' installed. H. Backprime exterior woodwork which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer. � I. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels and paint separately. � J. Replace identification markings when painting ov�r or spattered. K. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts � , convecto� and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible t�zrough grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint. '� Paint dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, etc . to match face panel�s . L. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for � electrical equipment before backboards are installed and equipment is mounted. � January 22 , 1999 09900-6 98165 . 01 � � � M. Remove electrical cover plates, hardware and other items � � not scheduled to be painted before painting surfaces on which sucli items are mounted. TnTh.en painting is completed, re-install items . � N. Paint exterior metal housing of inechanical equipment on roof or ground where color is not compatible with � adjoining facades or existing conditions as directed by I Architect and in accordance with materials specified in Section 3 . 06 . '� � 0. Stencil all corridor partitiQns, smoke, fire, horizontal exit, exit enclosures and other rated partitions with i permanent 2 inch high letters identifying the name and � i hour rating of the partition, approximately 8" above the � ceiling every 20 feet on both sides of partition, or 10 feet from corners, and identified once in each space ! having fire-rated or smoke walls . Identify walls as I � applicable, "1-HOUR FIRE, " "2-HOUR FIRE & SMOKE, SMOKE . RESISTIVE WALL TO DECK, " etc. ' � P. Paint one coat of Surface Sealer S40149 1 . 0 - 2 . 0 mils DFT by Porter Paint Co. on all walls scheduled to receive Type ' ; I vinyl . I 3 . 04 INSPECTION � I � A. Request acceptance of each coat before applying succeeding � ��_ ' coats from the Architect. B�. Touch-up and repair all work that is not acceptable to the � � Architect and request final acceptance. I 3 . 05 CLEANING � � A. Remove paint spatters from glass, plumbing fixtures and �i adjoining surfaces . � BI. Repair any damage to coatings or surfaces caused by � cleaning operations . Cj. Remove debris from job site and leave storage area clean. � 3 . 06 PAI I AND FINISHING SCHEDULE NT NG ' � A. Surfaces not to be painted unless otherwise scheduled: 1. Face brick. 2 . Pre-finished wall anels artitions and ceilin tile. �� P , P 5 � i 3 . Items with factory applied final finish. � 4 . Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit. � January 22, 1999 09900-7 � 98165 . 01 I i � •� B. Contractor is responsible for the protection of surfaces determined not to be coated and to correct defects � ' produced in the process of application. The following schedule calls for the recommended amounts of material to be applied. However, if sufficient hiding and protection is not accomplished apply enough additional material to � the satisfaction ,of the Architect. Request final approval of each substrate and area. ' C. Exterior Painting and Finishing Schedule: � EPS 1A: NOT USED � EPS 1 : NOT USED EPS 2 : NOT USED � EPS 3 : NOT USED EPS 4 : NOT USED � EPS 5 : NOT USED �� , EPS 6 : NOT USED EPS 7 : NOT USED � D. Interior Painting and Finishing Schedule: � IPS 1 : Steel, galvanized steel or factory finished metal . � Finish: Gloss, Satin. - 15` Coat - 296 Rust Inhibitive Primer. � 2nd Coat - Advantage 900 Acrylic Satin Enamel IPS 1A: NOT USED - � IPS 2 : NOT USED IPS 3 : NOT USED � IPS 4 : NOT USED IPS 5 : NOT USED • � IPS 6 : NOT USED � IPS 7 : NOT USED IPS 8 : NOT USED � IPS 9 : NOT USED � January 22 , 1999 09900-8 98165 . 01 � f ' � IPS 10 : NOT USED � � _ - IPS 11 : Gypsum Wallboard Latex Enamel - Semigloss � , Semigloss ' 1st coat - 767 Primer Sealer. � � 2nd & 3rd coat - 109 Latex Semigloss, or 36168 Lo Sheen • Eggshell. � , IPS 12 : NOT USED � IPS 13 : NOT USED , IPS 14 : NOT USED � IPS 15 : Pipe Identification. � � Al1 piping within each mechanical room, fan room, , boiler room, powerhouse and other exposed areas shall � be painted in it's entirety with Advantage 900 � Acrylic/Gloss• Enamel. 1 . Natural Gas - 6539-4 Purple � ; 2 . Propane - Safety Orange � 3 . Fuel Oil - 6693-1 Tan 4 . Standpipe and Sprinkler Piping - Safety Red. 5 . Steam Condensate - 6149-5 Orange � --� 6 . Chilled Water - Safety Green 7 . Condenser Water - 6359-3 Aqua ' 8 . Hot Water Piping - 6026-3 Pink � . 9 . Domestic Cold Water - Safety Blue 10 . Domestic Hot Water - 6071-6 Dark Pink 11. Elevator Hydro Lines - 6094-5 Coral � 12 . Chemical Feed Piping - Safety Yellow ' Stenciling of all exposed and concealed piping shall be in accordance with Division 15 , Mechanical using the same � coating materials . ' END OF SECTION ti� � . � � � January 22, 1999 09900-9 98165 . 01 . I i � I , , SECTION 09952 � I � VINYL WALLCOVERING rI PART 1 GENER.AL 1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Only use materials which have Fire Hazard Classifications ' I � meeting requirements set forth below. � ' B. Only employ qualified wallcovering mechanics for this I work. C. Install test panels for full width and corner applications 1 I � of vinyl wallcovering materials in areas desi nated g by � Architect. Test panels accepted by the Architect will be i � i used as the standard of comparison for the work. I I I !, 1 . 02 COORDINATION I � � � A. Coordinate this work with other trades required to install � � � work in areas to receive wallcovering. Do not install I wallcovering until work which might cause damage to � �, wallcovering has been completed. i ; 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS � -i_, , i A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section i , 01300 . ' � I . . � B. Submit five copies of selected manufacturer' s product data � , and installation instructions for each selected type of , wall covering. � q. Submit five copies of certificate from adhesive manufacturer stating that adhesive will permit removal of , � vinyl wallcovering from gypsum drywall without damage to , � drywall paper facing. D. Submit two copies of selected manufacturer' s printed � '� instructions for maintenance of installed materials for transmittal to Owner. Include manufacturer's name, material brand name, and color and pattern designation. � 1 . 04 DELIVERY AND 5TOR.AGE � A. Deliver materials in original packaging clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality and grade of material, and fire hazard classification. � B'. Store materials in a dry, warm place in original, undamaged packaging. Do not store rolled goods on ends . � Janua 22, 1999 09952-1 98165 . 01 � � I . � C. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40° F and not less than 65° F for at least 24 hours before installi�g. � 1. 05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS , A. Comply with manufacturers recommendations concerning r environmental conditions under which wallcoverings should be installed. 1 . 06 JOB CONDITIONS � A. Do not apply materials in unclean areas, or where clust is � being generated. B. Areas to receive applications must have a reasonably � constant temperature of 60-70 degrees F. me�sured at the . floor level . PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2 . 01 MATERIALS � A. Fire Hazard Classification Required: UL Label indicating fire hazard classification determined by ASTM E84 . 1 . Flame spread: Not more than 25 . � _� 2 . Fuel contributed: Not more than 15 . � 3 . Smoke developed: Not more than 450 . B. Provide wallcoverings of colors and patterns shown on the , Finish Schedule on the drawings . 2 . 02 WALLCOVERINGS � A. See Finish Schedule for approved materials and manufacturers . � B. Class and Types : Comply with FS CCC-W-408 . 1 . Type 1 : Light duty, total weight 11 to 16 ounces/linear � yard, 54 inches wide. Prime gypsum board walls one coat white primer in conjunction with Type I wallcoverings . � 2 . Type 2 : Medium duty, total weight 19 to 27 ounces/linear yard, 54 inches wide. � r January 22 , 1999 09952-2 98165 . 01 � 1 . - 1 2 . 03 ADHESIVE ' A. Type: An adhesive manufactured expressly for use with selected wallcoverings . , 1. Mildew-resistant and non-staining to wallcovering. , 2 . Strippable type adhesive is optional for Type I vinyl � wallcovering as these walls 'are painted one coat of primer. Strippable adhesive is required for all Type II & III vinyl wallcovering. � PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3 . 0�. INSPECTION A. Before commencing work, inspect surfaces for defects which � might adversely affect � installation or appearances . Do not commence work until defects have been corrected. � B. Assure that proper environmental conditions exist befor.e work is begun and while work is in progress . 3 . 02 PREPARATION � A. Remove vinyl wallcovering from packaging and allow it to acclimatize for at least 24 hours before installation. � � B. Check materials for defects before installing. Reject damaged materials and promptly remove them from job site. iRemove switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted fixtures from surfaces where vinyl wallcovering is to be installed. � ' 3 . 03 INSTALLATION � A. Install wallcovering before equipment and casework is placed as possible. B. Install materials only on clean dry walls . � C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's rinted . , P � instructions . � ' D. Use wallcovering panels in exact order as cut from rolls . � Use rolls in consecutive order as numbered by � ' manufacturer. Fill in spaces above and below windows, above doors and similar areas in sequence from rolls . � E. Trim deeply textured patterns, or where patterns must be matched, on a flat work table. ' � ;January 22, 1999 09952-3 98165 . 01 . � , , F. Hang smooth, non-matched patterns by applying str�ps on wall, overlapping the edges and double cutting through � both thicknesses . G. Apply fabric secure, smooth, clean and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps . Eliminate air pockets and ensure full � bond to wall surface. H. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. � I. Make seams straight and plumb,. and a minimum of 6 inches away from corners . � J. Remove adhesive from surface at each seam before proceeding to next. Wipe clean. Do not use solvents . K. Replace switch and receptacle plates, and surface mounted � fixtures, and ensure that cut edges of wallcovering are completely concealed. Trim bottom of sheets 3 " from � finish floor to allow for application of rubber base. L. If vinyl wallcovering of different color changes at outside corners, provide full height vinyl cover corner- � strips, approved by Architect . M. Before final inspection, repair damaged wallcovering. � 3 . 04 CLEANING • � A. Clean wallcoverings of adhesives, dust, dirt and other ,� contaminants . B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean. � END OF SECTION � , � � � � January 22, 1999 09952-4 98165 . 01 i � � . � SECTION 10260 , BUMPERGUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS � PART 1 GENER.AL � � 1 . 01 SUBMITTALS � A. Submit items to Architect in accordance with Section 01300 . � B. Submit four copies of manufacturer' s product data, including full range of colors and finishes available, and � illustrations of accessories and hardware. C. Submit four copies of shop drawings indicating locations where corner guards will be installed and where wall � guards will be installed. �Indicate methods of anchoring, and how accessory items will be fitted in. � 1 . 02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this work with other trades required to install work in areas where wall and corner guards are to be � installed. Do not install guards until painting and vinyl wall cov�ering work has been completed in those areas . ��i_1 . 03 DELIVERY, STOR.AGE, AND PROTECTING I � A. Deliver and store items in manufacturer's original, sealed � packaging. ' B. Maintain protective coatings on guards until installation is complete. Remove protective coatings at time of final , cleanup for final construction inspection. � PART 2 PRODUCTS ; 2 . 01 Corner Guards : Construction Specialties, Decogard � Products, Inc. , Pawling Rubber Corp. , Institutional Products Corp. , Korogard by Koroseal and Balco 48" high surface mounted units, extruded aluminum retainer channel, rigid PVC guards, and top and bottom caps. Colors will be � selected by Owner. Provide the �ollowing types : � A. At square corners : C.S. , Decogard Inc. SM20, Pawling CG- � 10, Korogard G200 or Institutional Products Corp. 150-160 Series . ' � B. At corners other than 90°: Provide guards to match angle in same as 90° corners . � �January 22, 1999 10260-1 98165 . 01 ' � I ' ' I . � , , 2 . 02 Wallguards : C.S. , Decogard BG-10 , Pawling WG=35EXT, Institutional Products Corp. 1600, Korogard B100 or Balco � VB-2 surface mounted units consisting of: cover; corner pieces; connectors where required; and end caps . , Colors will be selected by Owner. Provide units in long lengths to minimize jointing. , 2 . 03 Fasteners : As re ired and as indicted on a roved sho . � PP P drawings . ' � 2 . 04 Rigid. Vinyl Covers: Meet ASTM E-84-81 A wi�h flame spread 15 or less; smoke development 450 or less, IZOD impact � test ASTM D-256-78, 25 .4 lbs/inch. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3 . 01 INSTALLING A. install rails and guards in locations indicated .on ` approved shop drawings and/or Architect' s drawings . ` B. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and � - manufacturer' s recommendations. C. Install bumper . guards and crashrails to within 1-1/2" of � adjacent door frames, F.E.C. cabinets, etc . � ' . END OF SECTION , � . � � � � � I � � � January 22, 1999 10260-2 " 98165 . 01 � � � I SECTION 10400 � INTERIOR SIGNAGE/EXTERIOR DOOR SIGNAGE � PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE � A. Manufacturer shall appoint a Project Manager to this job prior to bid date. Project Manager shall work with 8 , Architect to develop an adequate graphics system for the � Facility. Manufacturer shall submit a cost estimate of the graphics package, based on the preliminary sign � schedule, on or before bid date. � B. Manufacturer's Project Manager shall arrange a � i consultation with the Owner and or Architect to review � I �� traffic flow, decision points and informational ' requirements . The preliminary graphics system shall be presented to Owner for� his input. After final graphics � i system is approved, manufacturer shall submit final � quotation. Al1 changes to the preliminary system shall be � approved by the Architect. � C. Signage shall comply with the ADA Rules and Regulations as in Federal Register Volume 56, No. 14.4 dated July 26, I 1991 . ' � r ! 1. 02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Project Manager shall submit six copies of � final sign schedule and location drawings to the Contractor upon receipt of Owner' s approval of content. � B. Submittals to show letter size, style, and availability of matching existing sign types (if applicable) . I � 1. 0 3 WARR.ANTY A. Manufacturer shall submit one year written warranty on all � products . � PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2 . 01 � A. Manufacturer: 1. Signs shall be made according to the IM System as � manufactured by APCO Graphics, Inc. or approved equal . i � January 22, 1999 10400-1 98165 . 01 . , � B. General : 1. The IM system is a series of modular inserts and � holders . All parts shall be injection molded, high impact, fracture resistant, matte finish plastic�. Wall holders shall be •1/2 " deep, sized to accept standard � inserts . Inserts shall feature radiused corners and a molded-in self aligning reveal. Inserts are retained - within the holders by specially designed PresLock � fasteners which require a suction tool for removal and " � change. C. Finishes : � � 1. Color shall be an integral part of each component. Painted and other "applied" finishes on molded parts � , are not acceptable. Standard imprinting shall be accomplished by using a photographic screen printing - technique whereby the image forms a chemical bond with � the plaque, surface. No handcutting of artwork or letterforms is acceptable. The finish is to be matte, eggshell or nonglare. Colors as selected by Owner. D. Typography: � 1. Primary message copy shall be Helvetica Medium, upper � and lower case. Helvetica Regular, upper and lower case, shall be used for secondary copy. 9 E. Contrast: ' 1. Light characters on a dark background or - dark � characters on a light background. F. Tactile Signs : 1. Tactile signs are those which are permanent signs ' including but not exclusive of room number signs, restroom signs, department signs, office signs, fire � exit door signs, elevator signs . 2 . Where tactile signs are required, characters are to be raised 1/32" thickness above sign surface and grade 2 � braille is also to be� on the sign. 3 . Letters to .be at least 5/8" high, but no more than 2" high based on an upper case 'X' . � 4. Type style to be upper case letters only. � 5 . Symbols . • a. Where symbols are required, symbol must be � accompanied by raised and braille verbal message January 22, 1999 10400-2 98165 . 01 � � I I� � placed directly below the symbol. The border ' dimensions of the symbol are to be 6" . The symbol is not required to be tactile. � G. Symbols of Accessibility: � 1 . Areas or rooms within the facility that are required to be identified as accessible according to section 4 . 1 of � ' the ADA Rules and Regulations as in Federal Register I Volume 56, No. 144 dated July 26, 1991 shall use the � international symbol of accessibility. � , 2 . Text telephones required by Section 4. 1 . 3 of ADA Rules ' & Regulations mentioned above shall be identified by the International TDD Symbol. If a facility has a � public text telephone. Signage must be provided at all i i non-text telephones, directing persons to the location of the nearest text telephone. � 3 . Where main entrance is not� handicapped accessible, � signage is required directing persons to nearest II accessible entrance. � � , 4 . When a toilet facility is not handicapped accessible, signage is required directing persons to the nearest I � � accessible toilet facility. H. Character Proportion and Height: � --i_� ; , 1 . Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width to � height ratio between 3 : 5 and 1 :1 and a stroke width to � , height ratio between 1 : 5 and 1 : 10 using an upper case X to calculate ratios . � 2 . Letters and numbers on signs shall be sized according i � � to the viewing distance from which they are read. � Upper and lower case letters acceptable. Generally one inch of character height for 50 feet of viewing � distance. I�. Sign Types: � 1 . Type IA-1, a wall mounted directional sign with floor identification, shall be used to indicate directions at corridor intersections and/or major decision points . � The IA-1 has modular message panels and can be expanded or contracted with the number of listings required. Insert width is constant at 18" . Height of � the unit varies with the quantity of inessage panels used at a particular location. � 1 January 22 , 1999 10400-3 98165 . 01 . ' � 2 . Type IA-2, a wall mounted directional holder and insert, shall be used as an alternate to IA-1 for those � areas where minimal information is required. Insert width is 12" , height is 6" . 3 . Type IB-1, a ceiling mounted directional sign, shall be ' used to supplement the wall mounted directional system in those locations where wall space is restricted. Messages on the IB-1 can appear on one or two si�3es of ' each unit. The IB-1 is designed -to accept up �,.o two lines of inessage copy per sign face. Insert width height is 7 " . Message copy must be 3 " in height based , on capital 'X' . 4 . Type IC-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be used to display Fire Evacuation Plans . The 12 " x 12 " � insert retains 8" x 12 " paper map behind a clear acrylic cover. Evacuation routes and fire equipment I symbols are applied by facility staff with impressions � � transfer type. � 5 . Type ID-1, a wall mounted floor level identification � holder and insert, shall be located opposite elevator banks where an IA 1 does not appear. Insert size is 12" x 12 " . 6 . Type ID-2 , a wall mounted fire warning holder and � insert, shall be locatecl near the elevator button -__� panel . Insert width is 12" , height is 8" . The copy is � to be raised 1/32 " with grade 2 braille below. 7 . Type IE-1, a wall mounted identification holder and insert, shall be used to designate areas of primary � importance to the public. IE-1 features a large symbol , reinforced with message copy. Insert size is 12 " x 12 " . � � 8 . Type IF-1, a wall mounted identification holder and � insert, shall be used to designate areas of seconda rY importance to the public . This sign has small symbol � reinforced with message copy. Insert size is 8" x 8" . 9 . Type IG-1, a wall mounted identification holder and � insert, shall be used to designate Rest Rooms . Insert size is 8" x 8" . This sign has symbol with copy raised 1/32" and grade 2 braille below. � 10 . Type IK-1, a wall mounted floor identification holder and insert, shall be located inside the stairwell � adjacent to the fire door. Insert size is 6" x 6" . The copy is raised 1/32" with braille below. i January 22, 1999 10400-4 98165 . 01 � � ' i � � 11 . Type IL-1, a fire exit holder and insert, shall be � mounted on the corridor side of each exit door. Red insert standard 8" x 8" , integrally colored white acrylic letters are chemically bonded to the insert. ' The copy is raised 1/32" with braille below. � ' 12 . Type IM-1 a wall mounted room identification holder and ' insert, shall be used to designate individual rooms . � This sign has message copy only. Insert size is 8" x � �i 8" . The copy is to be raised 1/32 " with grade 2 braille below. ' 13 . Type IN-1, a wall mounted informational holder and � insert, shall be used when the "in use" feature is � required to discourage interruptions of those using i the room. Insert size is 8" x 8" . I 14 . Type IO-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be � used to number patient rooms . The IO-1 has two windows � that accept 15/16" x 8" message strips . The IO-1 _is specially molded to allow strips to be inserted and , ' removed without removing the insert from the holder. i Insert size is 8" x 8" . The copy is to be raised j 1/32 " with grade 2 braille below. � 15 . Type IP-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be - used to number rooms within a department. Insert size is 6" x 6" . The co,py is to be raised 1/32 " with grade � �-� ; 2 braille below. i' ' 16 . Type IQ-1, a wall mounted holder and insert, shall be � used in stairs serving four or more stories, in place , e of sign IK-1 . Sign shall be within stair well, at � each landing. The sign shall indicate the floor level, i the terminus at the top and bottom of the stair ', � enclosure and the identification of the stair. The ' sign shall also state the floor level of and direction ' to, exit discharge. Sign shall be mounted to be � � visible with door open or closed. See detail on i signage schedule. � � 17 . Type IR-1, wall mounted holder and insert shall be used on corridor side of stairways or other main doorways that do not provide building exit in case of emergency. Sign shall have copy "No Exit" where "No" is 2" high � and "Exit" is 1" high. 18 . Type IZ-1, wall mounted dimensional lettering, specify � height and depth of characters . I � � � January 22, 1999 10400-5 98165 . 01 ' � PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS � 1 . Wall mounted signs shall be installed plumb and 1eve1 . The center point of the signs shall be 60" above the ' finished floor. Signs are to be mounted or_ wall adjacent to latch side of door, including double leaf of doors . Sign shall be placed on nearest adjacent wall. Type IA signs are generally wall mounted at , corridor intersections, 6" from the edge of the wall or in elevator lobbies . Mounting location for such shall be so that a person may approach within 3 " of signage ' without encountering rotrudin ob 'ects or standin P g J g within the swing of a door. Type IC signs are located in elevator lobbies and where 'required. Vinyl foam � tape is standard as the method of attachment to smooth nonporous surfaces . Silicone adhesive is used with vinyl foam tape on textured or irregular surfaces . � 2 . Type IB signs are attached to the ceiling grid tivith a projecting fixture. A special bracket is built into the module, which slides onto an aluminum trac]ti that � mechanically fastens to the ceiling T-Bar grid. Special end caps lock the module in place. Ceiling height should range from 7 ' 6" to 9 ' 0" for Type IB to be , most effective. � END OF SECTION ' � � � � � � _ � , ' January 22 , 1999 10400-6 98165 . 01 , ' � �� I � � � ' � SECTION 12300 , � i HOSPITAL CASEWORK ', I , I � PART 1 GENERAT, 1 . 0�1 SCOPE OF WORK ' � A. Provide all plastic laminate casework and accessory items � , as specified herein. Refer to plans for specific details ; and requirements . � �', I � B. General Conditions : The General Conditions, Supplementary � �, General Conditions, Special Conditions and General , Requirements apply to all work in this Division. Refer to � , other Sections, Divisions, and Schedules for work in connection with the Section. � � 1. 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEGJHERE � A. General millwork and custom cabinetry unless specified � � herein or so noted on plans as included within this i I section. � I _ ' B. Rubber, vinyl or other finished toe base. I C. Locks master keyed to room doors and other special locks . � I_� D. Blocking in walls . � � , E. Sinks, fittings, traps, stops, tail pieces, vacuum breakers and other fixtures, electrical and mechanical runs and connections . � Fi. Service Connections to Equipment: Final setting of non- � integral trim and utility connections to equipment under this section (including waste) are provided under other � relevant Sections of the Project Specifications, , governing the utility. � 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS AI. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 . � B. Submit four copies of Shop Drawings for approval. Show materials, dimensions, sink locations, fittings and other accessories . Show relation of material furnished under � this section with connecting or related work of other suppliers and trades . � j 2300-1 165 . 01 � January 22, 1999 1 98 ( � ' � C. Samples of colors shall be submitted upon award of contract for selection and coordination with other � suppliers . Architect may request and retain samples and catalog cuts as required for accessory and special items . 1 . 04 QUALIFICATIONS ' A. Drawings and specifications are based upon casework as manufactured by T.M. I . Systems Design Corporation, 50 � South Third Avenue West, Dickenson, ND. Construction and design shall be trimline series with three millimeter edges . Equal series by LSI Corporation of America, Inc . , ' 2100 Xenium Lane, Minneapolis, MN 55441 will be accepted provided they meet specifications . B. Casework of other nationally recognized casework � manufacturers may be considered for approval provided a written request is received ten (10) days prior to opening of bids . Minimum requirements that MUST be met in order � to be considered for approval are: 1 . Al1 backs must be 3/8" thick and must be fully let in � on all four sides of cabinet. The back must be sealed with hot melt glue. Stapled backs will not be accepted. 2 . Cabinet sides ma not extend to floor. Cabinet ba ' Y se shall be exterior grade plywood. 3 . All edges of doors and drawer fronts shall be 3 ' millimeter, color to match the adjacent plastic laminate color, with both edges and all 4 corners radiused to 1/8" . Edges shall be polished to prevent ' scuff marks . Self edge or "T" mold will not be acceptable. 4 . All cabinets to be fastened to the wall through a 1" ' thick installation rail on back of cabinet . 5 . All cabinets must have a minimum 3/4" thick core before , laminate. Finished thickness shall be not less than 13/16" . ', 6 . Provide stretchers between all drawers in drawer � cabinets . 7 . Tops and bottoms of all wall cabinets shall be 3/4" ' minimum thick. � . ' � January 22 , 1999 12300-2 98165 . 01 � ' ' 8 . Door/Drawer Spreaders : Provide minimum 3/4" X 6" X full � width putty finished cabinet body spreaders immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions and close off ' reveal . Front edge to be 1 mm f lat edge PVC to match door and drawer edge. 9 . All exposed interior of open cabinets or behind glass , doors shall be decorative laminate in same color and finish as cabinet exteriors . 10 . All cabinet elevations shall have a nominal 1" scribe ' where elevation abuts wall. On wall to wall elevations, center the cabi.nets and put equal scribes on both ends . r 11. Countertop end splashes shall be installed at a 11 conditions where cabinet abuts wall . , 12 . Al1 countertops shall be scribed to the wall be means of a 1/2 " scribe strip at the top of the backsplash. , 13 . After countertops and cabinets are properly scribed to wall, all joints at tops and cabinets will be caulked with polyseam seal clear adhesive caulk or equal. ' Caulking is a part of this section. C. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of , _ at least 10 years experience and installations for similar type of project. Manufacturers shall also show evidence of financial stability, plant facilities, catalogs and � specifications . Full-sized samples, catalogs and specifications, shall be submitted with written request for approval. Samples may be impounded by Owner and retained until completion of job for verification and ' compliance� of specifications . D. Architect/Owners opinion and decision shall be final in , the evaluation of manufacturers products for approval to bid, or award of contract. ' 1 . 05 SCHEDULING � A. Schedule delivery only when casework can be promptly installed. , B. Do not install casework until wall and floor finishes have been completed. ' ' , ' January 22, 1999 12300-3 98165 . 01 I � ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS � A. Laminated Plastics/Finishes : 1 . High pressure plastic laminate, vertical . 032 �rade, � for exposed surfaces to meet NEMA Standards . 2 . Color Selection Available (5ee Finish Schedule) : ' � 3 . Plastic Laminate Balancing Sheet (Back of Door or ' Drawer) : Putty coloring or manufacturers standard heavy gauge plastic laminate to provide balanced construction. Backing sheet shall be textured. ' 4 . Counter Top High Pressure Plastic Laminate: ' a. High pressure plastic laminate, . 050 thicicness . � Color as per finish schedule. _ b. Heavy gauge neutral colored backing sheet for . � balanced construction (unsupported countertop over 5 ' -0" only) . 5 . Polyester Laminate (Interior Liner) : , � a. Thermosetting acid resistant polyester resin ' -_� impregnated laminate, permanently bonded to ' substrate. b. Polyester laminate shall be 9 to 11 mills in thickness 62� resin content, color fast and putty � in color. c . Putty colored or manufacturers standard polyester , laminate for semi-exposed cabinet interiors behind doors and drawers . d. Must meet : NEMA LQ1-1977, & NEMA LD3-1980 . , B. High performance particle Board Core: 1 . Particle board shall be of 47 lb. density, and balanced , construction with moisture content not to exceed 8� . All particle boards shall meet or excee� the ' requirements for its type and classification under Commercial Standard CS-236-66 Federal Specification LL- B-800A, and ASTM-D-1037-87 . � C. Hardboard: Hardboard shall meet or exceed Commercial � Standards, CS-125 and Federal Specification LLL-B-00810 . Tempered Hardboard 1/4" thick - smooth both sides . ' January 22, 1999 12300-4 98165 . 01 i � � ' , D. Edging: , 1 . Solid, high impact, purified, color thru, acid resistant, 3 mm thick PVC edging machine applied for ' drawer fronts and � doors . Color to match adjacent � plastic laminate color. 2 . Flat edge design for cabinet body (1 mm PVC) . � I E. Hardware: � i , �, 1 . Hinges : , a. Heavy duty, five knuckle 2-3/4 inch institutional � type hinge. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full , wra around t e of tem ered steel . 093 inch thick. P YP P i each hinge to have minimum nine screws, #7, 5/8 1 inch FHMS to assure positive door attachment. � b. One pair per door to 48 inch height. One and one- , half pair over 48 inches in height. Hinge to accommodate 13/16 inch thick laminated door, and � allow 270 degree swing. � � c . Finish to be LH-301 Dull Chrome. I 2 . Pulls : ' � The following options are available: i ' a. Wire Pulls - Chrome. � 3 . Sliding Door Hardware: • � a. Sliding glass doors 1/4 inch thick: Stylmark �, #910007 double track rolling door assembly. � ' b. Sliding glass doors 3/4 inch thick Stile and Rail , Doors; Sterling No. 602 top mounted track with dual roller hangers . Vertical adjustment for accurate ' alignment. 4 . Drawer Slides : ' a. Standard Drawers : LSI Lab Series Slide, Epoxy Powder coated to match drawer body color, with positive in- stop, out-stop and out-keeper to � maintain drawer in 80� open position. Captive nylon rollers, both front and rear. Minimum 100 lb. load rating, full extension. Provide adjuster , to regulate body slide sway. b. Shallow Drawers : Grant No. 328, full extension. � January 22 , 1999 12300-5 98165 . 01 ' , c . File Drawers : Grant No. 329 , full extension. I d. File Drawer Followers : Knap & Vogt No. 476 follower ' and track assembly. 5 . Catches � a. LH-340 5 lb. magnetic catch for base and wall cabinets . Provide two 7 lb. pull at each tall � cabinet door. b. LH-345 roller catch for mobile cabinets . � 6 . Adjustable shelf clips : To have locking device to prevent shelf slide-off and to be of such design as to support a tested load of minimum 150 lbs . each without , failure, referenced 1. 04 .D. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush, without shelf system per_nanent ' � projection. � 7 . Wardrobe Rod: To be 1/16 inch chrome steel rod - LH- 362 , supported by #734 flange chrome. I . � 8 . Coat Hooks . a. Single coat hooks - Ives No. 581 Satin Aluminum, or ABS plastic, putty colored. � ' ' _, b. Double Coat Hooks - Ives No. 405 Satin Aluminum, or ' ABS plastic, putty colored. 9 . Locks : Shall be disc tumbler lock keyed alike and ' master keyed. Dull chrome finish. , a. Hinged doors and drawers National Lock No. 68-504 . b. Sliding doors, 13/16 inch thick, National Lock No. ' 68-057 . c. 1/4 inch sliding panel doors, K & V #963 . , _, _ F. Detailed Requirements for Cabinet Construction: 1. Sub-Base: ' a. Cabinet Sub-Base: To be separate and continuous (no � cabinet body sides-to-floor) , waterproof plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder-type construction, of front, bac}; and ' intermediates, to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach. ' January 22 , 1999 12300-6 98165 . 01 , 1I , I . I ' i 2 . Cabinet Top and Bottom - Wall and Base: � a. Base Cabinet bottoms to be putty colored polyester� laminated particle board interior side, 3/4 inch ' thick with phenolic neutral colored backer sheet on i concealed side. , b. Solid sub-top shall be furnished for all lower base , �� cabinets to be phenolic overlay neutral color. c . Exterior exposed wall cabinet bottoms shall be ' � putty colored polyester laminate. Assembly devices shall be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets . � 1 d. Exposed body edges shall be flat edge (1 mm) . i I e. If wall. cabinet is over 54" A.F.F. the cabinet .� bottom is to match the face color. ' �I 3 . Cabinet Ends , a. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board interior side, 3/4 inch thick with phenolic neutral � colored backer sheet on concealed side. Library � _ il stack end panels 1 inch thick. Holes drilled for 'I adjustable shelves 1-1/4 inches on center. b. Exposed edges shall be matching flat edge. � c . Exposed exterior cabinet ends �o be laminated with plastic laminate. a4 . Fixed and Adjustable Shelves : i a. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board � two sides . Leading exposed edge of shelves to be edged with Flat Edge PVC, putty in color. � b. Thickness : 3/4 inch standard shelving to 36 inches � wide. one inch shelving 36 inch wide and over. � ' c . Exposed adjustable shelves shall have a 1mm PVC edge on three edges with a 3mm PVC edging on the front edge. A5 . Cabinet Backs : a. Standard cabinet back to be 3/8 inch thick, for use a on all cabinets with or without doors . Rear, unexposed, side of back to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between back and � sides/top/bottom for sealing against moisture and � , vermin, and further contribute to case rigidity. 8 January 22, 1999 12300-7 98165 . 01 I ' ' b. Exposed exterior backs shall be 3/4 inch particle board faced with high pressure plastic laminate. ' 6 . Doors and Drawer Fronts : a. Plastic laminated doors and drawer fronts to be 13/16 inch thick for all hinged and sliding doors . ' Core material to be 3/4 inch thick, 45 lb. density particle board bonded on exterior with high , � pressure laminate and with putty colored or manufacturers standard heavy gauge balance sheet on interior face. ' b. Exposed edges shall be as specified in Section 1. 04 . c . Stile and Rail doors to be 13/16 inch thick plastic , laminate door with 1/4 inch plate glass . Available hinged or sliding. All exposed edges to be trimmed ' and glazed with extruded vinyl glazing bead. d. Sliding glass doors to be 1/4 inch thick plate ' glass with ground and polished edges . fitted with etched and anodized aluminum shoes and nylon rollers . 7 . Drawers : ' _� a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer ' body component sub-front. b. Sides and back of drawers to be 1/2 inch thick putty colored polyester laminated fiberboard, sub- , front same, except 5/8 inch thick. c . Exposed top edge to be Flat Edge PVC, color per ' finish schedule. d. Drawer sides to be dadoed to receive front and � back, machine squared and held under pressure while glued and pinned together. e. Drawer bottom shall be putty color polyester � laminate, 1/4 inch thick, housed and glued into front sides and back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous hot melt glue at joints between ' bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms as required with intermediated spreaders . � f . Pa er stora e drawers fitted with hood at back. P g � � h g. All drawers shall ave roller guides as specified under Paragraph 2 . 01 .E.4 . ' January 22, 1999 12300-8 98165 . 01 ' � 1 � 8 . Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: One of the following , as indicated by cabinet number: a. Tempered hardboard 1/4 inch thick, smooth both ' faces . Secured in cabinet with molded plastic , clips . � � b. Putty colored polyester laminated particle board �� 1 , 1/2 inch thickness . Secured in cabinet with molded 'i plastic clips . Edges to be PVC, color to match � cabinet. • ' G. Countertops � ' 1 . High pressure plastic laminate bonded to particle board � core. Thickness as shown on plans and specifications. i Underside to be properly balanced with heavy gauge backing sheet. Edges shall be high pressure plastic 1 laminate to match horizontal surface color. Furnish countertops in design as shown on drawings . Provide , continuous tops for counter type cabinets fixed in a ' i � line. � H. Workmanship: � a , 1 . Al1 exposed exterior cabinet surfaces shall be 1/32" � � � high pressure plastic laminate, U.S. according to � Finish Schedule, minimum 48 colors/wood grains. � �i_., Laminate surface/backer to core under controlled I, iconditions, by approved and regulated laminating � methods to assure a premium lamination. Natural � , setting adhesives that cure thru chemical reaction are � required. Methods requiring heat are not allowed; ' "contact" methods of laminating are not allowed. � � 2 . Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium quality grade joinery construction �I utilizing automatic machinery to insure consistent ai sizing of modular components . 3 . End panels shall be doweled to receive bottom and top. � , Back shall be fully housed into cabinet sides, top and bottom to insure rigidity and a fully closed cabinet. - 4 . Drawer bottom shall be fully housed into sides, back � � and sub-front. Sides of drawer to be fully dadoed to receive drawer back, locked in fully to sub-front, fastened with glue and mechanical fasteners . 8 5 . All cases shall be square, plumb and true. f � 6 . Provide removable back panels and closure panels for a � plumbing access where shown on drawings . � - January 22 , 1999 12300 9 98165 . 01 ' ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 01 COORDINATION ' � A. Coordinate work of this section with related work of other sections as necessary to obtain proper installation of all ' items . B. Verify site dimensions of � cabinet locations in building , prior to fabrication. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION � ' A. Storage and Protection: casework shall be protected in transit . Store under cover in a ventilated building not � exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes . Do , not store or install in building until concrete, masonry, and plaster work is dry. B. Workmen: Install casework under the supervision of the � manufacturer' s representative with factory t^ained mechanics authorized by manufacturer. ' C. Workmanship 1 . Erect casework straight, level and plumb and securely , anchored in place. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent work. Cut and fit work around pipes, ducts, etc . ' 2 . Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts ' to operate properly. 3 . Leave surface clean and free from defects at time of , ' final acceptance. D. Guarantee: Al1 materials to be guaranteed for period of ' one year from manufacturer's defects and workmanship. E. Clean up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, , etc . , and leave spaces clean and all casework ready for Owner' s use. � . END OF SECTION ' ' ' January 22 , 1999 . 12300-10 98165 . 01 ' i � � SECTION 13090 ' , RADIATION PROTECTION ' PARIT 1 GENER.AL � I 1. 0�1 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE ' A. Comply with requirements of the National Council on ! Radiation Protection and Measurements Report No. 49 . �� 1 I I' 1 . 02 TESTING ' A. After X-ray equipment has been installed and placed in operation, have radiation shielding tested by a health physicist who is certified by a nationally recognized jagency. Owner ' will pay for testing. Decision of � ' j acceptability of shielding by the health physicist shall � be binding. � � � I , I B. Method of Testing: In accordance with requirements of National Bureau of Standards Handbook H-76 "Medical X-Ray ' , Protection up to Three Million Volts" . ' C. Repair or replace defective work including other affected � work. Do any additional testing required for the health I physicist' s satisfaction. Repair, replacement and , __9 retesting shall be at Contractor' s expense. � i 1 . 03 COORDINATION - ' A. Coordinate with other trades involved in this work. ` � 1 . Deliver lead-lined gypsum board and associated items to ' ! � wallboard trade so as to cause no delay in this work. � 2 . Deliver sheet lead to hardware installer to expedite ' this work. I 3 . Install view window, and cassette film loading cabinet , in close coordination with wallboard trade. 4 . Install sheet lead at electrical outlets, switch boxes, utility recesses, and other penetrations of lead-lined � walls in close coordination with mechanical and electrical trades . ' 1 . i4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit items in accordance with Section 01300 . 1 i � ' January 22, 1999 13090-1 98165 . 01 , ' _ ' B. Submit four copies of Manufacturer's product data illustrating equipment items and describing radiation protection items . Submit four copies of Manufacturer' s ' printed instructions for installing view windows and film loading cabinet. 1,. 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING - I A. Do not deliver items to project site until they can be ' installed promptly. B. Deliver items in original, resealed containers and leave protective packaging in place until items can be ' installed. Dispose of damaged items that cannot be properly repaired for installation. C. Handle materials carefully. , D. Strictly follow Manufacturer' s instructions for storing. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER � A. A&L Shielding, Inc . Rome, GA, (800) 329-5323 , or approved , equal . I __ B. Ray-Bar Engineering Corp. , Azusa, CA, (818) 969-1818 . ' C. Radiation Protection Products, Colle e Grove TN 800 ' g , , � ) 328-3361) 2 . 02 MATERIALS , A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 5/8" thick x 4 ' -0" wide x h�ight � indicated, laminated with a single sheet of pure virgin lead of thickness indicated. Gypsum board shall be Firecode C (Type X) only. , B. Sheet Lead. Unpierced, pure virgin lead, varying not more , than 3� over entire surface. 1. Lead strips : 2" wide x height and thickness indicated ' � for lead-lined gypsum board. 2 . Shields : 1/16" thick x dimensions required for ' shielding electrical outlets, switch boxes, utility recesses, and other penetrations of lead-lined walls . , 3 . Hardware shields : 1/16" thick x dimensions required for shield door hardware. ' January 22, 1999 13090-2 98165 . 01 ' � i ' 1 � ' C. Lead Glass Viewing Window: (Provide test results to ' verify protective requirements) . Telescopic Type, Model , 67516 or approved equal . I1 . Match lead lining of frame to that of surrounding wall � ' lead. Frame for lead glass view window shall be aluminum telescopic type. (Not lead/steel) . � 'I , ! 2 . Leaded glass, approximately 1/4" thick. Install � multiple panes to provide shielding equal to lead of surrounding wall- lead. Neutral gray enamel finish with stainless steel rim. ' i � PA i T 3 EXECUTION , i � 3 . 01 INSTALLING I , j A. Install viewing window and film loading cabinet strictly � � in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions . , i B. Install sheet lead shields to cover wall penetrations and � i extend out at least 2 " in all directions . Attach lead � securely to retain it in place but do not penetrate lead I with fasteners . I 1 � ,C. Control windows shall be installed with center at 5' -3 " above finish floor. The code requires a minimum of 18 , -__� � inches from edge of glass to end of control wall . � END OF SECTION I 1 ; � � , � I 1 i � , ' � , � 1 � i , January 22 , 1999 13090-3 98165 . 01 i . _ ' , , , � � , � I ; i � SECTiON 1541 Q ' � I � I i � GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS ' i � l. I PART - 1 GENER:AL � i � � 1.Q1 WORK INCLUDED � � A. All labor, materials, tools and services for a complete installation of , equipment and systems contained in contract dacuments. ' B. Principal features of work included are: , ; 1. Heating, ventilating, air-conditioning systems, contrals and ; insulation of inechanical system ductwork and equipment. ' � 2. Modifications and additions ta the existing heating, ventilating, � air-conditioning systems, controls and ductwork systems. � � ' 3. Firestopping ail mechanical, plumbing and fire protection system ; penetrations through fire and/or smoke rated assemblies. � ; 4. Modifications to and calibration of the existing control system. � � � � 5. Furnish anchar bolts, sieeves, supparts and similar items ta be � i built inta concrete and masonty. � � � 6. Preparation and submittal of inechanical nnaintenance manuals, � � shop drawings and product data. � � ; I 7. Sealing (Hardcasting) of existing ductwork joints where indicated � � on the drawings. i � � � 8. Demoiition of e�sting piping, ducts and associated equipment � which will not be reused. , � 1.02 RELATED WORK � I A. Section OlOhS: �uttzng and patching. � � j B. Section 013Q0: Submittals. � � C. Sectian 01300: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. ( � iD. Section 01600: Storage and Pratection. � I E. Section 02050: Demolition, � � . � i . F. Section 47270: Firestopping. � I G. Section 0'7600: Flashing a,nd Sheet Metal. (Flashing far mechaniGal � � � items penetrating walls and roof.} � � i � ! H. Section 099Q4: Painting. � � � lanuary 22, 1999 15010-1 98165.01 I � ' 1 I. Section 16923: Individually Mounted Starters. J. Division 16: Power wiring for Division 15 equipment including ' installing and connecting starters to be furnished under Division 16. K. Division 16: All control wiring above 50-volts and associated conduit � for Division 15 equipment to be furnished under Division 16. 1.03 DEMOLITION � , A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the existing condition of all equipment affected by this project and the exact location af material�to be removed (or relocated) before demolition work is started. , � Report any inconsistencies with the Contract Documents immediately to the architect. B. Demolition work sha11 be phased to accomplish replacement witl:. ' ' minimum downtime. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating shut-downs or service interruptions with the Owner's representative. � C. Schedule / phase demolition work in advance with the Owner's representative. Coordination with facility operating hours and access to ' areas affected by this project shall be the Contractor's responsibility. D. Remove existing ductwork, diffusers and grilles which are not sh��wn on the drawings to remain or to be reused. ' E. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing, storing and reinstalling any equipment noted as existing to be relocated. The ' Contractor shall repair or replace any such equipment that is damaged or lost throughout the duration of this project without additional cost to the Owner. ' F. All equipment to be demolished is the property of the Owner and shall be turned over to the Owner's representative by the Contractor. t�.t the ' discretion of the Owner's representative, any or all of such equipment may be refused and released to the Contractor for disposal. 1.04 ITEMS FURNISHED FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER TRADES � A. Electrical control components including but not limited to controllers, relays, thermostats, etc. ' B. Refer to Section 01020 for additional information. 1.05 PHASING ' A. Provide temporary connections of ductwork where required to maintain ventilation and temperature control in areas adjacent to construction. B. Sensitive areas must be maintained under positive pressure and soiled ' areas under a negative pressure at all times. ' January 22, 1999 15010-2 98165.01 ' i � i � � i I � I I � C. Construction areas must be maintained under negative pressure at all ' � � times. Provide temporary exhaust fans and ducting as necessary to � � maintain proper pressure relationships. ' ; 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS I � A. Submittal of bid implies: j ' l. Bidder has visited job site. ' � � 2. Bidder is familiar with site conditions. , � � 3. Bidder has read applicable paragraphs of the specifications and j will be bound by their conditions. ' ; 1.07 LOCAL CONDITIONS A. Conform with local conditions. ' � B: Coordinate with local utilities on size of utility services. 1.08 INTENT I A. The contract documents (drawings, plans and specifications) describe the � ' mechanical work of this proj ect. ; ; B. Any item mentioned in one part is binding as though mentioned in both. � � ! C. The contract documents form a guide for a complete mechanical � installation. 1 ; i D. Furnish all items which are reasonably necessary for a complete system, ' but which are not specifically mentioned, such as duct hangers or ' ; iransitions, piping offsets, drains, etc. , E. In areas of renovation, survey the site and be informed of existing ; conditions in particular above ceilings which will require offsetting , � and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. ; F. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical only. � G. Coordinate exact locations of ducts, pipes and equipment with the work ; � of other trades. ' j ' H. Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in location of i i mechanical equipment and appurtenances. � 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' ; A. Comply with applicable local, state and federal codes. � � B. Comply with applicable requirements of recognized industry associations ' ' ; which publish standards for the various trades. ' � C. Employ only qualified journeymen for this work. , , � D. In areas of renovation, installation of new ductwork and equipment will � � require offsetting, raising and in some instances relocation of existing � � . January 22, 1999 15010-3 98165.01 I ' � piping, ductwork and conduit. Survey the site and be informed af existing conditions in particular above ceilings which will requir�� a offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and include the cost of this work. E. In areas of renovation, installation of new ductwork and equipment will e require removal of the existing ceiling and ceiling grid. Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which will require ceiling removal. � F. Additional installation costs associated with substituted equipment requiring additional work on the part of this contractor or other p subcontractors to satisfy the manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. G. Supervise all work by competent mechanic specifically qualified in his � discipline. , 1.10 FEES AND PERMITS � A. Secure and pay for permits, licenses and inspections required for work under this division, including water and sewage tap. � B. Give notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to work. � 1.11 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of the ' products required for firestopping. B. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for firestopping. ' C. All penetration methods shall be tested and listed in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory. ' D. Penetrations and openings for all mechanical, plumbing and fire protection services in fire and/or fire/smoke rated assemblies shall be ' firestopped with tested firestopping design assemblies. These penetrations mclude but are not lunrted to the following: 1. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through aboti�e � grade floor slabs. ', 2. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through rated walls and artitions. P ' 3. Ductwork, piping, conduit and control tubing through vertical shafts such as pipe chases, duct chases, stairwells, elevator shafts ' and utility chutes. � January 22, 1999 _ 15010-4 98165.01 ' � � i � . I � 4. Voids around pipes, sieeves, ducts, conduits, cable trays, cables � ; � and wires penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated � � partitians, fire walls and smoke walls. � � � E. Refer to Section 07200 far add'ztional information and requirements for i ' firestopping. � ' � ; 1.12 CODES ASTD ST��NDARDS � � � A. Mechanical installatian to be in accordance with applicable local, state � and fedexal codes having jurisdiction. � I � B. Codes considered applicable to this project include but are nat be j limited to: � � 1. SBC: 1997 Standard Building Code. I � 2. SMC: 1997 Standard Mechanical Cade. � � 3. SPC: 1944 Standard Plumbing Cade, 'r ; 4. State of Florida Energy Code. , ` 5. Florida AHCA requirements. , i ; � 6. NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ven#iiation Systems. � ; i � 7. NFPA 101 - I994: Life Safety Code. ; � 8. ANSI Handicapped Code A117.1 � , 9. ADA: .Americans with Disabilities Act i ' 20. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Associations, Inc. � i � � i 1 l. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. � i � 12. ASHRAE: A.r�erican Society Of Heating Refrigeration and Air � ' ' Canditianing Engineers. 13. ASME: American Society af Mechanical Engineers. ' 14. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. , � 15. NEMA: Natianal Electrical Manufacturexs' Association. � � , I 16. NFPA: Natianal Fire Protection Association. I � 17. SI��ACNA: Sheet Metal Construction far Ventilating and Air-- � j Conditianing Systems i i18. UL: Underwriters' Labaratories, Ine. � � C. Install aII work in strict conformity with applicable cades. ! � L}. Submit andlor fzie with proper authorities necessary contract documents � ' ' as required by governing authorities. , ', ' � i January 22, 1999 15010-5 98165.01 � � E. a Other than the signed and sealed Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for any Professional Engineer's signature and seal required by authorities having jurisdiction. �' 1.13 COORDINATION A. Visit site and be informed of conditions under which work must be � performed. B. In areas of renovation, installation of new ductwork and equiprraent as � well as higher ceiling heights will require offsetting, raising and in some instances relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit. Survey � the site and be informed of existing conditions in particular abo��e ceilings which will require offsetting and/or relocation of existu�g piping, ductwork and conduit and include the cost of this work. C. In certain areas where higher ceilirigs are being installed, existing � I conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will require offsetting, raisirig or relocation to accommodate the reno�ation. � • Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which require offsetting andlor relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and include this work. � D. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform a11 � work involved. E. Carefully examine drawings and specifications to be thoroughly familiar � with items which require plumbing or HVAC connections and coordination. F. Notify other trades of any deviations or special conditions necessary for ' installation of work. G. Resolve interferences between work of other trades prior to installation. � H. Advise other trades to leave proper chases and openings. Place outlets, anchors, sleeves and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of masonry work. �, I. In areas of renovation, installation of new ductwork and equipment will require removal of the existing ceiling and ceiling grid. Survey tl:e site � and be informed of existing conditions which will require ceiling removal. Include the cost of the ceiling work or coordinate its rernoval with the General Contractor. � � J. Additional installation costs associated with substituted equipment ' requiring additional work on the part of this contractor or other subcontractors to satis the manufacturer's installation re uirements fY q � shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. K. Coordinate all necessary power connections as recommended by t'Ze � I manufacturers of installed equipment with Division 16 tradesmen. January 22, 1999 15010-6 98165.01 � i � ' r � I i I i � � I � ' � I � � L. Coordinate with Division 16 tradesmen for proper sizing of circuit �. I breakers, fuses, safety switches, conduit and wiring for all Division 15 � equipment prior to rough-in or bid. i ' , M. Should this coordination be neglected, any cutting and/or patching � ' required to be done at contractor's expense. � � 1.14 SUBMITTALS � � A. Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements. � ; i B. Submit for approval seven copies of complete brochures and shop drawings of materials, fixtures and equipment, proposed, giving names ; of manufacturers, trade names and specific catalog numbers. � I C. Submit all brochures with the possible exception of temperature controls � at one time, bound in a single 3-ring binder or side-stitched laminated � cover with the Project name, General Contractor and subcontractor � � identified on the cover and a table of contents. ; D. Submittals transmitted without the manufacturers' certification letter will � ; ; be returned unchecked. I � E. Include a cover sheet for each section with section identification , � number, Contractors' approval stamp and sufficient space for Engineers' ' � stamp and comments. , I . _ � � F. Identify or LIST any and ALL EXCEPTIONS taken with the , � ; specifications and drawings in the submittal manual. � G. Brochures: j 1. Submit complete descriptions, illustrations, specification data, ��, � ' etc., of materials and e ui ment ro osed. ; q P P P 1 I i 2. Clearly indicate proposed items when other items are shown on same sheet. 3. Submit samples on request and/or set up for inspection and , approval. Samples will be returned. � ; 4. Submit performance curves for all fans, air handling units and � i i pumps. �,' H. Specifically submit information and brochures on the following: ' I 1. All HVAC equipment. i 2. Vibration isolation. � I ' . , i 3. Materials and installation details for all firestopping. ' 4. Duct insulation including list of proposed thicknesses for each � ; service, flame spread and smoke development ratings for all � materials including adhesives and sealers. I � i January 22, 1999 15010-7 98165.01 � i � , � 5. Low Pressure Duct: Sheet metal gauges, method of fabrication and longitudinal seam constxuction and joint sealant (Hardcast). � 6. Sheet metal accessories including diffusers, registers, grilles, louvers, vents, fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers witl� sleeve gauges indicated. � 7. Temperature controls including brochures on all components. 8. Qualifications of Test and Balance Firm including references and � sample report forms. I. Shop/Coordination Drawings: '� 1. Submit specific shop/coordination drawings for major materials where called for or when requested by Engineer and for dhe � following: a. Automatic temperature control systems. , b. Interlock and control wiring. �I' c. Complete dimensioned shop drawings for location of all � sleeves, anchors, pads, chases and other openings �equired for mstallation of the mecharucal systems in the building. d. Owner furnished equipment rough-in. � 2. Submit brochures and shop drawings in time to allow three . weeks from date of receipt in Engineer's office before final � approval is required to meet construction schedule. 3. Include Contractor's stamp of approval on all submittals evidencing he has examined and checked same and inforr�ation � contained therein is in accordance with contract requirements, with any deviations clearly marked. - 4. Do not construe approval of shop drawings as permitting depart- ' ure from contractual documents. 5. Additional installation costs associated with substituted ' equipment requiring additional work on the part of this contractor or other subcontractors to satisfy manufacturer's � installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. 6. Submit above mentioned brochures and shop drawings and � receive approval before any materials are installed. 1.15 AGENCY SUBMITTALS: A copy of the final water and air balancing report � shall be available for review by the Florida's AHCA representatives at the final inspection. � � Janu 22 1999 15010-8 98165.01 �'Y � � � __ ; ,' � ( I I ,� I ; I � , 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS � ' I A. Prior to final acceptance of project, furnish to Owner required number i ' of bound manuals of instructions for operation and maintenance of � mechanical equipment and systems furnished under this division. B. Furnish data in a 3-ring, hard-cover type binder. , ' C. As a minimum include the following product data: � � 1. Equipment performance data. ' , 2. Fan curves. � ' 3. Operating and maintenance instructions. � ' 4. Spare parts list. ' S. Copies of approved submittal data. , ! 6. Equipment warranties. i 7. Testing and balance report. � ; D. Clearly indicate items furnished on this project. � � E. Furnish a list indicating names and addresses of nearest supply house � ' carrying recommended spare parts for equipment furiushed and name of � � installation subcontractor. - ' i F. Written description of complete mechanical systems operation. ' ' I � G. Supervise initial operation of systems and equipment and verbally ; , instruct Owner in such operation in addition to manuals mentioned � ; � above. � ' H. Obtain letter from Owner stating manuals and instructions as mentioned , i , above have been received. Furnish a copy of this letter for Architects's files. � 1.17 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. � � B. Other materials and equipment to be covered or otherwise protected ' � � against damage from water, dirt, chemical or mechanical injury. This ! � includes during on-site storage, after installation and until fmal � acceptance. 1 C. Store items in a clean, dry place and rotect from dama e. i p g ' D. Damaged painted surfaces of equipment to be touched up to match �, ! � original paint. ' � E. Any materials shown on the contract documents as e�cisting to be ' � ; relocated are the property of the owner. The contractor shall be � responsible for removal, storage and reinstallation of these materials for � � ' I � January 22, 1999 15010-9• 98165.01 � � ,1 1 the duration of the project. Any of these materials suffering damage or loss while under the responsibiliiy of the contractor shall be repaired or � replaced without additional cost to the owner. ' 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section 01720 for requirements for record drawings. , � B. Keep a record set of blue line prints at job site exclusively for recording deviations from the drawings which are necessary because of job , � conditions. C. Mark deviations in colored pencils for ease of identification of various � systexns. , D. When work is complete, record all deviations on clean sepia copies of � drawings and submit sepias of completed "Record Drawings" to Owner's representative for distribution. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ' A. Specifications and drawings indicate name, Type or catalog numb ers of ,� materials and equipment to establish basic standards for the project. These standards shall be used exclusively in preparation of the � Contractor's bid. Unauthorized substitution of non-approveci manufacturers, equipment or materials shall constitute automatic rejection of submittal. Upon completion of the bidding process, the � Architect will review written requests from the Contractor for alternate manufacturer's including appropriate changes to the bid price for the substitutions requested. The Contractor shall not utilize the alternate � manufacturers in the preparation of bid unless approved by written addendum from the Architect. , � B. Specific references are made to one or more manufacturers' names and , model or catalog numbers. This does not indicate that the material and equipment specified is necessarily an "off the shelf' item; requirements for specific finishes, materials or other modifications may introduce , variances from manufacturers' standards. Contractor sha11 ascertain that such modifications are fully considered. , � C. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer. D. Refer to Section 01630 for additional requirements. r E. Provide UL or ETL labels when available. F. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless spec�cally ,� noted otherwise. � January 22, 1999 15010-10 98165.01 � i � � , � � _ � � I � � � 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION , � 3.01 LOCATIONS i A. Mechanical layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical. �, � ' B. Exact locations of ductwork, pipes and equipment may vary because of I I conflicts with work of other trades. , � C. Work out conflicts such that relocations do not affect operation or appearance of systems. ' � D. Where conflicts cannot be worked out between trades, Owner's j representative will decide. Owner's representative reserves the right to ' � make reasonable changes in locations. , ' � E. Locate equipment requiring periodic servicing or adjustment so that it is ' readily accessible. , F. In projects involving renovation, installation of new ductwork and i equipment as well as new ceiling heights will require offsetting, raising ; I and in some instances relocation of existing piping, ductWork and r , , conduit. Visit site, be informed of conditions under which this work I must be performed and include the cost of this work in bids. � ; � G. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing � I conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will � j require offsetting, raising or relocation to accommodate the renovation. � ' � Survey the site and be informed of existing conditions which require ! , offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and � ' include this work. � i � I H. Do not backup service sides to walls or place it too close to other � equipment to make service impractical. � I 3.02 EXISTING SERVICES 1 ' ; ; A. Provide temporary work, equipment and materials to maintain existing � ' � , services in operation. ' ' B. Coordinate all shutdowns to Owner's convenience. i � �' � ; 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING � i , A. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of � contract. � � � � B. Correct damage caused due to installation of inechanical work. � � � C. Perform repairs with materials which match existing and install in � ; accordance with the appropriate section of these specifications. I � 3.04 COUNTERFLASHING: Counterflash ducts where penetration of roofs and , ; � outside walls occur. i � January 22, 1999 15010-11 98165.01 � � 3.05 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEMS � A. Complete the following before requesting a final inspection: �a 1. All work required under this division of the specifications except as permitted. � 2. Pay special attention to completion of work required under Sections 15020, 15025, 15030 and 15035. 3. System balancing. � 4. Control system checkout. 5. Furnish required operating instructions, wiring diagrams and � pneumatic or electric "Project Record Documents" controT diagrams in accordance with Division 1. � 6. Mount one copy of each control diagram in the appropria�e � equipment rooms as specified elsewhere. � 7. Owner will accept job on basis of tests and inspections. 8. A representative of firm that performed test and balance ��ork is � to be in attendance to assist with final inspection. 9. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system and mak� necess- ary adjustments during fmal inspection. � 3.06 WARRANTY AND SERVICE A. Guarantee all work installed under this Division to be free from defects � in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from dat� of substantial usage, from date of occupancy of project or from date of , final acceptance, whichever is earliest. B. Above parties further agree they will repair and replace defectiv� material or workmanship which becomes defective within terms of this � warranty-guarantee. C. Upon final acceptance of work, Owner will assume responsibility of supervision, operating and maintaining equipment. �: D. After fmal acceptance, owner will lubricate motors and other operating � components, make minor adjustments for proper operating conditions and report defective materials or workmanship to Contractor. E. Owner will make emergency repairs only if Contractor is unavailable. � Such repairs shall in no case void a warranty or guarantee. F. Replace defective matexial, parts and equipment and correct defec tive � workmanship without delay and without cost upon being notified of such defect. � January 22, 1999 15010-12 9L�165.01 , � i I - 1 � ' G. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, maintenance � including labor and materials costs will be at Owner's expense. � END OF SECTION � ' � � � � � � - - � r � � � � ' �� :� � � � � �� - � � - � � � � : January 22, 1999 15010-13 98165.01 1 � � � , � � 1 � � � ; I SECTION 15020 � I � � I IDENTIFICATION AND PAINTING 1 � . � I 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL � ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED i ' A. Identify and paint all existing piping in renovated azeas as specified t � herein. � B. Comply with the applicable provisions of Section 15010. � I i C. Identify piping, painted under Section 09900. � D. Painting of Standpipes and Fire Protection Piping. � � E. Painting of Medical Gas Piping. " • � 1.02 RELATED WORK , ' I � A. Section 09900: Painting. j j B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � � . • ! 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section j 01340. (01300). � ; � 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS i � I A. Do not apply painting materials to unclean or improperly prepared 1 � � surfaces, or where dust is being generated. i � B. Protect items not scheduled to be painted by covering with protective i � materials. ' 2. ' PART - 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANLTFACTURERS: Refer to Section 09900 for approved � � paint manufacturers. ! 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION � i � 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Identify exposed piping with snap-on or strap-on type mazkers , � indicating service, direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at I i � valves, access panels and at least once above each space but not more � , i than 50 feet apart. Color code markers in accordance with ANSI-B 13.1. i Provide Seton "Setmark" markers. ; ! , B. Identify concealed piping above ceilings with painted stencils indicating � � ' pipe service, direction of flow and pipe size. Install markers at valves, i� i � � January 22, 1999 Y5020-1 98165.01 I 1 access anels and at least once above �� p each space but not more than 50 feet apart. C. Color code Standpipes and Fire Protection piping: CC13 Safety red. '� D. Requirement for identification of piping is in addition to the ' requirements for any color coding of inechanical and electrical piping specified in Section 09900. ,.. , E. Waste, vent, control compressed air and buried lines need not b� , , mazked. 3.02 MEDICAL GAS PIPING � A. Provide stick-on identification markers indicating service and direction of flow on all medical gas piping on 20 foot intervals and at least once above every�room. � B. Color code medical gas piping in accordance with the following � schedule: �� 1. Clinical compressed air - yellow. , 2. Vacuum - white. � 3. Oxygen - green (to match oxygen cylinders). � END OF SECTION i � I � 1 , ! 1 1 January 22, 1999 15020-2 98165.01 � � , � , i ' � I � I � SECTION 15025 , I i � i , EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION � i j I � 1. i PART - 1 GENERAL , � � 1.01 WORK INCLUDED � ' A. Nameplates, tags, stenciling and similar items for identification t purposes. I B. Control Diagrams. '� ! 1.02 RELATED WORK � i � � A. Section 09900: Painting. � I , B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � C. Section 15020: Identification and Painting � , ; 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � 01340 (01300). I I � ' 2. i PART - 2 PRODUCTS I � ; 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Seton Name Plate Corporation or equal. ' 2.02 NAMEPLATES, TAGS, ETC. � A. Nameplates: Rigid plastic, "Setonite" or bakelite, with engraved � ; lettering of 3/4" minimum height. Fill engraved lettering with a � permanent coloring material which contrasts with color tag material for i � easy reading. ' � ; � B. Fasteners: Commercial quality, rust resistant nuts and bolts with � backing washers, self-tapping screws or rivets. � ' i C. Stenciling: Stencil large pieces of equipment with an oil based enamel ; � or semi-gloss latex. � i 1 ' 2.03 CONTROL DIAGRAM FRAMES: Seton Name Plate Corp., No. 111P � aluminum frames with "plexiglass" or "lucite" glazing or equal by Brady or i Avery. 1 � �� I� 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � I 3.01 BAKELITE NAMEPLATES � � i , ' A. Provide engraved rigid plastic nameplates showing name and number of � � mechanical equipment in a conspicuous location on items such as � ' starters, fans, reheat coils, air handlers and control panels. ' � B. Nameplates to have at least 3/4" high lettering. I ' i January 22, 1999 15025-1 98165.01 I � I � � C. Use names and n er a � umb s ppearing in schedules on drawmgs. D. Submit proposed identification list for approval prior to making � � nameplates. Use abbreviations only where approved. E. Fasten nameplates to equipment using nuts and bolts, screws, brads, � rivets or other type fasteners. Glue or adhesive is not acceptable. F. If unsuitable surfaces, such as high temperature, lack of space, etc.� do not allow for direct attachment, use copper or brass rings or cha.ins.to � attach tags. 3.02 CONTROL DIAGR.AMS � A. Provide pneumatic and electrical control diagrams, sequence of operation, framed and mounted of equipment and controls in each � separate equipment room. B. As a minimum the following instructions and diagrams are requis�ed: 1. Pneumatic and electronic control diagrams. � 2. ElectricaUElectronic interlock and control diagrams. , 3. Sequence of operation, where applicable. ' � 4. Required concise operating instructions. C. Use non-fading prints of black-line diazo or approved equivalent and � aluminum frames with "plexiglass" or "lucite" covers. D. Diagrams and instructions may be reduced in size, but lettering not to ' be smaller than elrte type as produced on standard typewriter. . � END OF SECTION ' ; i 1 1 i � January 22, 1999 15025-2 98165.01 , i � ' I I � � � I � I I � � SECTION 15030 ' � � j � � CLEANING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS , I , I ' I 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL I ! 1.01 WORK INCLUDED I � � A. Cleaning of Duct Systems. � � � i B. Cleaning of Existing Mechanical Equipment. ' I C. Cleaning of Existing Ductwork. � 1.02 RELATED WORK: Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS: NOT APPLICABLE ' � , 3. I PART - 3 EXECUTION � � � 3.01 GENERAL � A. � Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean ' ' ,� up dirt, debris, oil materials, etc., and remove from site. ! B. Keep premises in neat and clean condition to satisfaction of Owner. � � ' ; C. Thoroughly clean ducts and apparatus casings before fans and filters are i � operated. � ! ii D. Touch up factory applied finishes, if not to be repainted, covering all ' ; baze places, scratches, etc. ' I 3.02 EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 1 � .� A. In renovation areas, clean e�cisting coils on reheat coils to return coil ' pressure drop characteristics to original condition. � i � B. Replace e�sting fan belts where required to adjust fan speed to final air ' � delivery requirements shown on drawings. � � ; i C. Clean existing damper blades where mounted in duct systems. ' � ' � 3.03 EXISTING DUCTWORK i ' I A. In areas of renovation, clean existing interior of ductwork where dust and cobwebs have collected. I I � B. Clean elbows at turning vanes and air extractors to remove dust and i , cobwebs. 1 � 1 � � January 22, 1999 15030-1 �a165.01 � : ' C. In areas of renovation, seal transverse duct joints with two part �Iardcast sealant where air leakage is present or otherwise indicated on the � drawings. � END OF SECTION � . ' � � . � . � , ' - � _ ' _ , � . , i 1 i 1 January 22, 1999 15030-2 9�165.01 � i ' � SECTION 15050 � - � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS � , 1. i PART - 1 GENERAL � I i 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 15010. � 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: The mechanical drawin s are dia rammatic and ' � i g g � show the relation of equipment and connections. Do not scale drawings for 1 i exact sizes and locations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' ' 01340 (01300). � � 1.04 DELIVERY, STOR.AGE AND HANDLING i ' , A. Store materials in accordance with Section 01620 (01600). i ; B. Protect materials and equipment at a11 times from damage, weather and iexposure to dirt and moisture. , ; C. Any materials shown on the contract documents as existing to be relocated are the property of the owner. The Contractor sha11 be � responsible for removal, storage and reinstallation of these materials for i the duration of the project. Any of these materials suffering damage or ' loss while under the responsibility of the Contractor shall be repaired or 1 replaced without additional cost to the Owner. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS . � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Specifications and drawings indicate name, type or catalog numbers of 1 materials and equipment to establish basic standards for the project. These standards shall be used exclusively in preparation of the Contractor's bid. � ' B. Unauthorized substitution of non-approved manufacturers, equipment or materials shall result in automatic rejection of submittal. I, � ' C. Upon completion of the bidding process, the Architect may review written requests from the Contractor for voluntary alternate ' manufacturers including appropriate changes to the bid price for the i substitutions requested. D. The Contractor shall not utilize the alternate manufacturers in the ' , preparation of bid unless approved by written addendum from the Architect. ' ' January 22, 1999 15050-1 98165.01 D � E. Do not construe standards as limiting competition. Base bid on one or more of the approved manufacturers listed. � F. Equipment shall bear UL or ETL labels when available. G. Use products and materials of domestic manufacturer unless specifically � noted otherwise. H. Refer to Section 01630 (01600) for additional requirements. 2.02 EQUIPMENT � A. Structural Fastening 1. Provide concrete inserts, expansion shields, lag bolts, bolts, � � washers and nuts for structural fastening of equipment, n7aterials, ' piping and ductwork. � �' 2. All bolted devices to use jamb nuts. 3. Inserts to be continuous type equa.l to Unistrut Corp. Series � P3200 for beams and P3300 for floor and roof slabs. 4. Inserts to be complete with springs, nuts, end caps and plastic � coated filler to prevent concrete seepage. 5. Use of power drive "shot-pins" is permitted only for ducts up to 20 inches in width and pipes up to 1 inch diameter. � B. Miscellaneous Supports and Framing: l. Where light weight concrete/decking or other non-structural ' materials are used that will not support inserts, provide angles, unistrut and channels to span between steel beams and/or bar ' joists to support ductwork, equipment, and piping. 2. Provide all angle iron or channel framing at irregular wall and floor slabs penetrations required to provide a smooth surface for ' mounting of angles around fire and combination fire-smoke damper sleeves. 3. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring ' special framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements shall be the responsibility of the � submitting contractor. 4. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, required for attaching � sheet metal specialty items to duct, walls, floors and ceilir�gs. C. Access Panels 1. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels for installation by c�ther ' trades. 2. Furnish access doors with UL labeled fire rating comparable to � the wall, floor, shaft or ceiling rating where they are insta?led. January 22, 1999 15050-2 9�3165.01 , 1 � � � � � ; ; � , � 3. Provide panels of sufficient size and locate to permit servicing of ' � all equipment furnished under this section. � � 4. Minimum size to be 18-inch x 18-inch. � I � ; , 5. Construct doors as follows: � a. 14-gauge steel. � I � b. 16-gauge steel frame. � � c. Screwdriver operated locks. ' I d. Finished with prime coat of rust inhibitor. � , 6. Provide Milcor, Bilco or approved equal doors for the following ' I applications: j a. Milcor Style A for acoustical tile ceilings. ' j b. Milcor Style M for exposed masonry walls. � c. Milcor Style DW for drywall.installations. ' ; d. Milcor Style AP for plastered ceilings and walls. ; e. Milcor Style M with stainless doors for ceramic tile or , � ' glazed structural tile. ! 3. I PART - 3 EXECUTION i � �, � � ,. 3.01 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION i ' I A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ; � i � ' I B. Route ductwork to avoid conflicts and interferences with building � i structure and other trades. 1 ; f C. Install ductwork to provide maximum possible clear height underneath. � D. Install equipment requiring service to be readily accessible. � � , ! i � END OF SECTION � ' � i I I i ' i I i � 1 � � � � 1 , � i ' j January 22, 1999 15050-3 98165.01 a � a �i . � . � . � � � � � � . � . � � � � � � 1 � ' � , i ! � � � SECTION 15170 � � i � MOTORS , � � � ; i1. ; PART - 1 GENERAL � i I 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Provide electric motors for equipment specified under � this Division. ' � � , 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. ' � . B. Division 16: Power wiring, starters and interlock wiring. � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' � 01340 (01300). 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS ' ; 2.01 EQUIPMENT � A. Provide new NEMA standard motors designed for ample size to operate � • at proper load and full speed continuously without causing noise, vibrat- ion or temperature rise in excess of rating. � B. Torque characteristics to exceed rotating equipment WR2 requirements � ,' by sufficient amount to insure acceleration to full rated speed within allowable acceleration time of motor. I C. All motors 5 HP and larger on all equipment furnished under Division 1 15 to be high efficiency, high power factor type with additional rotor ; � and starter windings equal to Baldor Super-E premium efficiency , , motors. � ; ; D. Where motors are specified or scheduled to be used with variable � � ' frequency drives, furnish motors designed with heavy duty insulation for � inverter duty to withstand additional heat generated by less than a i I perfect sine wave. ' � i i E. Motors to be designed and nameplated for 120-volt, 1-phase, 60-cycle , operation to be capacitor start, 40 degree continuous rise, open drip proof type equipped with ball bearings and internal overload protection. ' , F. Motors designed and nameplated for 460 or 208-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz � � � operation to be: , I . i � 1. Single-speed. � 2. Squirrel cage type. , , 3. NEMA Design B. ' f � January 22, 1999 15170-1 98165.01 � ' a '. 4. Normal-starting torque. 5. Open drip proof. , 6. Quiet-operating. 7. 40 degree centigrade continuous rise. ' G. Motors to be equipped with lubricatable ball bearings having grease i fittings and relief ports. � I H. Bearings to be rated by bearing manufacturer for B-10 life of 100,000 hours. Aluminum end brackets to have steel inserts in bearing cavity. , I. Where part-winding starters are specified, motors to be wound for ' � part-winding. J. Specification applies to all motors unless otherwise specified with , equipment. K. Motors drawing greater than 1000 watts at full load shall have a power ' factor full load rating of 85% or higher at rated voltage; provide necessary capacitors on load side of starter for minimum power factor. L. When tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure No. 112A, � Method B, Motor Apparent Efficiency (power factor x efficiency) shall meet or exceed the following: � MOTOR APPARENT ' HP EFFICIENCY • _ ---------------------- ' 1 to 1-1/2.........66% 2 to 5.............��,a � 5 to 7-1/2.........73% 10 to 15...........75% � 20 and UP..........76% , ' M. For all high efficiency/high power factor motors, above values to be equal to those of a Baldor Super-E premium efficiency motor. , N. Motor sound power levels not to exceed the guidelines recommended by NEMA (MGl-12.49). � 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Arrange and include setting of motors. January 22, 1999 15170-2 98165.01 , ' IIII I ' B. Motors on direct-driven equipment to be lined up on job using dial ' equipment. C. Unless starter furnished as integral part of equipment supplied, starter to ' be furnished and installed by Division 16. D. Adjust motors on belt driven equipment for proper belt tension. ' � E. Provide motor shafts of sufficient length to equal or exceed centerline of � actual installed motor sheave. , I ' ; � I END OF SECTION � , ; ' � i � i - � � � ' j � I ' I - i � i , � 1 � � � � � ; 1 � � I 1 ' ! 1 1 ' � January 22, 1999 15170-3 98165.01 i � ; ; , ; � � � � SECTION 15250 , I I � INSULATION � � , � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL I1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Insulation for duct systems and equipment specified in Division 15. B. Repair any missing or damaged pipe insulation in the renovated areas with insulation which matches the original material. � C. Provide all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform work required on the drawings and specified herein. � 1.02 RELATED WORK � A. Section 07270: Firestopping. ' , B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � C. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure. t , , 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300). � ' 1.04 DEFINITIONS I A. Thermal resistance "R" values are expressed in units of "Hour °F ftzBtu ' i per inch of Thickness" on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75°F ! unless noted otherwise. � B. Thermal conductivity (k) values are expressed in units of "Btu in/Hour , I °F ftZ" on a flat surface a� a mean temperature of 75°F unless noted otherwise. , i C. Insulation to consist of insulating materials, jacket, mastic and adhesive, either as a "system" or as an individual component when used separ- � ately. I ' ' i , 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CERTIFICATION i � A. Certify all insulation, adhesives, coatings, sealers and tapes as having a ' � flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less j when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 225 and UL 723. ! B. All insulation shall be labeled by the manufacturer. The label shall ! � � include the "R" value, thickness, density, flame spread and smoke ' developed rating. ; i' , C. All insulating materials to meet the requirements of NFPA-90A. i i ' � January 22, 1999 15250-1 98165.01 i � D. Pro 0 ducts to meet applicable national, model, state and local building, plumbing and mechanical codes. Products to be UL listed for intended a service. E. Deliver and store all insulating materials in manufacturer's containers and keep free from dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical damage. Do 8 not repair, dry nor install insulation which has been damaged or wet. Such materials shall be removed from the project site. F. Apply insulation in a neat, workmanlike manner using experienced, � qualified tradesmen. G. Do not apply insulation until all leak and pressure testing has been � � completed, inspected and released for insulation application. H. Clean and dry surfaces prior to insulation application. � �I I. Butt insulation joints firmly together, smooth and securely install all j ackets and tapes. � ' J. Certify that all duct insulation meets the minimum requirements of the current Florida Energy Code for Building Construction. 1.06 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS � A. Refer to Section 15010 for applicable codes and standards. B. ASTM E-84 I C. NFPA 255 ' D. UL 723 E. NFPA 90A ' 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FOR DUCTS ' A. Blanket Type Duct Insulation 1. Insulation shall comply with requirements of ASTM C55�, Type ' I, Class B2 for service up to 250°F. 2. Thermal,conductivity (k) at 75°F mean temperature shall �e 0.27 ' maximum at labeled thickness and 0.25 maximum with material compressed 25% when tested in accordance with ASTM r177 or ASTM C518. , 3. Insulation shall be minimum 1 pound per cubic foot densi ty. 4. Blanket type duct insulation installed indoors shall be jaciceted � with foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) facing. , a. Jacket shall be factory applied. ' Janua.ry 22, 1999 15250-2 9�165.01 ' I 1 � � . � � � � ' � ; i b. Water vapor permeance shall be 0.02 permeance inch 1 � I when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A. i ; � c. Beach puncture shall be 25 oz in/in tear minimum when � tested in accordance with ASTM D781. ' ' , ! � 5. Product to be manufactured by Schuller International or equival- , , ! ent by Certainteed, Knauf or Owens-Corning. , 6. Provide glass fiber blanket insulation for the following: ; a. Unlined conditioned supply ducts concealed from view: , 11/2" thick. b. Terminal reheat coils: 1%z" thick. ' c. Cabinet fan and filter unit in supply duct: 1%2" thick. � d. Tops of supply air diffusers: 11/z" thick. � ' e. In addition, insulate any duct surface, air device or hangers subject to sweating. � 3. i PART - 3 EXECUTION � i 3.01 GENERAL i , A. Do not cut insulation where a hanger is located. � B. All surfaces to be clean and dry when covering is applied. Covering to , ! be dry when installed and during application of any finish. � C. All adhesives, cements and mastics to be free of asbestos and ' ; compatible with materials applied without attacking materials in either � wet or dry state. � � D. Install insulation using professional insulators who have substantial , ' experience and ability. E. Exposed to view insulation to have a well tailored appearance. ' � I F. Do not insulate nameplates on equipment. Provide neatly beveled edge � at interruptions of insulation. ; ' � G. Install insulation to allow clearances and access for service and i I maintenance to a11 equipment. i � H. Duct Wall Penetrations: 1 j 1. Stop a11 duct coverings, including jacket and insulation, at fire , dampered penetrations of walls, floors above grade and roofs. ' ; 2. Flare-out or extend jacketed insulation at least 2" beyond angle � frames of fire dampers and secure to structure. ' ; 3. Maintain vapor barrier. , ' i January 22, 1999 15250-3 98165.01 � � a 4. Install covering over damper access door readily removable and identifiable. 5. Sto all duct coverin s includin 'acket and insulation at all � P g gJ penetrations of rated walls and smoke partitions. 6. Seal air tight around duct penetration of drywall, full circumfer- � ence. � 7. Refer to Sections 07270, 15010, 15890, 15895 and 15896 for � information on firestopping of wall penetrations. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCT COVERING � A. All duct joints shall be sealed and pressure testing shall be comp:leted prior to installation of any covering. � B. Jacketed Blanket Type Insulation: 1: Apply covering to ducts pulled snug but not more than %"' � compression at corners. 2. Use insulation�having 2" tab or cut insulation long enough to allow for "peel-off' of insulation from jacket to effect a � minimum overlap tab of 2". 3. Staple lap with flare type staples 1" O.C. � 4. Cover standing seams, stiffeners and braces with same ins ulation blanket, using 2" jacket lap and staple lap. ' 5. Secure jacket to covering using Foster No. 85-20 or 85-75 adhesive or equal. �� 24 d 'der mechanicall fasten insulation to duct 6. For duct an wi � � Y bottom, using weld pins or nylon "stick-clip" base plates having, self-locking, coated metal or nylon discs, locating fastenetts on ' 12" centers laterally and longitudinally. 7. For ducts up to 18" deep, mechanically fasten insulation to duct ' sides, using one row of pins or plates located on 12" centers horizontally and equal distance laterally between duct top and bottom. For ducts over 24" deep, use minimum of two ro�vs. ' C. Cover all j oints, pins, rips, tears, punctures, disc heads, staples or breaks in vapor barrier jacket with FSK tape or 4-inch wide woven glass fabric tape embedded in equivalent of Childers CP-82 or Benjamin-Fost�r No. ' 85-20 "Sparkfast" vapor barrier fire resistant adhesive. D. After Test and Balance of air systems is accepted, repair insulation at all , test ports in ducts. Mark locations of ports on insulation jacket wnth permanent marker. END OF SECTION ' January 22, 1999 15250-4 9�165.01 , � ,� ; � i ' i � � � SECTION 15862 � ; I � ' CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS ' � , , 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Furnish and install all roof mounted centrifugal fans indicated and/or scheduled on drawings. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � � B. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods. C. Section 15170: Motors. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. All fans to bear AMCA seal for air and sound. ' B. Do NOT submit fans with higher sound levels, higher rpm requirements, higher outlet velocities, higher tip speeds or smaller fan diameters than ' those specified. Submittals which ignore this requirement will be ' returned unchecked. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' ' , A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01300. ' , ; B. Furnish certified performance data and fan curves with indicated operating points. ' C. Furnish sound data on all fans. �, 1 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS � , A. Acme. , B. Greenheck. ' � , C. Loren-Cook. � D. Penn Ventilator. , � 2.02 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS I � A. Fan housing to be constructed of heavy-gauge spun aluminum enclosing 1 ! � � motor outside airstream. B. Housing to be removable for servicing of motor. ' � C. Fan and motor to be isolated from base with rubber vibration isolators. i ' ' � � j January 22, 1999 15862-1 98165.01 � � ' D. Fan BHP not to exceed nameplate horsepower at rated conditions. E. Centrifugal type fan, statically and dynamically balanced. , F. Fans to be complete with the following features: � 1. Lubricated lifetime sealed ball bearings. t 2. Gravity back-draft dampers. 3. Disconnect switch. , 4. Bird screen arou.nd fan discharge. G. Furnish all direct driven fans with solid state speed controller for air � balancing. H. Refer to Section 15050 for prefabricated roof curb specification. , I. Prefabricated roof curb constructed of same material as fan housings and manufactured by the fan m'anufacturer. " ' J. � Curb to be minimum of 12 lugh and be insulated with 1 thick fiberglass. K. See architectural drawings for roof pitch. � L. Furnish up-blast housing arrangement where shown on drawings. ' 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION . 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. B. Secure fans to roof curbs with stainless steel screws. ' C. Provide turning vanes at the inlet connection to roof mounted fans. Stubbing branch ducts into a plenum box underneath the roof-maunted ' fan is not permitted. D. Attach duct to fans to allow for straight and smooth airflow. . , E. Provide fle�ble connections between fan and duct. � F. Install fan level with horizontal plane. ' G. Final installation to be free of all leaks both from fan interior andl roof- to-curb interface. ' END OF SECTION ' ' January 22, 1999 15862-2 9�165.01 , , � � � � , 1 � � I ' , SECTION 15864 � ' � � I CENTRIFUGAL CABINET FANS , ', ' � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Furnish and install equipment of the sizes and capacities as scheduled. B. Install fans at locations shown on drawings and as required by details specified herein. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK ' A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. ' B. Section 15170: Motors. ' , 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Certify fans performance in accordance with AMCA Certified Air and Sound Rating Criteria, Standard 210 and 300. � ' B. UL or ETL listed and labeled. � ; , 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' ! ! 01340 (Q1300). � 2. i PART - 2 PRODUCTS 'I 1 ; i 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' � A. Penn "Zephyr". ' ' B. Acme "Masterette". � C. Greenheck. ' � , 2.02 EQUIPMENT � ' � A. Centrifugal fan, acoustically engineered. ' ' , B. Direct drive with fan motor mounted on vibration isolators. I �� C. Integral back-draft damper. ' I D. Fan to operate whisper quiet at specified conditions. E. Horsepower and voltage as shown on drawings. � � � F. Permanently lubricated, thermally protected, PSC ball bearing motor. G. Design fan outlet to be suitable for duct connection. 1 , , � � January 22, 1999 15864-1 98165.01 i ' � 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide a solid state motor speed controller. 1 B. Provide in-line duct adapter. 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. � � B. Install variable speed controllers where scheduled or shown on drawings. ' ' C. Install flexible duct connectors and fan inlet and discharge connections. D. Externally insulate fan housing to prevent condensation. ' END OF SECTION ' � . � ' , ' , ' ' , ' January 22, 1999 15864-2 98165.01 ' � 1 � � I i � I i i ' I � SECTION 15886 ' � i � ; AIR FILTERS ' 1 ; 1. PART - 1 GENERAL , 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Cartridge filters. B. Filter housings as scheduled on drawings. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK: Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. All filters to meet NFPA 90A requirements for flammability. B. Filters with a 9.0% efficiency and less shall be tested in accordance with I ' ' AS�iRAE Standard 52-76. C. Filters with a 95% efficiency and higher shall be rated under the D.O.P. , test requirements. I ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300). ' ; 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS , 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' ; A. American Air Filter. � B. Cambridge. � C. ECO Aire Systems. , D. Farr. " ' , E. M.S.A. , F. 95% efficient filters: AAF Biocell or approved equal. ' ; 2.02 MANOMETER � � � A. Provide a Dwyer inclined tube draft gauge across a11 filters. ' I B. Mark gauge to indicate design clean and dirty loading conditions. 2.03 PLEATED DISPOSABLE FILTERS ' � i I A. Provide medium efficiency, disposable, pleated media filters equal to ' ; Farr 30/30 at locations shown on drawings. , ' � B. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven cotton media, media support � ' grid and enclosing frame. � I January 22, 1999 15886-1 98165.01 � , B � C. Filter shall be listed by IJL as Class II. D. Average efficiency of 25-30% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52-7�. B E. 2" Thick Media: Effective filter media area shall not be less than 4.6 ft2 media/ftz face area. � 2.04 CARTRIDGE FILTERS A. High-efficiency cartridge type filter to be rated with minimum a��erage � dust spot efficiency not less than 90% using atmospheric dust sp�t by � ASHRAE Standard 52-76. B. Filter banks to seal airtight so that removal and replacement of � cartridges do not break seal. 2.05 FILTER HOUSINGS � A. Side Access Housings: 1. Provide factory fabricated steel filter housings with hinged and � gasketed doors designed to permit side access and removal of filters. 2. Provide gasketed membrane at surface contact between filter and � housing frame for positive sealing around the filter casings. 3. Design filter housing with a separate prefilter rack to pernut � replacement of prefilters without removal of the secondarw filters. 4. Refer to drawings for size and arrangement of filter frame. � 5. Furnish with positive locking access door mechanism. ' 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' i A. Provide filters and housing of size and capacities scheduled on � drawings. B. Mount filters and housings at locations shown on drawings. ' C. Provide one complete change of all filter media, delivered to job site ' and turned over to Owner at final inspection. D. Install filters in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. , E. All filter sections downstream of cooling coils to be insulated in accordance with Section 15250. ' END OF SECTION ' January 22, 1999 15886-2 9�165.01 ' � � � � '�� , ; � � i i ' SECTION 15890 t i SHEET METAL DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE � � i , � 1. ' PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Furnish all sheet metal ductwork with air velocity less � than 2000 FPM and sta.tic pressure less than 2" w.g. 1.02 RELATED WORK ' A. Section 07270: Firestopping. B. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � C. Section 15250: Insulation. D. Section 15910: Sheet Metal Specialties. ' E. Shop Drawings: � 1. Submit for approval complete sheet metal drawings indicating a11 ' � ductwork and fittings to be fabricated and installed in all ' � renovation building areas. , � 2. Coordinate shop drawings with routing of piping, fire protection, ' ; � electrical conduit and bus ducts, pneumatic tube system, cable � trays and other trades. ; � 3. Prior to submission, stamp shop drawings approved to sub- � ; stantiate that adequate coordination for space requirements and ; accessibility have been provided and that no conflicts exist ' ' ' between trades. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS � I A. Emboss duct fittings with material gauge, manufacturer and type material B. Support ductwork in accordance with the 1985 lst Edition of ' � � SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". ; li i C. Install ductwork to comply with UL roof/floor ceiling assembly number � I shown on Architectural plans and in accordance with UL Fire Resist- I ; ance Index Catalog. , D. Hang ductwork by angle iron and wire in accordance with the specified i ! ' roof/floor ceiling assembly. � i � E. Provide materials, including sealers, liners, pre-insulated jackets and ' ' fle�ble ducts with a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke , ' development rating of not over 50. I j ' � � � January 22, 1999 15890-1 98165.01 � O O 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct ductwork in accordance with methods and details con:ained in e the 1985 lst edition of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction �Stand- ards" unless specifically changed in this section of the specifications or on the drawings. � B. Leakage for low pressure duct systems including supply, return and exhaust shall not exceed 2% of the design fl�ows as evidenced by the � final Test and Balance Report on: (Main traversed flows minus �-) the sum of all terminal outlet (or inlet) flows for each system. C: BE ADVISED that ALL transverse joints shall�be sealed�with a 2-part � tape/adhesive system as spec�ed under Part 2 Materials . D. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are inside "air side" clear � dimensions. Make allowances for duct requiring internal sound l:ner. E. In areas of renovation, contractor shall field verify existing conditions and clearances for installation of new ductwork and coordinate �hrith � other trades prior to any fabrication of sheet metal. Contractor shall fiirnish offsets, rises, drops and transitions and sha11 adjust to equivalent � duct sizes as required to facilitate installation in the existing conditions. F. In certain areas where higher ceilings are being installed, existing ' conduit, wiring, piping, sprinklers, rainwater leaders and ductwork will , require offsetting, raising or relocation to accommodate the renovation. Survey the site and be informed of e�cisting conditions which require ' offsetting and/or relocation of existing piping, ductwork and conduit and ' include this work. Contractor to include in his bid the cost of re uired � I offsetting, raising or relocation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc to a�low for installation of new work. t G. Where indicated on the drawings, Hardcast (seal) transverse duct joints on existing (to remain) supply, return and e�aust ductwork to reduce ' air leakage. Remove existing external insulation and apply two-part joint ' sealant. Replace external insulation with new material upon com�letion � of sealing. ' 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS � A. Ductwork: Galvanized steel. B. Sheet metal angles, bar slips, hangers and straps: Galvanized steel. , C. Screws: Cadmium plated. D. Joint Sealer: ' 1. Mineral impregnated woven fiber tape and plastic type activator-adhesive FTA-20 (indoor) and FTA-50 (outdoor) ' manufactured by Hardcast Inc. with FS-150 fiberglass scrim tape January 22, 1999 15890-2 98165.01 t � 1 ' ' O other substitutes . The use of an sealants without a � ) Y �� reinforcing tape is NOT accepta.ble except as listed below. � 2. If contractor elects to utilize TDC connectors, the gasketing for , � the TDC connectors shall be Hazdcast's FLANGE GRIP 1902- FR flame retardant sealant and the four interior joints shall be � I caulked with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601-NO SUBSTITiJTES. i If for any reason this sealant is not used, the followi.ng paragaph ' � 4. shall be a licable. PP � ` ' 3. If contractor proposes any substitute gasketing sealant for TDC � � connectors and interior joint caulking, be advised that the TDC _ � � flanges MUST be sealed with the 2-part sealant and tape system ' ; described in paragraph 1. � 4. In renovation projects where duct systems cannot be shutdown � , i and must remain unde'r pressure or for areas that must remain occupied, seal duct system with HARDCAST's water-based, � i Aluma-Grip AFT-701 - NO SUBSTITUTES. I ' ' 2.02 FABRICATION A. Comply with the following gauges and reinforcement schedule when � fabricating low pressure ductwork. Largest duct dimension governs the � duct and complete j oint. � Max Duct Dimension Duct Slip Gauge Slip Bar Slip Reinforcement � � Gauge Size I I Up to 18" 26 26 No No , � 19" to 30" 24 24 1 No 31" to 42" 22 22 1 No � 43" to 54" 22 22 1%z 1'/s x '/s Band Iron � , ! � 55" to 60" 20 20 1%x 13/s x '/e Band Iron � � 61" to 84" 20 20 1'/z 1%z x 1%z x 1/s Angle � 85" to 96" 18 20 1%z 1'/: x 1'/z x %4 Angle � OVER 96" 18 20 2 2 x 2 x %4 Angle � ; B. Refer to UL floor-ceiling and roof-ceiling assembly for minimum ; allowable duct gauge and wire hanger requirements. ,� C. Transverse Joints: In accordance with SMACNA. D. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock or grooved seams closed tightly ' � and evenly. Button punch snap lock longitudinal seam construction is not permitted. � ' Janu 22, 1999 15890-3 98165.01 �'Y � � E. Cross Breaking: Ductwork, except where rigid board insulation is applied, to be cross broken where duct dimension exceeds 10". � F. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Construct all angles, baz slips and straps used with ductwork of � same material as ductwork. 2. Cadmium-plated screws. � G. Compression Angles: 1. Install steel angles on the top and bottom of ductwork � compressed with all thread, washers and nuts. 2. Place angles on 4' O.C. at the indicated locations. 3. Provide compression angles at the following locations: � ' a. All ducts over 60" in width which generate objectionable . drumming. � b. All ducts with an aspect ratio above 4 to 1 which generate obj ectionable drumming. � c. At locations indicated on the drawings. d. At locations directed by the Architect. � H. Transitions: ' 1. Do not exceed 1/7 slope for increase-in-area transitions. � 2. Do not exceed 1/4 slope for decrease-in-azea transitions. 3. Do not exceed 30° slope on the approach side and 45° slope on � the leaving side of transitions at equipment connections v�Zthout the use of approved vanes. I. TDC/TDF/T-25 Transverse Joint Connector Systems � 1. If the contractor elects to utilize a formed-on flange, application , shall be limited to ducts less than 48" wide and the follouring � criteria shall be required: a. The flanges shall include a rolled on bead at the 9�J° blend. . b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all � �� pressure classes up to 2 w.g. Cleats sha11 be roll formed � from 20 ga. galvanized steel. c. Flange faces MLTST be sealed with HARDCAST FR- � 1902 - NO EXCEPTIONS. d. For duct pressures up to 2-in.w.g., bolt flanges NIUST be � installed at all four corners. January 22, 1999 15890-4 9�165.01 � �- .i ' � � , ; � 1 ' ' � � � i e. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with HARDCAST FR-1902. �� ; ' 2. If the contractor elects to utilize a TDC Connector System for � ! � ducts 48" and larger, a factory-manufactured system furnished by , Ductmate or Ward Industries sha11 be provided as follows: ; a. The flanges shall be factory roll-formed, knock-on type, � constructed of 22 ga galvanized steel with factory-applied sealant in the pocket. Connectors shall be Ward � Industries H System or approved equal by Ductmate Industries. , b. Provide 6" long flange cleats on 18" centers for all � pressure classes up to 2" w.g. Cleats sha11 be roll formed ; from 20 ga. galvanized steel. � ; c. Flange faces MLTST be cleaned and sealed with . Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP FR-1902 - NO � EXCEPTIONS. � � d. Provide Ward Industries' H Corner constructed of 11 ga. � galvanized steel. Corner pieces MUST be installed and � bolted. � � I e. For duct ressures u to 2" w. . bolt flan es MUST be P P g � g ; � installed as follows: � ; � (1) 48" to 96" duct: At four corners and 18" on � center. ' ,� ' (2) Over 96" duct: At four corners and 12" on center. ; � f. The four interior corners of the joint must be sealed with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601 - NO EXCEPTIONS. ��' � ! , ; J. Duct Sealing: �� ; 1. Seal all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outdoor air intake joints and connections using a 2-part system of mineral ' � impregnated woven fiber tape factory impregnated with an activ- � i� ator type adhesive. , I � 2. Mineral impregnated woven fiber tape and plastic type �' ' activator-adhesive FTA-20 (indoor) and FTA-50 (outdoor) i manufactured by Hardcast Inc. with FS-150 fiberglass scrim tape (NO other substitutes). The use of any sealants without a � � reinforcing tape is strictly prohibited. . i ! i 3. If contractor elects to utilize TDC connectors, the gasketing for � � the TDC connectors shall be Hardcast's FLANGE GRIP 1902- . � , FR flame retardant sealant and the four interior joints shall be ' caulked with Hardcast's IRON GRIP 601-NO SUBSTITUTES. � ' I , January 22, 1999 15890-5 98165.01 , 1 � If for any reason this sealant is not used, the following paragapl� 4. sha11 be applicable. r , 4. If contractor proposes any substitute gasketing sealant fo� TDC � , connectors and interior 'oint caulkin be advised that e J g , th TDC ,�. flanges MUST be sealed with the 2-part sealant and tape system ;� described in paragraph 2. 5. In renovation projects where duct systems cannot be shutdown � and must remain under pressure or for areas that must remain ' occupied, seal duct system with HARDCAST's water-based, ' Aluma-Grip AFT-701 - NO SUBSTITL7TES. � 6. Should longitudinal j oints prove to leak, longitudinal j oints shall also be sealed. K. . Low Pressure Round Duct � - 1. Round duct with a maximum operating pressure of 2" w.g. positive pressure shall be constructed in accordance with the _ ��. � following table: Duct Diameter Spiral Seam Longitudinal � inches Gau�e Seam Gau�e ' 3 thru 8 26 26 ' .�. 9 thru 14 26 26 15 thru 26 26 24 ,� ' 27 thru 36 24 22 37 thru 50 22 20 � 51 thru 60 20 18 61 thru 84 1 S 16 1,� 2. Round duct with a maximum operating pressure of 2-in.w.g. negative pressure sha11 be constructed in accordance with the � following table: Duct Diameter Spiral Seam Longitudinal � inches Gau�e Seam Gau�e 3 thru 8 26 26 '� ; 9 thru 14 26 24 15 thru 26 24 22 � 27 thru 36 22 20 37 thru 50 20 18 � January 22, 1999 15890-6 98165.01 '� I � ,� I , � � � � j I I I 51 tl�ru 60 18 16 � � � , 61 thru 84 16 14 i � i 3. Fittings shall be of a wall thickness notless than that specified � for longitudinal seam straight duct unless otherwise noted. 4. Refer to SMACNA Table 3-1 for mitered elbow requirements. � 5. Elbows may be die-formed stamped, pleated or segmented. Gages shall not be less than that for straight duct nor the � minimum appropriate for forming and assembly. L. Provide Ells fabricated as conditions necessitate in the following order � i of preference: 1. Un-vaned elbow with throat radius equal to 3/4 of duct width and full heel radius. � 2. Six (6) inch throat radius with full radius vanes and full heel � radius. � � 3. Three (3) inch square throat and square heel elbow with � closed-space double thickness vanes. 4. The use of square throat elbows with radius heels is NOT � ; permitted. Elbows of this type will be removed at contractor's expense. � ' M. Make Branch Connections and Tees in one of the following manners: I 1. Supply Branch: �� ,� a. Un-vaned radius transition elbow with splitter damper when branch width is 36 or smaller. � � b. Vaned square throat transition elbow when branch width �� , is larger than 36" with splitter damper equipped with ' locking rod and position indicator. � c. For sub-branch supply, use straight tap with e�ctractor, ; having manual control rod e�ended through main branch , side with position indicator. � � � 2. Return Branch: � a. Use 45° or radius entry clinch lock collar up to a �� I maximum of 24" width. ' i � b. Un-vaned radius transition to 36" width. � ' � c. Vaned square throat transition with splitter damper for I ; sizes above 36". i ; � r � January 22, 1999 15890-7 98165.01 . � � - 3. Round Supply Take-offs: a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized , steel fittings with 45° e�ractor and manual balan:;ing � damper. Fitting to be conical type. b. Provide e�ended balancing quadrant to allow insulation � to be applied without impeding operation of balancing damper. � c. Spin-in fitting to be minimum of 26 gauge galva.r�sized � construction. Fittings constructed of less gauge material � will not be accepted. � d. Raintree Products, Inc. Model 84MTSD, R & J Manufacturing Company Model S 1-6, or approveci equal. � , 4. Round Return/Exhaust Taps: " ' a. Factory fabricated beaded straight spin-in type galvanized _ ,� steel tap fittings with manual balancing damper. b. Raintree Model 84MTD, R & J or approved equal. ,� N. Low Pressure Flex Connectors: Connect indoor fans to duct system with UL listed 20 ounce flame retardant canvas. O. Low Pressure Flexible Duct: � 1. For flexible connections from ducts to registers, grilles a.nd diffusers provide corrosion resistant steel wire reinforcing helix � permanently banded in airtight polyester film. 2. Factory certified to meet requirements of NFPA-90A witt� flame �� spread not over 25 and smoke developed not over 50. 3. LTL listed and labeled as Class 1 air duct connector per U�_-181. � 4. Pressure rating: Up to 6" w.c. through a temperature range of- � 20°F to 250°F. 5. For Return, Relief and Exhaust Air Duct Connectors: PrGvide I� Wiremold Type WB flexible duct, Thermaflex, Flexmaster or approved equal. � 6. For Supply Duct Connections: a. Provide factory pre-insulated type duct having core as � previously described with a 1" thick, 0.75 PCF density glass fiber insulating blanket covered with a woven glass serim and sheathed in a polyolefin vapor barrier. � b. Duct to meet additional requirements of NFPA-90�3 and U.L. labeled as a Class 1 Air Duct Material. � c. Thermal "C" factor: 0.23 maximum at 60°F. January 22, 1999 15890-8 9£s165.01 �� ,� ' � , ; � � � , ' � i jd. Air duct material to be equal to Wiremold Type WGC or � i ; equivalent by Thermaflex or Flexmaster. _ � 7. Flexible duct connectors sha11 not exceed six feet (6'-0") in 1 length. ; 8. Install flexible ducting with steel clamps or plastic strap clamps ,� � equal to "Panduit" or "Young Quik-Clamp". � 9. Do not pass flexible duct through fire rated partitions. Stop insulation at each side of wall and route metal duct through wall. �. P. Round-to-Square Register Connectors: � 1. For low pressure return and/or e�aust application of round duct connectors to square ceiling grilles or registers, provide factory fabncated square-to-round galvazuzed steel mimmum 3" deep � i adapter boxes with 2" long beaded round collar. , , 2. Ramtree Model 79, shop, or factory fabncated eqmvalent. i Q. Manual Dampers: � ' 1. Hand o erated butterfl e dam ers to be alvanized steel, 18 � P Y � P g U. S. gauge or heavier. � , , 2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one ' blade on a 3/s" round steel rod mounted inside of duct without �^' frame. � 3. Fit dam er with locking ty e uadrant with position indicator P P q � and brass end bearing plate drilled and secured to duct. � 4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type: � ' ; a. Provide 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade length. , , b. Provide 10" maximum blade width over 30" blade length. �, ; c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings, � � interconnected for operation from one locking type hand , - , quadrant. � � � i R. Fire Dampers: Refer to Section 15910 for fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, sleeves, angles and other installation requirements. � I � S. Splitters, Extractors, Vanes and Deflectors: I 1. Galvanized steel sheet same thickness as ductwork of corres- � i � ponding size. , 2. Vanes to be securely anchored to duct or casing and have ' ' freestanding edges rigidly braced. �� I � , January 22, 1999 15890-9 98165.01 i � � 3. Provide adjustable rod with position indicator and locking device for splitters, extractors and deflectors. �� 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION � A. Hanging: 1. Support ductwork by suitable sheared strips or galvanized metals ,� or one inch by 1/s" galvanized steel band iron hangers on each _ side of duct. Refer to Figure 4-4, page 4-7 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Constxuction Standards for details. � 2. Attach hangers to the ductwork using sheet metal screws. � 3. Secure hangers to steel structure by means of C-clamps. In � seismic zones provide seismically approved C-clamps with cross over straps to attach to opposite side of beam flanges. 4. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of � approved anchor shields or other acceptable anchors, similar to Figures 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 pages 4-4, 4-5 and 4-6 of the � SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual. 5. Where light weight concrete and decking are used that will not support inserts, provide angles and channels to span between �� steel beams and/or bar joists to support ductwork. 6. Vertical risers and other duct runs, where method of support � specified above is not applicable, to be supported by angl�; brackets as shown on Figures 4-6 and 4-7, pages 4-12 and 4-13 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction manual. � B. Sealing: l. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's directions with lap � joint of 2" tape occurring on top of horizontal ducts when hidden from view. 2. Extend tape along sides of the joints onto flat duct for adhering � � the tape with adhesive. C. In areas of renovation, contractor shall field verify existing condifions � �� and clearances for installation of new ductwork and coordinate with other trades prior to any fabrication of sheet metal. Contractor shall I furnish offsets, rises, drops and transitions and shall adjust to equivalent � ' duct sizes as required to facilitate installation in the existing conditions. D. Obstructions and Restrictions: � 1. Obstructions may not be located within ducts without specific permission of Engineer for each instance. � i Janu 22 1999 15890-10 �' � 9�165.01 � � ' � � i � I i � I ! � 2. When obstructions cannot be avoided, obstructions shall be eased ,� � ! in accordance with Figure 2-10, page 2-11 of the SMACNA � HVAC Duct Construction manual. � i E. FIRESTOPPING � , 1. Penetrations and openings for a11 ductwork in fire rated � ; ' assemblies shall be firestopped with tested firestopping design � assemblies and in accordance with UL listed fire/smoke damper installation where dampers are required. These penetrations � i include but are not limited to the following: a. Ductwork through above grade floor slabs. � b. Ductwork through rated walls and partitions. c. Ductwork through vertical shafts such as chases. I � , d. Voids around ductwork and duct sleeves penetrating above grade floor slabs and fire rated partitions, fire wa11s ' and smoke walls. �' � 2. Manufacturer of materials shall specialize in the manufacture of , the products required for firestopping. � , 3. Provide manufacturers' certifications of all materials used for ; firestoppmg. � � � 4. All penetration methods sha11 be tested and listed in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory. -� ; I 5. Refer to Section 07270 for additional information and � � requirements for firestopping. � � F. Insulation: Where drawings and insulating specifications indicate that �' ducts are to be insulated, make provisions for neat insulation finish � azound damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access , , doors and similar operating devices. � , G. Counterflashing: Counterflash all ducts where they pierce the roof. H. Pitot Ports: � ;r ; � 1. Pitot ports for measuring airflow to be located in each main j ' supply duct at the downstream end of the straightest run of the � j main and before the first branch takeoff. I 2. Pitot ports to be formed by drilling 7/16" holes in the duct, lined � � up perpendicular to airflow on maximum 8" centers and at least , I three to a duct, evenly spaced. ' j 3. Holes in return and exhaust negative pressure ducts to be � ; plugged with plastic plugs. i i � � January 22, 1999 15890-11 98165.01 � i � 4. Holes in supply and relief positive pressure ducts to be covered - with gasketed screw-off type access caps equal to "Vent fabrics Ventlok #699 or #699-2". Provide access to these for future - !� balancing. � END OF SECTION . �� . � � � � � ,� � � � ,� � � January 22, 1999 � 15890-12 9�165.01 � � � � � i i SECTION 15910 � SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES � � . � � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED �� A. Balancing dampers. B. Access doors. � C. Air distribution registers, grilles and diffusers. 1.02 RELATED WORK , � A. Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � B. Section 15250: Insulation. ' � C. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure �' � ! 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE � , A. �ir Diffusion Council (ADC) certified ratings. � � B. Grilles, registers and diffusers to be tested in accordance with ASHRAE i ; Standard 70-1991 and ISO Standards 3741 and 5219. � � � � C. Coordinate the device frame type and mounting requirements with the � type of ceilings specified on the architectural drawings. � 1.04 SUBMITTALS ; A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 �, � (01300). , j B. Devices and dampers to be submitted and approved before starting '� ! ' installation. � � 2. ' PA.RT - 2 PRODUCTS 1' ; , 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS � A. Air Distribution products: � I � i 1. Titus. ; 2. Anemostat. � , i 3. Krueger. � 4. MetalAire. � � I � i � I � January 22, 1999 15910-1 98165.01 i S i � 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Manual Balancing Dampers �, 1. Hand operated butterfly type dampers to be galvanized steel, 18 U.S. gauge or heavier. � 2. Dampers for ducts up to 12" depth and 12" diameter to be one blade on a 3/s" round steel rod mounted inside of duct without frame. ,�` 3. Fit damper with locking type quadrant with position indicator and brass end bearing plate drilled and secured to duct. � 4. Dampers for ducts over 12" depth to be multi-blade type: " a. , 12" maximum blade width up to 30" blade length. � b. 10" maximuxn blade width over 30" blade length. c. Mount blades on frame with brass sleeve bearings, �� interconnected for operation from one locking type hand � quadrant. B. Duct Access Doors � , 1. Ruskin ADH24 (low pressure service), Ruskin ADHP-3 (anedium - and high pressure service) and Ductmate (round and oval ducts) �� , insulated doors in ductwork, floors, walls, ceilings or casings for equipment service at the following locations: � a. Automatic dampers � b. Fire dampers c. Smoke dam ers � . P d. Duct-mounted smoke detectors � e. Entering airside of duct coils • f. Other locations noted on drawings. � 2. Refer to Section 15050 for wall and ceiling access panels. � '� � � January 22, 1999 15910-2 98165.01 � � � � i � ' �� i 3. Access door size at all fire, smoke and combination dampers shall be as follows: � � DUCT SIZE ACCESS DOOR � 12" to 20" 12" x 12" � 22" to 36" 18" x 18" � 3 8" and up 24" x 24" � I ; I ,� I 4. Doors to be double panel construction, using two sheets of 24 I i gauge galvanized steel with one inch thick insulation between panels. � �' � 5. Mount doors in a rigid frame of at least 22 gauge formed , galvanized steel or aluminum. � 6. Use angle iron bracing as required to make the door frame a rigid assembly. � 7. For installations in medium and high pressure ducts, provide � pressure-rated access doors for operating pressures up to 6" w.g. , 8. Hinge or cam type access doors with positive closing, tight � ; sealing and easily operated latches. I , i 9. Provide factory identification labels at all concealed access doors � , to identify fire dampers and combination fire-smoke dampers. i 10. Latches: � a. Doors up to and including 16" high: One latch. � b. Doors 17" to 48": Two latches and inside release handle. � c. Doors over 48" high: Three cam-action door latches with compression levers. �� ; 11. Gaskets: Sponge rubber (all doors). � �I C. Aluminum Ceiling Return & Exhaust Registers � � 1. Titus Model SOF with opposed blade dampers at locations designated by letters "R.A","RB", "EA","EB", etc. with concealed I screw mounting. No face screws allowed in finished areas. �, ; i 2. '/z" Aluminum grid. � � 3. Finish: Off-white baked enamel. � ; 4. Border Type 1 for surface mounting. i j � ,� i , ' � , � January 22, 1999 15910-3 98165.01 I � � � 5. Refer to Architectural plans for ceiling type in each area. 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Sheet metal specialty items to be installed in locations as shown on � drawings. B. Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's published � recommendations as well as applicable sections of SMACNA m�nual. C. Additional installation costs associated with dampers requiring special � framing or drywall work to satisfy manufacturer's installation requirements sha11 be the responsibility of the submitting contractor. D. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, required for attaching sheet�metal �� ' specialty items to duct, walls, floors and ceilings. E. Items to be installed approximately as shown on drawings taking into � ' account differences.in mechanical equipment submitted and that shown on contract documents. F. Each item to be installed not to interfere with other adjacent items and ,� be readily accessible for maintenance, repair and/or setting and balancing. - G. Refer to drawings for diffuser, sidewall registers, sizes and number of � airflow directions. ' � END OF SECTION ,� � � ;� � � � �� January 22, 1999 15910-4 9a165.01 � I � ; � � � � � SECTION 15971 �I � � i � � �, CONTROLS - PNEUMATIC i '�� 1. ; PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: All relays, switches and interlocks required to � accomplish automatic control sequence indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK: Section 15010: General Mechaiucal Provisions. � 1.03 SYSTEl� DESCRIPTION � � A. Include ALL electrical and pneumatic interlocks, relays, EP switches, � � PE switches, ON-OFF and HOA switches, panels, pilot lights, homs, �i � , alarms, LEDs and other devices as required to accomplish automatic control of the mechanical systems. � B. Verify proper operation of actuators and interlocks to control all smoke , , and combination fire/smoke dampers with their respective air handling � unit zone. , I ; C. Calibrate and verify proper operation of actuators, valve and thermostat I i to e�sting reheat coil serving the renovated area. , D. Refer to drawings for details. � 1.04 SUBMITTALS �I �II � � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300). ' B. Com lete sho drawin s of entire control system. P P g � � C. Composite wiring diagrams inciicating equipment interlocks. � 1 D. Pneumatic control diagrams indicating panels, gauges, control components, spring ranges and set points. � E. Written sequence of operation for each control system. � � � � j 1.05 WARRANTY � i A. At completion of final test of installation and acceptance by Architect, � ` ; provide any service incidental to proper performance of control system ; for a period of one year. i i I B. Control system to be free from defects in workmanship and material ' � � under normal use and service for a period of one year. � �� ' C. Guarantee period not to start until sequence of operation has been satisfactorily demonstrated to Architect and Owner's representative. � I � January 22, 1999 15971-1 98165.01 � � 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Control system to be installed and checked out by factory-trained � technicians skilled in the setting and adjustment of temperature controls used in this project. B. All control system components shall be by the same manufacturer. � C. Mechanics to be experienced in the type controls associated with this ;� system. D. At final observation control tradesman to demonstrate the entire , sequence of operation for all systems to the Architect. �� E. Architect to observe function of entire control system, observe temperature control operations, damper positions and other funciions , necessary to' assure that temperature control system is operating as � ', intended by mechanical design. F. Final acceptance of system sha11 not occur until sequence of operation ,, ' checkout has taken place and been certified by Architect. G. The control tradesman to return to job during the opposite seasan to � verify operation of control system. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS � � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE CONTROL MANUFACTURERS A. Honeywell, Inc. , B. Johnson Controls, Ina � � C. Landis & Staefa. �i D. Trane Com an . � �� P Y , 2.02 EQUIPMENT � A. Room Thermostats 1. Two-pipe type with grad relay. 2. Top-of-line room thermostat with adjustable throttling range, - adjustable set point, dials calibrated in degrees Fahrenheit. � 3. Quiet operating with no objectional noises during normal . thermostat operation. 4. Covers to be fully concealed locking type (Tc) or type with � accessible, adjustable dial (T) and thermometer slot as indicated on drawings. 5. Ad'ustable thermostats shall not re uire the use of an tool to '�' J q Y change the set point. 6. Color to be selected by Architect. � January 22, 1999 15971-2 98165.01 � � , I I � I , � i � I � ; , 7. Mount all thermostats 48" above fuush floor. 3. ! PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION A. _ Components � 1. Provide temperature controllers, motorized valves, relays, switch- es and related items, necessary to accomplish control sequence shown on drawings. �' 2. Install all components except as noted to the contrary. � � 3. Prepare composite wiring diagram showing all interlock wiring. ; 4. Coordinate interlock wiring shown on control drawings with Division 16 trade. � � , 5. Include ALL control wiring associated with the mechancial � systems. � B. Drawings and Layouts: � 1. Submit for a roval com lete sho drawin s of entire co pp p p g ntrol ' system before proceeding with installation. I'i � , 2. Provide sequence of operation written so that building engineer can read and under stand control scheme. ', 3. Frame as-built drawings under Plexiglas and placed in each respective equipment room. � , 4. All prints to be of "non-fadi.ng" print process such as blueprint, , ' black line Diazo or xerography. , � C. Electrical 1. Electrical control components except those items requiring piping or tubing connections to be furnished by Division 15 for � installation by other trades. � 2. Division 15 to designate mounting location to installing � i ; tradesman. II � � 3. Division 16 shall wire and connect ALL controls operating at I � i � , 50-volts or higher complete and in working order in accordance iwith approved wiring diagrams. � � 4. Division 15 shall wire and connect ALL controls operating � ; j � below 50-volts in accordance with approved wiring diagrams. � 5. Include ALL control wiring associated with the mechancial � system. ; � ; , ' � ; January 22, 1999 15971-3 98165.01 I � � �� D. Air Piping-Flame Retardant Polyethylene Tubing ` 1. Flame retardant polyethylene tubing equal to Plexco "Instube", �� may also be used for branch runouts to wall thermostats, sensors, actuators, control valves and automatic dampers (except smoke dampers) provided the length does not exceed 8 feet. � 2. All polyethylene tubing to wall thermostats must be confined within the wa11. � 3. Flame retardant tubing, where its use is specifically permstted in this specification, must be securely and regularly supportPd by ,� hangers, duct supports, piping supports, beams, joists, etc. Do not support tubing from conduit, sprinkler piping or medical gas piping. � 4. Under no circumstances is ol eth lene tubin to be routed p Y Y g � through fire rated walls, partitions, floors or shafts. Provide metal sleeves and firestop penetrations in accordance with Section 07270 and the U.L. Fire Resistance Directo . � � 5. Under no circumstances is polyethylene tubing to be used for � control tubing to automatic smoke dampers or combination fire/smoke dampers. Use continuous hard-drawn copper t�zbing I only. ' � 6. Under no circumstances is polyethylene tubing to be usea. as a component part of any smoke evacuation or smoke control � system. END OF SECTION ' � � ,� � ,� � January 22, 1999 15971-4 98165.01 i , � j � � I ' i � ; SECTION 15990 i TESTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS � � , � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED � A. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to mechanical contractor on placement of dampers and other devices to facilitate balancing of the system. � � B. Provide at least one job site visit during construction to observe sheet metal installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verify � ; placement and access to air and water balancing devices. Furnish a written report on observation visit and recommendations. C. Airside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in this � division. ; D. Waterside balancing of inechanical systems and equipment specified in � this division. ; ! E. Testing of inechanical systems and equipment to demonstrate proper operation. � ; I F. All work specified in this section to comply with the provisions of ' Section 15010. � ; � G. Submit a final copy of the balancing report to the Florida Agency for ; Health Care Administration (AHCA). � � ; 1.02 RELATED WORK I , A. ` Section 15010: General Mechanical Provisions. � � B. Section 15035: Testing Mechanical Systems. I � C. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods. � D. Section 15890: Sheet Metal Ductwork - Low Pressure. � 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE , � ; A. Procure services of an independent balance and testing agency, which ; ' specializes in balancing and adjusting of HVAC systems, to balance and ; � adjust water distribution systems, air moving equipment and air � � distribution systems specified in this division. B. Review construction documents and make written recommendations to � ; I mechanical contractor on placement of dampers and other devices. I i � i � � January 22, 1999 15990-1 98165.01 � � ' C. Provide at least one 'ob site visit durin construction to observe sheet J g metal installation, identify possible duct restrictions and to verif3r placement and access to air and water balancing devices. Furnish a � written report on observation visit and recommendations. D. Work performed to be under direct supervision of qualified technician. � E. Accurately calibrate and maintain instn.iments in good working arder during balancing and testing of systems. � 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written recommendations to Architect and Mechanical contractor � prior to start of construction on placement of dampers and other devices to facilitate balancing of the system. - B. Submit written report during construction on sheet metal insta�lation, � _ identification of possible duct restrictions, placement of air and vaater balancing devices and access to these balancing devices. . � C. Submit air balance and testing agency for approval in accordance with Section 01340 (01300) including qualifications and sample balancing � report forms. 2. PART - 2 PARTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 BALANCING AGENCY A. Certified member of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB. �� B. Submit 7 copies of proposed reporting format and submittal data prior - to starting balancing and adjusting of HVAC systems. r C. Perform work, compile data and submit 3 copies of completed balance report for evaluation and approval upon completion. � D. Within 90 days after completion of work, Engineer may requesf a recheck or resetting of outlet, supply air fan or exhaust fan as listed in .� report. Provide technicians to assist in making tests and adjustments during this period of time. � 3.02 GENERAL TESTING � A. The renovation and adjacent areas are served by existing air handling unit AHU-2 and return fan RF-1. � 1. In areas outside of the renovation, rebalance the air distribution devices which are to remain to predemolition air quantities. -- 2. Provide a final report to the architect when the constructian is � completed. B. Test a11 systems and equipment installed under this division to � demonstrate proper operation. January 22, 1999 15990-2 98165.01 ` � � , � - ; C. Place HVAC systems and equipment into operation and continue ,, operation during each working day of balancing and adjusting. , 3.03 AIRSIDE BALANCING PHASE � A. Adjust fan RPM to design requirements. ' B. Record motor full load amperes. ,� C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and adjust fans to design airflow rates. � D. Record system operating.static pressures, suction and discharge. E. Record entering and leaving air temperatures: � ;' 1. Dry-bulb cooling. 2. Wet-bulb cooling. ' ' 3. Dry-bulb heating. � ' F. Adjust main and zone supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper � II design CFM. ' G. Adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design airflow. � H. Identify and record readings for each grille, diffuser and register , ! including location and area served. � � I. Identify and list tested equipment, size, type and manufacture of diffusers, grilles and registers. � � J. Use manufacturer's ratings on equipment to make required calculations. � ' K. Include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM , and test resultant CFM after adjustments on readings and tests of diffus- � , ers, grilles and registers. � L. Set automatic dampers to operate as specified. � M. Check controls for proper calibrations and sequencing. , N. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts. � � O. Check air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke detector. Verify that � . the minimum velocity recommended by the smoke detector i ; manufacturer's installation instructions is present. If the required , , i � velocity is not present, contractor sha11 relocate to obtain necessary air I I i velocity. ' � I P. Contractor to make changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or addition of � ! ' I dampers required for correct balance as recommended by Air Balance , Agency. ' � � � � � � , January 22, 1999 15990-3 98165.01 I� � 1 Q. On existirig air handlers, return fans and exhaust fans, contractor shall make changes in pulleys and belts required for conect balance of � existing system. 3.04 WATERSIDE BALANCING , � A. Terminal heating coils: 1. Set air handling unit discharge temperature for 53�F. � 2. Set heating supply water temperature for 180�F. 3. Verify airflow settings at fan coil units and reheat coils. � 4. Measure discharge air temperature and leaving water tempera- ture. � 5. Adjust leaving air temperature to scheduled setting at design water temperature drop using the coil balancing valve. , 6. Place ALL reheat coils associated with the renovated floar on , call for full heating and adjust zone flow rates. B. Proceed to balance each hot water coil using flow measuring devices. � C. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustment at coils, mark settings and record data. � 3.05 FINAL BALANCING PHASE A. Record and check following items at each heating element: � 1. Inlet and leaving water temperaiures. 2. Pressure drop of each coil. � �� B. List water meteruig device readuigs. 3.06 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT � � A. Furnish a 3 copies of written general report on operational checkout, including the following: .� ' 1. Temperature readings taken in each area controlled by a thermostat. 2. Check final air velocity across each duct-mounted smoke � detector. Verify that the minimum velocity recommended by the smoke detector manufacturer's installation instructions is present. � If detectors are equipped with a visual air flow wheel, verify that wheel is operating properly. 3. Airside and waterside temperature readings across each coil. � 4. Waterside entering and leaving pressures across each coil. 5. RPM, voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps on each � motor. January 22, 1999 15990-4 9�165.01 � , ' I , i ! I ' � �� - , � 6. RPM, voltage, nameplate rated amps and actual amps, static , pressure, CFM, FPM, on each fan. ' 7. Check systems for proper operation of equipment, controls, � interlocks and safeties on both heating and cooling cycles. 8. Operate systems for five days and instruct Owner's represent- � ative in operation of systems. ' 9. Furnish written report on checkout. � 10. Report on procedure followed in making operational checkout on air and water systems. � � 11. Statement signed by Owner stating operating instructions have been received. � 3.07 ACCEPTANCE � I A. The following items are to be completed BEFORE requesting a fmal � inspection. � , 1. All work required under this division of specifications except as . � permitted by Engineer. � 2. System balancing. ' 3. Control system checkout. � ' , 4. Furnish required operating instructions to owner. � ! 5. Furnish wiring diagrams, pneumatic and/or electric control ' , diagrams and mount one copy of each in the equipment rooms. � � B. Job will be accepted on basis of tests and inspections. ' ; C. After final test and balance report has been accepted, provide locations � i of a11 test ports in ducts to mechanical insulator. See Section 15250. , D. A representative of balancing agency is to be present to assist I' � during final inspection. , E. Furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, make any adjustments � and assist with fmal inspection. � i � � . � � i END OF SECTION � � � ; � ; � . ' ' i , � ; f January 22, 1999 15990-5 98165.01 � I . � , CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST � The following checklist must be completed by the General Contractor and the appropriate subcontactors and returned to the Engineer at least two days prior to the Final or phased final � on-site Observation visit. A fmal observation visit will not made until this systems checklist is totally complete. If listed systems are not complete during fmal or phased final observation trip, contractor will be billed for field engineer's time and expenses for the trip. � . � MECHANICAL SYSTEMS TESTING ---------------------------------------------=------------------------------ � -------------------------------------- SYSTEM TYPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.C. Sup ---------------------------------------------------------------DATE-----------APPROVAL � Air Handling Units 1. Automatic shutdown on general fire alarm � 2. Automatic shutdown from devices within F.A. zone. (i.e. pull stations, smoke detectors, flow switch, etc) � 3. Automatic shutdown from device in adjacent F.A. zone where crossovers occur. (i.e. pull stations, smoke det, flow switches, etc.) Fire & Fire/Smoke Dampers � 1. Verify sleeve clearances (1/B" per foot & max of 1") . � 2. Verify proper angle overlap (1" min on wall) . 3. Breakaway joints (NO screws) . 4. Verify smoke damper operation on shutdown. � EYre Penetrations 1. Pipe sleeves firesafed or caulked. 2. Non-sleeved services: insulation stopped & � penetration sealed. Air Balance (Complete balance or pressure relationships) : � 1. Complete air balance and report. 2. Soiled areas under negative pressure. 3. Sensitive areas under positive pressure. � � � _ 1 � _ � SECTION 16010 , ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED � ' A. Materials, labor and equipment required to furnish and install a � complete electrical system as indicated on Drawings and specified � herein. B. Complete electrical distribution system and materials including: � 1. Transient voltage surge protectors 2. Lighting � 3. Power 4. , Control Switches � 5. Receptacles 6. Feeders � 7. Branch circuits 8. Lighting fixtures �� C. Grounding. D. Fire alarm and detection system modifications. � E. Division 16 trade sha11 coordinate with General Contractor such that verification takes place that all required connections of Division 15 � equipment have been provided for prior to bid. Excluded items shall be documented and documentation forwarded to Architect prior to bid. F. Power wiring for equipment furnished under Division 15 including � installing and connecting starters, furnished under Division 16 at location designated by Division 15 trade. Division 16 to coordinate � with Division 15 tradesman for proper sizing of circuit breakers, fuses, overloads, condurt, and wiring on all equipment actually being fixrrushed under Division 15 prior to rough-in or bid. Division 16 will pra��ide � necessary sizes as required at no additional cost to the Owner. L�ivision 16 trade will coordinate with fmal Division 15 equipment and include a11 necessary power connections recommended by Division 15 � equipment manufacturers in the Division 16 contract. _ � January 22, 1999 16010-1 9�3165.01 , , i ' � � � � G. All 120-volt control and interlock wiring and associated conduit for Division 15 equipment shall be provided under Division 16 as defined , i in the Division 15 specifications and drawings. Install control � components furnished under other divisions including but not limited to , controllers, relays, thermostats, etc. necessary for a completely ' ' operational system under Division 16 contract. Division 16 shall � coordinate quantity and location of duct-mounted smoke detectors with , Division 15 documents (specifications, duct risers, control schematics, etc.) and include in base bid. � , H. Where substitutions are made by Division 15 trade, the cost for any Division 16 rough-in relative to the substitution will be the � ; responsibility of the Division 15 trade unless written documentation is provided five days prior to bid which notifies the Division 16 trade of � such substitutions. Division 16 trade shall notify the Division 15 trade I � ; of this requirement ten days prior to bid in writing. � I. Exact locations of outlets for owner-furnished equipment or equipment � furnished under other Divisions must conform with manufacturer's � � , � rough-in drawings. I � J. Demolition to conform with demolition notes on drawings. i ' ; K. Communications to conform with respective sections of these ' specifications and communications vendor drawings. � , 1.02 RELATED WORK I ; A. Furnish tlie following work as specified under other Divisions of these , � I Specifications, but coordinate with other trades prior to bid. � 1. Section 09900: Painting. i 2. Section 01045: Cutting and patching. � 3. Section 01340: Sho Drawin s Product Data. P g � � 4. Section 01620: Storage and Protection. � 1.03 DEFINITIONS � A. Wiring: Wire and cable, installed in raceway with all required boxes, fittings, connectors, etc. completely installed. I I � i B. Provide: Furnish, install and connect, and put in good working order. i � C. Engineer: Engineer of record whose seal is affixed to the contract � � specifications and/or drawings of Division 16. i � � � � � i ' � � � . ,, January 22, 1999 16010-2 98165.01 I ! i i 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. In general all equipment shall be furnished with U.L. label where such � label is available. Where equipment cannot be furnished with ti.L. label, specific mention shall be made in the submittal for that particular item of equipment indicating that it is not U.L. labeled. Install �J.L. �� labeled equipment in conformance with applicable U.L. Standarcls. B. Install electrical work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, � edition of NEC in effect at project location, recommendations of NFPA, state and local electrical and building codes and special codes h�ving jurisdiction over specific portions of work. This includes, but is not � limited to the following: 1. Chapter 59A-3, F.A.C., Hospital Licensure (Revised 7/97). � � 2. Chapter 4A-3.014, F.A.C., State of Florida Fire Preventic�n Code (April 3, 1995). 3. 1993 National Electrical Code with applicable local amendments. � 4. 1994 Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. � 5. 1997 Standard Building Code with applicable local amendments. 6. 1996-1997 U.S. Department of Health and Human Servic�s � Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities. � 7. Florida Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Implementation � Act (October l, 1993) as described in Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, Department of Community Affairs (October, 1997). � 8. All currently adopted 1994 National Fire Code Standards including but not limited to: � NFPA-13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (1994). � NFPA-72, Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Local Protective Signaling Systems or the National Fire �.larm Code (1993). � NFPA-90A, Standazd for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems (1993). � NFPA-90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning (1993). NFPA-91, Standard for the Installation of Exhaust Systerr�s for � Air Conveying Materials (1992). � January 22, 1999 16010-3 98165.01 , � , � f � I � NFPA-99, Standard for Health Care Facilities (1993). � , NFPA-110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems ' (1993). � C. In event of conflict between national, state, and/or local codes, the more stringent of the code requirements shall be followed. � D. In event of conflict between Drawings, Specifications and such codes, notify Architect in writing prior to bid. A ruling will then be made by � Architect in writing. E. Obtain permits and certificates of approval from all authorities having jurisdiction over the installation and pay all fees required for scope of � , work being done. 2. ; PART - 2 PRODUCTS (No products specified under this Section) � 3. , PART - 3 EXECUTION � , 3.01 SUBMITTALS ; A. Submit list of materials and equipment prior to manufacturer, order or � installation and within 20 days after award of contract for approval. In- � clude each item of material and equipment whether or not shop ' drawings are also required. Include in list manufacturer's name, catalog � � number and other complete identification, as well as dimensions and I detailed data. � � B. Submit seven sets of specification sheets, blue line prints or data sheets � for the following items, bound and identified according to Drawings and Specifications. Mark reproducibles and return for proper distribution. ; � Include a separate submittal section or brochure for each product listed � � below with all sections or brochures submitted at the same time in one � package. The first sheet in each product section or brochure to � summarize and list all components, manufacturer's name and catalog � � number. j Submittals to include, but not be limited to, the following: � � 1. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors i � � ; ; 2. Lighting Fixtures including ballasts and lamps _ iI 3. Wiring devices and plates � 4. Individually mounted Circuit Breakers � ' S. Fuses 1 i ; 6. Fire Alarm and Detection system � � ; ; January 22, 1999 16010-4 98165.01 � � C. Affix stamp of approval on certified shop drawings and submittals as evidence that Drawings have been checked. Drawings submitted � without this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned for proper resubmission. D. If submittals show variances from requirements of Contract, make � specific mention of such variation in letter of transmittal in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment. � E. Contractor is not relieved of responsibilrty for executmg work in accordance with Contract even though such submittals have bee� approved. � F. If shop drawings/submittals are returned and stamped "Rejected, Revise and Resubmit," resubmit with appropriate corrections made to th;, shop � drawings/submittals. G. If the shop drawings or submittals must be resubmitted a second time, the cost of the Architect's tirne to review the second resubmittal is paid � ' by the Contractor based on the Architect's published hourly rates. 3.02 SITE VISIT � A. Visit job site prior to bid date to determine acival conditions un�er which work shall be done, to familiarize oneself with proj ect anc to � verify total scope of"work required. B. Failure to do so does not constitute a reason for an extra charge. 3.03 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS SHUTDOWN: Contractor shall notify the lacal Fire ' . Department and Hospital Staff prior to any shutdown of Hospital Life Safety Systems such as Fire Alarm System, Emergency Power Generation System, or Medical Gas Alarm System. � � 3.04 JOB OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS: Contractor shall provide written response to each comment on job observation reports prior to the sched�ling of � the next job observation. � _ � � � r January 22, 1999 16010-5 98165.01 � , 1 ; � � � 3.05 FINAL OBSERVATION: Contractor shall verify Life Safety related systems � � are ready for final testing one week prior to scheduled visrt by j ArchitecturaUEngineering construction observation team and confirm in writing. ' Written certification must be provided by the fire alarm system manufacturer _ and the emergency generator manufacturer that their systems have been completely checked and tested and that they meet all code requirements as well � as the requirements of the plans and specifications. Should the Contractor fail to send written confirmation arxd the manufacturers' certifications, the team shall not be sent. Should the Contractor send the confirmation, and upon � arriving at the jobsite, the team fmds the job is not ready, the team shall leave the job and the Contractor shall be required to pay a11 costs to owner for delays , in occupancy of facility and all costs to A/E team including expenses and time 1 ; which sha11 be billed hourly including travel time. Refer to the general electrical notes on contract documents for what is required for Life Safety Final Observation. i � j END OF SECTION � � r , ' i , 1 � 1 � 1 � 1 � � � 1 � , � �� 1� � ' . 1� � - � � 1 � � ' January 22, 1999 16010-6 98165.01 ' ' SECTION 16050 . � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Use products for work in this S ection produced only by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of � similar items and with history of successful production acceptable to Architect. - B. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled warkmen � who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed � for proper performance of work of this Section. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS � A. Refer to Section 01600 for requirements. ' B. Where specifications list one or more manufacturers and do not include "or equivalent", furnish materials made by one of manufacturers listed (no substitutions will be permitted). Where "or equivalent" is included, ' the Contractor's bid sha11 be based on the specified manufacturer{s), but the Contractor may submit after the bid date equivalent products by another manufacture'r subject to approval by the Engineer. If the � Contractor bases his bid on a manufacturer other than the specified � manufacturer(s), he does so at his own risk, since the unspecified manufacturer may not be approved. � C. Architect must approve substitution before purchase, fabrication, andlor installation. Extensions of the contract time will not be allowed due to � delays caused by rejection(s) of proposed substitution. D. If unapproved materials are installed, work required to remove and � replace unapproved items will be done at Contractor's expense. E. Include any and all additions or deductions needed in Division 1� contract for a11 changes to project required by substitutions under other � trades. Include changes to work furnished under other Divisions with proposal to make said substitutions as an add to the Division 16 contract. Where related cost is not included in approved substitute � proposal, the substituting trade will assume all such expense which will ' not be considered an extra charge to the owner. F. Owner reserves right to reject substitutions proposed. .� January 22, 1999 16050-1 9�165.01 � �I � I ' i 1 � � 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 1NSTALLATION � ' ; ! A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Do not scale for exact sizes or locations. Drawings are not intended to disclose absolute or unconditional knowledge of actual field conditions. � B. Be prepared to relocate any outlet or device 6 feet in any direction without additional charge to the Owner prior to wall, ceiling, or floor finish materials being installed or after they have been installed, if , Architect's approval has not been obtained. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING � I A. Refer to Section 01045 for general requirements of cutting and patching. B. Satisfactorily repair or reinove and replace damaged work with new � materials. ; 3.03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS � A. Refer to Section 01620 for general storage and protection requirements. , B. Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, 1 � labeled conta.iners. C. Store fenous materials to prevent rusting. Store finished materials and � equipment to prevent staining and discoloring. ■ D. Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of water � and dirt. , I E. Cap conduit during installation. , � F. Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. � 3.04 COORDINATION � A. Failure to route conduit, etc. through building without interfering with � other equipment and construction does not constitute a reason for an extra charge. � B. Locate equipment, conduit and fixtures as required to fit into available � spaces in building. � � '� C. Do not introduce electrical work into building at such times and manner � , � as to cause damage to structure. ' D. Make equipment requiring service readily accessible. � I �' ; 3.05 FIRESTOPPING AND SEALING ' A. Seal around conduits or other wiring materials also passing through � ' partitions which extend to the underside of the slab above, and those � � passing through rated walls in accordance with Architectural details � and/or specifications. � ! January 22, 1999 16050-2 98165.01 � � B. Use material approved for use by local authorities to prevent passage of smoke or fire and in accordance with architectural specifications. � � 3.06 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT SERVICING A. Install complete electrical system entirely free from improper grounds � and short and open circuits. Make all required tests on conductors before energizing circuit and document in accordance with NFpA-7p and NFPA-99 requirements. � B. Perform patient bed vicinity grounding systems voltage and impedance tests as per NFPA-99. � C. Make test to insure that entire system is in proper operating condition, and that adjustments and setting of apparatus (circuit breakers, fiises, control equipment, etc.) have been made. Conect any defects � discovered in system during tests as�required to meet with Arclv.�ect's approval. � D. Turn equipment over to Owner in lubricated condition with insh:.�ction on further lubrication included in operating instructions. E. Also instruct O�vner on proper usage, care and maintenance of entire , electrical system including all special systems or apparatus. F. At termination of work under this Division, furnish Owner six complete � bound sets of equipment catalog sheets, manufacturer's specifications and service and operating instructions on equipment furnished under this Division. � 3.07 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS A. Remove surplus materials and debris caused by, or incidental to, , electrical work. B. Remove such debris at frequent intervals (minimum of one clean-up day � per week). Keep job clean during constntction. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT , A. Identify the following electrical equipment with laminated plastic nameplates, engraved with 1/4" high letters: 1. Communications cabinets � 2. Individually mounted circuit breakers B. Provide black nameplates with white letters except nameplates for � essential electrical system panelboards, etc. to be red with white letters. C. Attach all nameplates to metal enclosure and coverplates (where '� applicable) using two screws or pop rivets. Nameplates attached with adhesive or Dymo (tape-on) labels are not acceptable. � January 22, 1999 16050-3 9E165.01 , � . , I � 3.09 RECORD DRAWINGS: Maintain one set of blue line electrical prints on site, marked to show as-built conditions and installations. All information recorded � on record prints sha11 be transferred by Division 16 Trade to a mylar � reproducible following completion of construction. As-built mylars to be turned over to Owner within four weeks of date job is complete and fmal approval is obtained. � 3.10 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide, maintain and remove after construction is completed, temporary ' lighting adequate for workman safety and temporary power for all trades. � , B. Provide, all necessary components for a complete temporary electrical system in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 305 and OSHA standard requirements including but not limited to the following: ' 1. Services � 2. Feeders , ' 3. Branch circuits 4. Receptacles - minimum of one 20amp, 120V duplex type device ' ! for each 1000 ft2 of renovated or new space. ( 5. Lamps with protective wireguards - minimum of one 150 watt i pigtail for each 500 square feet of new or renovated space. � 6. Grounding � 7. Ground fault protection (a11 120V. receptacles used by � construction crews sha11 be ground fault protected). , 8. Provide documented assured equipment grounding conductor ' program in accordance with NEC 305-6(b). � 9. Guarding of high voltage equipment to be maintained in 1 ' accordance with NEC 305 requirements. C. Owner to pay utility cost. � 3.11 POWER OUTAGES � � A. Coordinate all power outages with Owner and submit for approval �� proposed schedule of work indicating extent, number and length of � ; i outages required to perform work. � ; B. Include in bid cost of overtime labor required for power outage to occur � � � after Owner's normal hours of operation. , � � 'i i � ' ; Jarivary 22, 1999 16050-4 98165.01 � � 3.12 OTHER MATERIALS A. Work of this Division also includes those items not specifically � mentioned or described, but which are obviously necessary to conform to the design intent, applicable codes and to produce a complete � electrical system that functions properly. , B. Materials as selected by Contractor are subject to approval of A.rchitect. 3.13 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY � A. Guarantee work to be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of building by , authorities having jurisdiction, Architect, and Owner. B. Repair and replace defective work and other work damaged thereby � which becomes defective during term of Guarant�e-Warranty. C. Furnish Owner with three written copies of Guarantee-Warranty. � � END OF SECTION , , � ' � . � ' , ' ' � � January 22, 1999 16050-5 98165.01 � i ' � I SECTION 16111 � � ' CONDUIT � � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED � A. Conduit B. Conduit Fittings , I 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions ' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � 01340. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS � , 2.01 CONDUIT � A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Allied, Triangle, Wheatland or ' I equivalent. B. Flexible Steel Conduit (Greenfield): Electriflex, Alflex, International � Metal Hose, or equivalent. ' i � 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS ' A. Couplings and Connectors: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Thomas & � ' Betts(Steel City), Ra.co, or equivalent. � , B. Bushings: Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Raco, Thomas & Betts, or ' equivalent. C. Straps and Hangers: B-Line, Caddy, Minerallac, Raco Thomas & Betts, � or equivalent. � � I � D. Group Pipe supports: B-line, Thomas & Betts, Unistrut, or equivalent. � '�I E. Expansion Fittings: O.Z. Gedney Type AX or equivalent by Appleton, � � � or equivalent. i �� ; F. Exposed Conduit Fittings: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O.Z. Gedney, ' ; � Thomas & Betts or equivalent. j 3. ' PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 CONDUIT USAGE ; A. Interior conduit exposed: use only EMT. , � � i ; January 22, 1999 16111-1 98165.01 , � B. Conduit concealed in walls or above ceilings: use only EMT. C. Use short pieces, approximately 2 feet of flexible conduit to connect � motors and other devices subject to motion and vibration. Plastic flexible conduit materials are not acceptable in any applications. D. Use of type "MC", "NM", "AC", etc. prefabricated cable is not � '� acceptable unless specifically referenced in these specifications ar on the �, drawings. � I E. Minimum conduit size %2" unless otherwise required by system. I 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION , A. In general, conduit installation to follow layout shown on drawings. However, this layout is diagrammatic only and where changes arv � necessary due to structural conditions, other apparatus or other causes, such changes will be made without cost to Owner. Offsets in co nduits I are not indicated and must be furnished as required. , B. Route exposed conduit and conduits installed above removable lay-in ceilings at right angles or parallel to walls of building, not "as the crow , flies". Neatly rack parallel conduits together and make bends uniform to one another. Where installation is made inferior utilizing poor practice contrary to these methods, said installation will be removed and � reinstalled at Contractor's expense. C. Use proper sized tools for bending. Do not heat conduit. Dents and flat spots will be rejected. Cut and thread conduit so ends will butt in , couplings. Make threads no longer than necessary and ream pipe free of burrs. D. Color-code essential electrical system conduits by painting each coupling , in accordance with NEC and General Electrical Notes on drawings. E. Leave one #10 or equivalent nylon pull wire in empty conduits. ' 3.03 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. When installed concealed in wa11s or above ceilings, for sizes 1" a.nd � smaller, use steel single set screw connectors and steel couplings with two set screws. For sizes larger than 1", use steel double set screw � connectors and steel couplings with four set screws. B. Use throated insulating bushing on all connectors. C. Diecast connectors and couplings are not acceptable. ' D. Provide plastic bushings for all feeder and branch conduit applications. 3.04 CONDUIT SUPPORT AND INSTALLATION , A. Support conduit vertically and horizontally by straps or hangers. Do not � exceed the intervals as described in NEC Section 348-12 for EMT. January 22, 1999 16111-2 9�165.01 � � � , ' ' � � � i i B. Use expansion fittings, properly bonded to assure ground continuity, ' across expansion joints in floors and ceilings. C. When connections are made to motors or other equipment, not near � � ' walls or columns, provide a vertical conduit� II11T1ITYLUlI1 3�4�� attached to � floor with a floor flange, bring wiring out of this conduit by means of a � , ; condulet and flexible conduit extending to equipment junction box. � D. Condurt shall be supported independently and not be supported from � � ductwork, ductwork flanges, piping, other conduits or raceways, or I � � cables. ' � END OF SECTION � • � ' � ' i � � , � , ; � ,I � ' , � � ' � i � � I ' � , � � , i � i , � � � i I � ' ' � � I ' ' 16111-3 98165.01 , , January 22, 1999 � ' � � , i � � , � SECTION 16113 � � � WALL AND CEILING RACEWAY SYSTEMS , 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Wa11 and ceiling duct in locations where required by � � drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340. � , � B. Submit dimensioned shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS I � � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Provide duct as manufactured by Square ' "D", Wa.lker, or equivalent in lengths and sizes set forth on the electrical � drawings, and/or imaging equipment vendor drawings. ' I 2.02 WALL AND CEILING DUCT � A. Use flush-mounted trim for wall applications and provide lay-in surface � ; wireway with removable covers for above ceiling applications and surface wall applications. � � B. Provide compartment divider of 14-gauge steel, fully adjustable to underside of cover with minimum 1/2-inch wide shelf at top with ; corkene gasket for longitudinal bearing of cover. � C. Provide finish of UL approved corrosion-resistant coating. � D. Use UL listed universal hangers for mounting of above ceiling lay-in , � wireways. � 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION , � I 3.01 INSTALLATION i I A. Refer to electrical drawings for dimensions and system configuration. ' � ', Furnish duct in lengths adaptable to installations shown on drawings. ! B. Provide duct systems and all applicable mounting hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. � � � END OF SECTION ' I , ; January 22, 1999 16113-1 98165.01 i i I ' ; � ' , � , SECTION 16120 , , ' i � � � WIRE AND CABLE , 1. 1 PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Wire and Cable � ' 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions , � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods ; 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data. for approval in accordance with Section ' , 01340. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS ' , 2.01 MATERIALS A. All wire and cable shall be manufactured within the United States of ' America. � B. Use stranded copper, Type THWN for feeder and power circuits #8 and ; larger only. Type "NM", "MC", "SE", "AC", etc. prefabricated cables ' �' are not acceptable. ' C. Use 600-volt wire and cable by Cablec, General Cable, Okonite, Rome, � i Triangle or Southwire unless otherwise noted on drawings. � � D. For line voltage control wiring, use #14 type THHN/THWN copper by ' � one of the manufacturers listed above. For low volta.ge control wiring i � use type wiring recommended by equipment manufacturer and as , required by applicable section of NFPA 70. E. Use solid copper type TH�-IN/THWN for branch circuit wiring #10 and , smaller only. Type "NM", "MC", "SE", "AC", etc., prefabricated cable � or stranded conductors are not acceptable. , F. Conductors for branch circuit wiring smaller than #12 are not ; i acceptable. , ' � � G. Provide fixture wire in accordance with Article 402 of the National I ; Electrical Code. � � H. Provide color-coded wire with a different color for each phase and • ! � neutral and ground as follows: ' 1. 120/208-volts circuits , ! ! a. phases A, B, and C: black, red and blue respectively � � � b. neutral: white I ' � ' � Jarivary 22, 1999 16120-1 98165.01 � , � � c. ground: green. 2. 277/480-volt circuits � a. phases A, B, and C: brown, orange, yellow respectively b. neutral gray � c. ground: green. I. Approved color tape is acceptable for feeders only. Branch circ�ait � conductors shall have color-coded insulation. Also provide colox-coded wire for control circuits. � J. Use Scotchlok or ldeal wire connectors for #14 through #8 conductors. Use Burndy or equivalent by T & B, compression connectors with crimpit cover, type CC, for #6-600 MCM conductors. � K. VJhere branch circuit homeruns exceed 70 feet in length for 120-volt and 150 feet in length for 208-volt or 277-volt, use No. 10 wire; or as ' otherwise required to prevent voltage drop in excess of 3% as allowed by N.E.C., to first outlet. 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Complete conduit system before pulling any wire or cable. Use only , approved cable lubricants (such as soapstone) as necessary. B. Install conductors continuously from outlet to outlet or to branch circuit ' overcurrent devices. C. Make splices only in junction boxes. Splices made in panelboarcls are � not acceptable. No more than a single conductor shall be terminated at each circuit breaker screw, this shall also be considered a splice. D. Leave sufficient slack at terminations to make proper connections. , E. Connect No. 10 wire and smaller with Type R, 3M Scotchlock t�.peless connectors or equivalent. ' F. Connect No. 8 wire and larger with Lock-Tite type silicon bronze type connectors, T & B Series 35000 or 54000, or equivalent. Insulat� � connections of No. 8 wire and larger with 3M #33 tape. ' � ' i 2 1 9 16120-2 98165.01 I January 2 , 99 , 1 i � ' ; G. All single and multi-conductor cables being run exposed (not in conduit) sha11, as a minimum standard, be listed and appropriately labeled as being resistant to the spread of fire in accordance with applicable article ' of NFPA-70 (NEC). This requirement shall apply to a11 low-voltage, communications, alarm, etc. cable being installed. The listing of various systems cable installed by the Contractor shall be verified prior to , installation by Division 16 whether or not it is being furnished by him. Listings sha11 include the following: ' l. NEC Article 725 for Class 2 and Class 3 remote control, signalling, and power limited circuits (listed as Types "CL2, CL3, PLTC, CL2R, CL3R, CL2P and CL3P). , ! 2. NEC Article 770 for optical fiber cables (listed as Types "OFC", "OFN", "OFCR", "OFNR", "OFCP", and "OFNP"). ' ' 3. �NEC��Article 800 for�communication circuits (listed as Types � CM , CMR , and CMP ). � H. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrates a smoke , or fire rated wall, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve extended 1 foot ' on both sides of wall with nylon insulated bushing on both ends. Seal ' conduit inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant approved by local j authorities. I. All fire protective signalling.systems wiring shall be run in EMT ' I conduit and shall be listed per NEC, Article 760 (listing types "FPL", "FPLR", and "FPLP" and Table 760-51). All conductors shall be rated ' � for minimum of 300 volts with minimum size of#22(cu) solid i conductors or bunch-tinned (bonded) stranded copper including coaxial cables where used. 1 � J. Any non-power limited fire protective signalling systems wiring shall be run separately from any power limited circuits and any other building , wiring in separate EMT conduits and boxes. � � � ' , ! � i ' � I , ' � i 1 ' : � January 22, 1999 16120-3 98165.01 � , , � K. Where communications systems cables are run exposed above dropped ceilings, cables shall be run at right angles or parallel to the building � I lines and not "as the crow flies". Bundle cable together using n�Jlon straps and per NEC 300-11 (b). Support cable independent of other � conduit, ductwork, ductwork flanges and piping. Within each smoke � compartment, various systems shall be tagged and identified on 20 foot centers using nylon marker ties (Panduit STA-STRAP SSM series 'or equivalent). This includes cables for the following: ' - 1. Telephone system 2. Data processing system ' 3. Nurses call system • � � END OF SECTION � � , , , , ' , , ' , ' , ' , ' January 22, 1999 16120-4 98165.01 ' , I i I I � �' � I , � ; SECTION 16130 i ' OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Outlet Boxes ' B. Junction Boxes ' � 1.02 RELATED WORK � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions � � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods i C. Section 16140: Wiring Devices and Plates ; 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � i 01340. � , � ' 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ' A. Outlet and junction boxes constructed of galvanized steel by Appleton, Raco, or Steel City, 11/2" deep minimum. ' i B. Provide boxes for lighting fixtures with fixture studs in center. i, ' I� C. Provide outlet boxes for lighting, switches and receptacles in interior � areas with exposed conduit manufactured of pressed steel and in exterior ' ' � areas with exposed conduit use cast metal with threaded hubs, "FS" type. Use galvanized steel for concealed boxes. Provide receptacle � boxes with green (CL� grounding screw in accordance with detail in ' ' NFPA-99. Provide separate boxes where normal and emergency devices � (including switches) are mounted adjacent to each other (i.e. multi-gang � box with.metal divider is not acceptable). ' � 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION � � 3.01 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION , , ' � A. Securely anchor outlet boxes, set true and plumb and no part of box or ' cover to extend beyond finished wall or ceiling. ' � � B. Set flush-mounted boxes to within 1/s" of finished wall and use a plaster ring to make cover flush with wall. � C. Select boxes accordin to intended use and e of outlet. Provide ' g tYP ; ceiling outlet boxes 4" octagon in size and 1%2" deep. , , I January 22, 1999 16130-1 98165.01 � � � D. Use 21/s" deep octagon boxes or 4" square boxes where required. E. A fixture stud of no bolt, self-locking type is required at all ceiling � outlet boxes if needed to hang the fixture specified at the outlet. F. For receptacle and switch boxes installed in concrete block walls not � plastered, provide with Steel City, Appleton, Raco Series No. 6�0 through No. 699, or equivalent masonry boxes of proper depth and gang required and specifically designed for this purpose. � G. If more than two conduits enter box from one direction, use 4" �quare boxes with square-cut device covers not less than 1" deep specifically � designed for this purpose. H. Round edge plaster rings are not acceptable for block wa11s but �.re acceptable i:f wa11 is plastered. Sectional or gangable type outlet boxes , are not acceptable in any case, except drywall construction. I. Mount outlet boxes worked to nearest block course. ' � J. Coordinate location of device backboxes to prevent back-to-bacic mounting on any rated partition. Provide minimum of 24" spacing � between boxes on opposite sides of same wall within a common stud compartment or as otherwise required to maintain partition rating to satisfaction of local authorities. Openings for outlet boxes shall not , exceed a total of 100 inZ for each 100 ft2 of wall area. K. Where conduit is run overhead (either above dropped ceiling or exposed), outlet boxes shall be supported independently (i.e. by an all- ' thread rod) and not by the conduit system. L. Color code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with I�iEC ' and General Electrical Notes on drawings. M. Provide circuit numbers:using black permanent marker on covers of ' outlet boxes located above ceilings (or where exposed in areas without ceilings) indicating all c�rcurts bemg routed wrtlun said boxes. 3.02 TUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION ' A. Size junction boxes according to number of conductors in box or type of service to be provided. Minimum junction box size is 4-11/16" ' square and 21/a" deep. Provide screw covers for junction boxes. B. Use code gauge steel with screw covers for pull boxes, paint with prime coat and provide with screw cover. Size pull boxes according to NEC. , C. Provide pull box every 100 feet of conduit run or where excessive number of bends necessitates a box for ease of wire installation. ' ' January 22, 1999 16130-2 98165.01 , i � , I � � � � , , � D. Color-code essential electrical system boxes in accordance with NEC ' , � and General Electrical Notes on drawi.ngs. E. Provide circuit numbers using black permanent mazker on covers of , junction boxes indicating all circuits being routed within said boxes. , � ' i END OF SECTION ' { i � � ' , � I � ' � � 1 ' ' , I ( I 1 I � ' � � ' � 1 � � � � ; � I ' - � ' 1 �I � . � 1 � � � � ' Jariu 22 1999 1613�0-3 98165.01 i � ' ' , ' I � SECTION 16140 , ' WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Switches B. �Receptacles � � C. Plates . ' 1.02 RELATED WORK ' � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions i B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � � C. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes i 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � � ' ; 01340. 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS ' � 2.01 MATERIALS I A. Provide wiring devices and plates as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant, ' � Leviton, Pass & Seymour, General Electric, Arrow Hart or Eagle. 2.02 SWITCHES ' A. Use 15-amps, 120/277 volts, except for 120-volt circuits loaded greater than 1200 watts; use 20-amps. � Single Pole (15amp) Hubbell #1201-I ' (20amp) #1221-I ; ' Single Pole Hubbell #1201-R (emergency red) t � Three Way (15amp) Hubbell #1203-I � � t � (20amp) #1223-I , � Four Way (15amp) Hubbell #1204-I � j (20amp) #1224-I , ' � �� B. Install switches on lock side and clear of door frame a minimum of 3 . i Prior to rough-in, coordinate with architectural drawings to determine ! lockside of door. ' � � , I I i ! i January 22, 1999 16140-1 98165.01 � I _ � a , C. Provide incandescent dimmers (ivory-normal; red-emergency), by Lutron, Nova preset series or equivalent as manufactured by Lightolier � or Lithonia using decorator style dimmers with vertical linear slide actuators having positive ON/OFF switching action and solid state circuitry with built-in noise filters. Provide dimmers sized at 125% of � their connected wattage utilizing standard wattage units of 600, 1000, 1500, and 2000 as required by load. 2.03 RECEPTACLES � A. General Purpose: 1. 15-amp, 125 VAC: � a. Duplex type: � Hubbell #8200-I, ivory (Normal) (hospital grade to be us:,d in all � patient care areas.) � Hubbell #8200-R, red (emergency) (hospital grade, to be used in � all patient care areas). Hubbell #GF-8200-I,(Normal), ivory (GF8200-R, emergency red) � ground fault hospital grade, to be used in all patient care areas. Hubbell #5252-I, ivory in all non-patient care areas of hospital. � Hubbell #5252-RDB, emergency red in all non-patient care areas � of hospital. Hubbell #GF-5252-I, ivory (ground fault interrupter type) in all � non-patient care areas of hospital. Hubbell #GF-5252-RDB, emergency red ground fault interrupter , type) in a11 non-patient care areas of hospital. 2. 20-amp, 125 VAC: ' a. Duplex type: Hubbell #5352-I, ivory Hubbell #5352-R, red , Hubbell #8300-I, Normal ivory ' Hubbell #8300-R, emergency red Specialty type (i.e. ground fault, isolated ground, �tc.) are ' to be same grade as called out under 15-amp device section above. b. Simplex type: , Hubbell #8310-I (Normal ivory) and #8310-R ' (Emergency red) in all areas shown on drawings and for use v�nth all (dedicated c�rcurt) eql.upment receptacles. January 22, 1999 16140-2 9�165.01 ' � � ' , i ! I ' � i � , Specialty type (i.e. ground fault, isolated ground, etc.) are to be same grade as called out under 15 amp device � section above. , B. Special Wiring Devices: 1. As indicated on drawings. � 2.04 PLATES A. Satin finish stainless steel: Hubbell (Series "A"), or equivalent in all ' rooms unless otherwise required to match existing devices in an existing room. ' , B. Provide cast alloy or stamped metal plates on all conduits and exposed devices (Hubbell 800 Series). C. Provide properly designed plates and covers when devices are installed � , in exposed boxes or conduit fittings. 3. , PART - 3 EXECUTION � , 3.01 INSTALLATION � A. Provide proper size outlet boxes for all wiring devices of types specified ' � � in outlet and junction box section of these Specifications. ' I B. Mounting: � i , � 1. In general, receptacles shall be mounted vertically with ground � prong on top. In special instances where receptacles are mounted horizontally, install the receptacle so that neutral prong ' � sha11 be on top. ; 2. � Work devices to nearest block course using proper type outlet ' , boxes. Check architectural and furniture drawings for counter (desk, special booth, etc.) locations. Mount devices above work counters where required. Verify other special mounting ' conditions and locate devices as required. C. Polarity: Properly wire all convenience outlets so that the hot wire, the � neutral wire and the ground wire connect to the proper ternunal on a11 ' receptacles. Prior to final job observation, the Contractor shall test I � every receptacle for reverse polarity and other inappropriate connection i i combinations. , D. Grounding: Install all convenience outlets in boxes specified in these I I specifications, and install a No. 12 green ground wire from device ' ; I grounding terminal to the grounding lug on box and from grounding lug �� to bus in the panelboard in accordance with diagram in NFPA-99 Health � Care Code. , ' I � � January 22, 1999 16140-3 98165.01 a ' ' E. Special Mounting Height Receptacles: 1. Install receptacles shown on the drawings as "special mounting ' height" at mounting height indicated on drawings. 2. Where no mounting height is given and receptacles are above ' counters (or casework), mount with centers 4" above top of counter backsplash. 3. Where special mounting height receptacles are not above � counters and no mounting height is indicated, receptacle mounting heights to match adj acent light switches or above t counter receptacles. 4. Coordinate the installation of all special mounfiing height receptacles with architectural design and owner requirements � prior to rough-in. . _ � . END OF SECTION 'I II � � , 1 , ' ' 1 ' January 22, 1999 16140-4 98165.01 ' ' I II I I , ( � SECTION 16160 1 I ; � � 1 PANELBOARDS , 1. PART - 1 GENERAL _ � 1.01 RELATED WORK ' ; A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods ' ; 1.02 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit procluct data for approval in accordance with Section 01340. ' ' B. Submit for approval detailed drawings of the power panels showing bussing, breaker dimensions, gutter dimensions, spare/space dimensions, j number, size, trip, and interrupting capacity at all circuits. Standard � ; factory worksheets are not acceptable. 2. , PART - 2 � PRODUCTS ' ! � 2.01 Lighting Panelboards I � � ' A. The Electrical Distribution System shall be a fully rated system. Series � � rated systems shall be unacceptable. � B. Provide new branch circuit breakers as indicated on drawings in existing i lighting panelboards. ' ' , C. Circuit breakers may be used as switches on fluorescent lightirig circuits ; � only if approved for such switching duty. Identify with the letters ' ' ��5�� i 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS ' A. Provide new branch circuit breakers as indicated on drawings in existing i distribution panelboards. ' ' 3. ' PART - 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 Lighting Panelboards � ; A. Provide new typewritten directory cards for existing panels that serve ' � � renovated area for both new and existing branch circuits. Also provide ' ' typewritten directory cazds listing specific location or circuit controlled ' I for new panels. Identification of each circuit shall include circuit ' number, type of load served, room number(s) served (use room number(s) per fmal installed signage in lieu of architectural space , number(s) shown on contract drawings) and size of conductors used - , unless #12 wire is provided for the circuit being identified. Insert with i � plastic cover into directory frame on door. , ' Janu 22 1999 16160-1 98165.01 � � ' � � B. Provide a nameplate indicating panel I.D., voltage, phase, and ir:'on emergency power branch of essential electrical system (i.e. life safety, Y � critical, or equipment from which said panel is served), Also provide a nameplate on all subfeed circuit breakers which are mounted in a panel but are separate from the other standazd pole positions. All shall be � plastic lamicoid with 3/s" letters secured to cover using two sheet metal screws or pop rivets. See electrical general provisions for nameplate color. � C. Balance all circuits to achieve not greater than 10% unbalanced neutral current in panel feeders. � D. Refer to General Electrical Notes on drawings for additional panel installation requirements. 3.02 Circuit Breaker Type Distribution Panelboards. � A. Provide nameplates indicating load served for each circuit, indicating � panel I.D., voltage, phase, (and if on emergency power) branch of essential electncal system (i.e. life safety, critical, or equipment) from which said panel is served), Also, identify for each circuit its circuit � number, type of load served, room number(s) served_(use room number(s) per final installed signage in lieu of architectural spac� number(s) shown on contract drawi.ngs), amperage and poles of circuit � breaker and size of conductor used. Nameplates shall be plastic lamicoid with 3/s" letters secured to cover using two sheet metal screws or pop rivets.See electrical general provisions for nameplate colar. � B. Refer to General Electrical Notes on drawings for additional pan�l � installation requirements. . � END OF SECTION � � 1 ' ' ' January 22, 1999 16160-2 ` 9�165.01 � , 1 i � � SECTION 16190 � � ' � SUPPORTING DEVICES AND HANGERS i ! ; , � � � 1. j PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: Provide a system of supporting devices and hangers to � i insure secure support or bracing for conduit, electrical equipment, including i fixtures, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, etc. 1.02 RELATED WORK � I A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � 01340. ' 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MAN�UFACTURERS ' � A. Provide appropriate supporting devices and hangers for electrical - equipment from the following list of Caddy Fasteners as manufactured � by Erico Products, Inc., Steel City, Minerallac, or equivalent: � � 1. Vertical flange clamps (beam clamps). � � 2. "Z" purlin clips. 3. Conduit clips. ' i I � ; 4. Universal clamps (beam clamps). � 5. Beam clamps (set screw type). ' 6. Combination push-in conduit clips. 7. Combination conduit hanger clamps. � � ! 8. Flexible conduit clips. ; ,� 9. Special cornbination conduit clips. � , � 10. One hole steel straps. I i 11. Minerallac conduit hangers. � ; 3. ; PART - 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 INSTALLATION � i A. Secure conduits to within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, � � cabinet, fitting, etc., and at intervals not to exceed those currently , ' effective edition of the National Electric Code. ` ' � ' ', I Jarivary 22, 1999 16190-1 98165.01 � � � B. Install clamps secured to structure for feeder and other conduit :routed against the structure. Use drop rods and hangers to support conduits run � apart from the structure. C. Provide and install suitable angle iron, channel iron or steel meial � � framing with accessories to support or brace electrical equipme�t including fixtures, etc. D. Paint all supporting metal not otherwise protected, with rust inhibiting � primer and then with a finish coat if appropriate to match the surrounding metal surfaces. (Prepainted, parberized or galvaiuzed support material is not required to be painted or repainted.) � E. Use of chains, perforated iron, baling wire, or tie wire for supporting conduit runs will not be permitted. � F. For support of low voltage wiring not required to be in conduit, bundle " cables together in a neat manner using 'approved nylon tie wraps. � G. Bundled cables to be supported with J hooks on telephone type bridle rings, a minimum of 5' O.C. • H. Clearly identify a11 differing types of cables being run and tag them � with plastic tags reading "telephone", "nurse call," etc., for various systems utilizing cable. � I. Provide identification tags on cables at intervals not exceeding 20' and within 3' of building smoke compartment separation walls. � END OF SECTION � � � � 1 1 - i January 22, 1999 16190-2 9�165.01 ' i ' i I � � , ' 1 � � ; SECTION 16400 � � i i ' � � DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND GROUNDING � I � 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED , � A. Distribution system � B. Grounding , ' 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16111: Conduit , , B. Section 16120: Wire and Cable 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data. for approval in accordance with Section � i 01340. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS , ! 2.01 MATERIALS I A. Provide distribution system conduit, wire, and miscellaneous hardware � as required on drawings. � � , B. Ground cla.mps and other grounding hardware as manufactured by "OZ" Electrical Manufacturing company, Type "CG" or equivalent by Steel � � CiTy, or Appleton. 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION � , 3.01 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM � i � A. System commencing at existing pad-mounted transformer secondary and � , , continuing through existing underground service entrance, main switchboard, distribution panels, feeder circuits, transformers, to existing , panelboards, and new branch circuits serving wiring devices, appliances, � � ' apparatus and other utilization equipment. � � 3.02 GROUNDING i j � A. Ground electrical system in accordance with applicable edition of � i Article 250 and 517 of the National Electrical Code and requirements of � I local authorities having jurisdiction including NFPA 99 requirements. � � I • B. Do not use flexible metal conduit and fittings as a grounding means. ; Pull a green insulated copper wire in each piece of flexible conduit and ' � i screw to conduit system with lugs at both ends. � ! ' � , j January 22, 1999 16400-1 98165.01 . � • � C. Install green bonding jumpers in flush-mounted receptacle boxes as required to connect the receptacle ground terminal to the grounded box. � Install green bonding jumpers between outlet box and wall bracket mounted lighting fixtures. Screw jumpers to fixture chassis with lugs. D. Install code size green grounding conductors in all branch circuits' � � feeding receptacles, motors or other permanently wired fixed electrical utilizafion equipment and all feeder circuits. , � E. Bond conductors to chassis of fixed equipment. Bond all grounding � � conductors to multi-terminal ground bus at panelboard. F. Grouping of grounding conductors under a single lug or termin� screw � is not acceptable. Should this method be used, contractor will provide additional ground lugs as required to correct the condition and rewire at '� his own expense. G. Locate grounding attachments away from areas sabject to physical � damage and clean a11 surfaces on equipment to be grounded to assure good electrical continuity. H. Tie ground bus in normal and essential electrical system panels serving � a general patient care area together with an insulated conductor not smaller than #10 (cu) per NEC, Article 517, and NFPA-99 Standards. ' END OF SECTION � � , � . � ' _ � ` - . � ' January 22, 1999 16400-2 98165.01 ' i ' � i ' � i � � SECTION 16500 II i j �, , � II LIGHTING FIXTURES ' � I � I 1. PART - 1 GENERAL �I ' � 1.01 WORK INCLUDED � I , A. Fixtures � B. Lamps . , ' C. Ballasts I 1.02 RELATED WORK ti A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � i C. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' � A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section 01340. I � B. Submit shop drawings for luminaries showing pertinent physical '� , characteristics and performance data. Include specific proposed ballasts � and/or lamps for each fixture as part of the submittal. � C. Submit samples of luminaries prior to final production at Architect's , ' request on any proposed fixture substitution. � , 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS � ! 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ; A. Provide fixtures by manufacturers scheduled on drawings. See Section # , 16050 for substitutions. I B. Provide incandescent and fluorescent lamps as manufactured by � i � Osram/Sylvania, Phillips, or equivalent. ! �� C. Provide fluorescent ballasts as manufactured by Magnetek, Advance or i equivalent. � � i i j 2•02 FIXTURES � � A. Provide regulating, HPF ballasts in all compact fluorescent lighting � fixtures. Use recessed compact fluorescent fixture ballasts provided ; with integral thermal protection. � ; , B. Provide high frequency, electronic ballasts (Magnetek Triad HP or � approved equal). Electronic ballasts shall have a Tota1 Harmonic ! ! Distortion (THD) of less than 10%. � � � ; January 22, 1999 16500-1 98165.01 � � e C. Provide recessed fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts with integral thermal protection. Where fixtures are required to be tented, provide 1 same with super-premium, self venting ballasts. D. Provide rapid start, energy saving type "T8" and specialty type "T12" � lamps for all fluorescent fixtures in accordance with fmal fixtiu�e schedule. Provide "T8" lamps having 3500K color temperature with a CRI of 75 for all general applications. All "T12" lamps where ased for � general lighting will have 3500K color temperature with a CRI �f 69 , minimum. E. Provide compact fluorescent and incandescent lamps of wattage and � type as shown on drawings. All incandescent lamps shall be 130-volt. Provide compact fluorescent lamps having 3500K color tempera�ure � with a CRI of 81 minimum in a11 applications where possible. F. Recessed incandescent fixtures to have thermal protection in accordance with NEC 410-65(c). � 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENER.AL: Furnish, locate, lamp, and install fixtures as indicated on � drawings. � 3.02 INSTALLATION � A. Mount fixtures as called for on drawings. Determine type of cei.ling being installed in each space and furnish f�tures suitable for exGct type, � including roof/floor or ceiling/floor fire rated design with fire tenting requsred by Arclutect. All coordmation and matenals to be provided without additional cost to Owner. ' B. Structurally support lighting fixtures. Support ceiling system grid directly with hangers attached to building structure and attach fluorescent grid troffers to ceiling system as required by NEC 410- � 16(c). C. Support incandescent fixtures mounted in suspended ceilings by fixture ' channels, furnished under this division, laid across ceiling support channels. D. Support surface-mounted fixtures from building structural systerrY using � rods in conjunction with clamps or fixture outlet boxes. E. Support from structure all surface and recessed fixtures installed �n � concealed z-spline, plaster, or drywall ceilings. F. Support plaster or drywall mounted fixtures from support channeTs � spanning across main building supports without depending on ceiiing system for support. � January 22, 1999 16500-2 98165.01� i ' ' i i ; ' � � ; I � � G. Coordinate depth of recessed mounted light fixtures trim with ceiling � I ' medium to assure that fixture will fit in allotted space and is compatible � ! with type ceiling system being used. � j i H. Coordinate width of recessed mounted light fixtures including mounting i ; hardware to assure that fixture will fit in allotted space including � I' bulkheads and soffits. I � ! , ; I I. Receive, store, uncrate, install and lamp all hard-wired fixtures shown - on drawings as being furnished by Owner or others. � I J. Wire incandescent luminaries with medium base sockets with wire not � smaller than No. 16 and mogul sockets with wire not smaller than No. 1 14, type to be in accordance with current edition of NEC 410-25. K. Wire recessed fluorescent luminaries using flexible metal conduit with � Type THHN wire (including ground wire) not smaller than No. 14 � , AWG. Install a separate insulated green grounding conductor in conduit � (not smaller than No. 14 AWG) for grounding continuity with conduit � system. � L. Wire surface-mounted fluorescent luminaries with Type THI�N wire � (not smaller than No. 12) from outlet boxes to fixture and through � fixture channels. Use patented LTL listed grip clamps for mounting � I surface fixtures on exposed tee-bar ceilings. Take care that fixtures are � i installed level and not tilted. � ' � I M. Locate no splice or tap within an arm or stem. Provide continuous � wiring from splice in outlet box of building wiring system to lamp � , i socket or ballast terminals. Provide "hang-straight" type canopies for all stem-hung or pendant-hung fiYtures mounted on sloped ceilings or i I structure. Fixtures called out on fixture schedule as stem-hung or ' � � pendant-hung indicate rigid stems, cords will not be acceptable. ' ' N. Coordinate fixture locations to clear diffusers, ductwork, piping, ' ' building structure, etc. without additional cost to owner. � ; � ; END OF SECTION � � I I � I � � ' � � I ' , � 1 � , � January 22, 1999 16500-3 98165.01 ' � i � I �I I � , SECTION 16720 � � ' � I j I , � FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS , i ; � ; ' ' 1. ' PART - 1 GENERAL � I� , 1.01 WORK INCLUDED , i A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the � furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the installation of the fire alarm system as � � shown on the drawings and as herein specified. Provide expansion of � existing non-coded, analog, addxessable microprocessor based fire alarm ' system as specified herein. � � B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary , Conditions, and General Requirements apply to the work specified in ' this section. ' ' C. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of I NFPA-72 (1993), NFPA 90A, Standard Building Code (1997), Local , � Code Requirements, and National Electrical Code with particular ' attention to Article 760. . I D. Field acceptance testing. , � � 1.02 RELATED WORK , � A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions i I' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods ' , ! C: Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers � D. Section 16111: Conduit , , E. Section 16120: Wire and Cable � 1.03 SUBMITTALS , i A. Submit product data for approval in accordance with section 01340. � � B. Submit a complete conduit and wiring layout dzawn to 1/8" scale on � ; � building floor plans and a point-to-point wiring diagram for approval. i j Fire Alarm system shall be rejected (without further review) should � '� diagrams be omitted from the submittal package. � � ' C. Should an electronic Autocad file disk of the architectural floor plan , with the fire alarm devices located on the plan be desired, one is � , available from Phoenix Design Group, Inc. at a cost of$250.00 per � disk. � ' i � January 22, 1999 16720-1 98165.01 � � . f � 1.04 QUALITY ASSUR.ANCE A. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product , of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (LTL), and Factory Mutual � (Fl� and shall bear the "LJL" and "FM" labels. ' B. A factory authorized installer with a minimum of five years of experience shall perform the work covered under this Section. � 1.05 GENERAL A. Furnish and install a complete fire alarm system as described herein and ' as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in proper operating condition. Include sufficient control panel ' additions/modifications, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke detectors, alarm mdicating apphances, wiring, terminations, electrical boxes, and a11 other necessary material for a complete operating system in accordance.with all applicable local and state regulations. � B. All panels and peripheral devices shall be as manufactured by Simplex Time Recorder Co. and shall match and be compatible with the existing , system. ' 1.06 SYSTEM OPERATION � A. The system alazm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch sha11 be as follows: ' 1. A general alarm condition shall be indicated at the fire alarm control panel and a pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the ' control panel until the event has been acknowledged. 2. The specific device in alarm shall be indicated at the fire alarm control panel. , 3. All audible alarm indicating appliances sha11 sound a continuous fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the � control panel. Visual devices shall also cease flashing whenever the audible devices are silenced. 4. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating ' appliances. 5. All doors norxnally held open by door control device shall � release after a 15-second delay. 6. A supervised signal to notify an approved central station si�all be � activated. i January 22, 1999 16720-2 98165.01 , ' , I , � li � ' , ' ' 7. For automatic devices only, the mechanical system controls sha11 � � activate the air handling systems (smoke evacuation, A/C � � shutdown) per Division 15 documents and in accordance with ' � NFPA 90A. Air handling unit shutdown shall be by fire alarm ! � building zone (i.e. only the air handling unit(s) serving the I i zone(s) in alarm shall shut down; other air handling units serving � ' � adjacent zones not in alarm shall remain ��nn;ng). Manual pull i ! station activation shall not cause air handling unit shutdown. , � ! B. Supervised "positive feedback" inputs shall be provided to indicate true "ON" and "OFF" status from designated contact closures in the air- ' handling system. This positive feedback indication shall take ' � precedence in determining true "ON/OFF" status. C. Upon reset of the fire alarm control panel, air-handling units shall � sequentially start up to minimize power demand. � I D. The alarm shall be displayed on an SO character LCD display. The top ; line of 40 characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be � the devica type identifier along with the designation of the smoke , compartment in which the device is located. The system alarm LED � shall flash on the control panel until the alatm has been acknowledged. ' ; Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm ; � received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the � control panel. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information. ' � E. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a � dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch. Ii� l. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory i (tamper) switch shall activate the system supervisory service i audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel. ' � j Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens andlor ' grounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. i ' � 2. Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key will silence , ; � the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory i Service LED "ON" indicating the off-normal condition. ' � 3. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the ' I Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to ' i i normal. I I I F. Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the selected I ; automatic functions. � ' G. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release upon � AC power failure. ' ' r ' � Jarivary 22, 1999 16720-3 98165.01 � 8 1.07 SUPERVISION _ A. The system shall contain a minimum of two Style 4 signaling line � circuits with each circuit capable of supporting up to 127 devices. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent 8 alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. B. There shall be supervisory service iuutiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler valve supervisory devices (tamper switches). � Device activation shall cause a supervisory alarm at the control �anel. C. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" a position of any switch sha11 cause an "off normal" system trouble. D. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete LCD � readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. E. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition , or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indi�ated at � the control panel. F. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module � placement. Should a module become disconnected the system tr��uble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall souaid. In the event auxiliary fire alarm relays are used to control emergency � control devices (i.e. HVAC systems fans, etc.,), the relay shall be located within three feet of the emergency control device to insu�e supervision. Refer to Section 7 of NFPA 101 for additional information. , 1.08 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to �,perate ' the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a norrr.al supervisory mode for a period of four hours with required minutes of � alarm operation at the end of this period in accordance with NFPA-72 and local authorities having jurisdiction. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charg- , ing and recharging operations shall be automatic. B. All e}cternal circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24VDC ' and shall be individually fused at the control panel. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL � A. Existing Fire alarm control panel is Simplex 4t00 series, modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics. It shall display onl}- the � primary control and displays essential for operation during a fire alarm condition. , January 22, 1999 16720-4 93165.01 r , i � � � ' � B. A local audible device sha11 sound during Alarm, Trouble or ' � Supervisory conditions. This audible device shall sound differently i I during each condition to distinguish one condition from another wihout ' i j viewing the panel. � ! 2.02 ADDRESSABLE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES ', � I � A. Alarm initiating devices of the types indicated below sha11 be i � arranged to be point addressable: ' 1. Photoelectric Smoke Sensor, type 4098-9701 with 4098-9781 ' Addressable Base. Addressable sensor bases for system ; photoelectric smoke and heat sensors shall contain electronics to , i communicate the detector status (alarm, normal or trouble) to the FACP over 2 wires. Smoke sensors shall be capable of sensetivity adjustment, self testing, and remote sensitivity testing. ' , 2. Cover all smoke detection devices with plasxic covers � immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness. � ; 2.03 WIRING TYPE . � A. Wiring types shall be as approved by the manufacturer and as required � , by NEC. � i 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION I � 3.01 INSTALLATION ' ; I ; A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and ' � specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's ' i i recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit and in ; I strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC, Article 760. Refer to section 16120 for specific restrictions on Fire Alarm system wiring. ' � I , j B. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labelled "Fire Alarm". i Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. , , i C. Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinet � or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made. � j D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the ' , contract shall be closely coordmated wrth the appropnate subcontractors. � , ; I E. Contractor s�iall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside � I of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. I I F. The manufacturer's authorized representative sha11 provide on-site ' � ! supervision of installation and be available at each designated time of , system testing. , , G. Provide 190°F. fixed temperature heat detectors in mechanical rooms , and 135 degrees F. fixed temperature and rate of rise heat detectors in � i � all other areas where heat detectors are shown on drawings. January 22, 1999 16720-5 98165.01 I � � � H. Maximum load capacity of alarm indicating and initiating device circuits shall not exceed 80% of circuits total capacity. � I. Smoke Detector Application: 1. Use light refractory type detectors in all applications shawn on � drawings. 2. Provide all detectors installed prior to completion of construction � with protection from contamination using sealed plastic coverage. All such covers shall be removed on day of final system testing by architectural team and local authorities. � 3.02 TESTING A. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures � outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted vbltages between circuit � conductors and ground. 2. Megger test all conductors other than those intentionally and permanently grounded with electronic components disconnected. � Test for resistance to ground. Report readings less than 1- • megohm for evaluation. 3. Test all conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation- � testing device. 4. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit ' and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings. 5. Verify the control unit is in the norxnal condition as detai'_ed in ' the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. 6. Test initiating, notification, and signaling circuits for proper ' signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of ' the initiating and notification devices. Observe proper signal transrrussion according to class of vv�nng used. 7. Test each initiating device and notification appliance for alarm ' operation and proper response at the control panel. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 8. Measure and record the actual current draw of each Notifi��ation � Appliance Circuit. , � ' January 22, 1999 � 16720-6 93165.01 , i � ' I � i � � � I i � ' 9. Test the system for all specified functions according to the ' � � manufacturer's operating andmaintenance manual. i � Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at , � ; each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring 'I i irutiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected ' � ' by the item under all system sequences. i 10. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and ' annunciation indications. � 11. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, ' the secondary power system is capable of operating the system ' � for the period and in the manner specified. � B. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest ' � work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that � the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable ; standards. � � C. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of ; inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. 1 j Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests. � D. After completion of all of the above, the completed fire alarm system , � shall be fully certified in accordance with NFPA-72 by the fire alarm � ; installer and written certification shall be provided to the General � Contractor and the Owner's Representative. The system shall then be ' � tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Local Fire ' ; � Marshal or other authority having jurisdiction (each of which may be , i testing the system on separate days). j i 3.03 WARRANTY ' � � A. Contractor shall warrant the com leted fire alarm s stem wirin and P Y g i � equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for I, , , ; a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified � final test and approval by architect team and all authorities having � � jurisdiction. 1 i B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a I , maintenance contract proposal to provide the required minimum number ' � of inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72 i I guidelines. i � i � � , END OF SECTION ' � I � � i � Jarivary 22, 1999 16720-7 98165.01 � � I ' I � � � ' ' � SECTION 16740 ' i � i � , � � ; TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM , , ' ' 1. ' PART - 1 GENERAL � ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' , A. Interior telephone system to be selected by Owner and provided by � Owner's vendor. ' � B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown on selected vendor wiring schematics. � C. Install vendor-fumished special backboxes in accordance with vendor's � specifications. � D. Provide identification labels on all vendor furnished wire and cable. � ' 1.02 RELATED WORK � i A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions ' � B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods ' , j C. Section 16111: Conduit I , i I D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable � ' � E. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers ' ; i � F. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes , i � � � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' ; i 01340. ; 2. ; PART - 2 PRODUCTS 1 � � 2.01 MATERIALS I � A. Interior telephone system components as provided by the Owner's ' ; ; vendor to include a11 switching equipment, power unit cabinets, special , j i backboxes and cable. i I B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by systems ' i j manufacturer and as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or i f equivalent. � i � C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics � and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from ' backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress ' ' ! corridor. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon insulated bushings. � ' � i January 22, 1999 16740-1 98165.01 � �� D. Wall outlets to be 4 square with depth and single-gang or double-gang device rings as required by Owner's vendor. � � E. Provide where indicated on drawings exterior grade plywood teTephone terminal boards sized as shown on drawings. Terminate all conduits with nylon insulated bushings at these boards. � F. Paint all telephone terminal boards with two coats of black insu'_ating varnish or paint. � G. Provide grounding system in accordance with NEC 250 using #6 (cu) grounding conductors per drawings. � 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION � A. Receive, store, and protect a11 telephone system equipment cable. B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on � drawings and vendor wiring schematics. C. Serve each telephone outlet from a separate conduit stubbed up and terminated above accessible ceilings of nearest main egress corridors � with nylon insulated bushings. Conduit minimum size is 3/4". D. Coordinate sleeves with telephone vendor for location, size, and �uantity � � prior to rough-in. E. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190. ' F. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate s�oke or fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least 1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings on both ' ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant approved by local authorities. G. Install all vendor-furnished cable concealed in wa11s or inaccessible ' (drywall) ceilings in conduit. ' END OF SECTION ' ' � ' January 22, 1999 16740-2 9s165.01 ! ' I ' i ' SECTION 16760 NURSES CALL RACEWAY SYSTEM 1 � � ' 1. I PART - 1 GENER.AL ' ; � ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' ' A. Nurse ca11 system equipment to be selected by the Owner and provided , by the Owner's vendor. ' � B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown on selected vendors wiring schematics. ' C. Install vendor-furnished special back boxes in accordance with vendor's ' specifications. ; D. Provide identification labels on all vendor furnished wire and cable. ' , �. 1.02 RELATED WORK i - A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions � ' � i B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � C. Section 16111: Conduit ' � � . D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable , I � E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes ' � I F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers � � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' i 01340. 2. PART - 2 PRODUCTS I ! 1 � 2.01 MATERIALS i I ' � A. Nurse call system components as provided by the Owner's vendor to ' � � include all power supplies, terminal cabinets, dome lights, patient I � stations, emergency stations, special backboxes and cable. i i B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by vendor and ' � ; as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or equivalent. I ! C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics ' ' i j and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress � � corridors. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon , insulated bushings. ' f i' ! ; Jarivary 22, 1999 16760-1 98165.01 � � � , D. Provide (in-line) connected transient voltage surge suppressor on each 120-volt, AC circuit serving nurse call microprocessor. Suppressor to , ha.ve three-wire (hot, neutral, ground) connections and shall be rnounted inside nurse ca11 ternunal enclosure (Leviton #51020-W1V�. 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION � , 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Receive, store, and protect a11 nurse call system equipment cable. , B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on drawings and vendor wiring schematics. ' C. Coordinate sleeves with nurse ca11 system vendor for location, size, and quantity prior to rough-in. ' D. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190. E. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or , fire rated walls, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least � 1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings on both ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant ' approved by local authorities. F. Install a11 vendor-furnished cable concealed in wa11s or inaccessible ' (drywall) ceilings in conduit. G. Provide min;mum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics and conforming to conduit section of these specifications, from ' backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress corridor. Terminate�conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon insulated bushings. , END OF SECTION , ' . ' � 1 � i 'ii . , ' January 22, 1999 16760-2 98165.01 ' � � ' 1 SECTION 16775 ' ' i I � CONNECTION TO OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT � 1. � PART - 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED ' A. Certain pieces of equipment are to be owner-furnished such as angio , equipment, examination lights and respective variable intensity I controllers, etc. ' � _ B. Connect this equipment in accordance with manufacturer's brochures and instructions. , , C. Connect this equipment in accordance with local regulations of governing authorities. , 1.02 RELATED WORK � ' ; , A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions , ; B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods � � C. Section 16111: Conduit ' I D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable 1 � j , ; E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes ' � I F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers � � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section ' ; I 01340. � ' 2. � PART 2 PRODUCTS � � � ' ; 2.01 MATERIALS: Provide all conduit, wire, outlet (with proper NEMA ' i configuration) and outlet boxes, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, etc. in I ' accordance with applicable sections of these specifications and as required to ' j j connect owner-furnished equipment per manufacturer's brochures and � � instructions. � � 3. � PART - 3 EXECUTION I , � � 3.01 INSTALLATION: Connect owner-furnished equipment and leave in , j � satisfactory operating condition. Prior to bid and/or rough-in coordinate , ' � mounting heights and types of connections with final architectural elevations I , and manufacturers fmal rough-in drawings. Include all required components , ; necessary for a complete turn-key installation. � � END OF SECTION ' � � � January 22, 1999 16775-1 98165.01 ' � , SECTION 16781 - ' DATA PROCESSING RACEWAY SYSTEMS ' ' 1. PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED , A. Data processing system equipment to be selected by the Owner and provided by the Owner's vendor. , , B. Provide rough-in conduit, standard boxes, etc., as specified and shown on selected vendors wiring schematics. � C. Install vendor-furnished special back boxes in accordance with vendor's ' ! specifications. � D. Provide identification labels on all vendor furnished wire and cable. ' ; 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions � ' B. Section 16050: Basic Materials and Methods C. Section 16111: Conduit ' D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable � E. Section 16130: Outlet and Junction Boxes ' � F. Section 16190: Supporting Devices and Hangers � � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit product data for approval in accordance with Section � i � 01340. , � 2. � PART - 2 PRODUCTS i , � � 2.01 MATERIALS � I ' A. Data processing system components as provided by the Owner's vendor ' � � to include a11 power supplies, patch panels, VDT's, printers, servers, i � special backboxes and cable. B. Provide conduit and standard backboxes as recommended by vendor and ' � I' as manufactured by Appleton, Raco, Steel City, or equivalent. � C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduits in accordance with vendor schematics , ; i and conforming to "CONDUIT" section of these specifications, from backboxes to accessible dropped ceilings (lay-in) of nearest main egress � conidors. Terminate conduit ends (stubbed above ceilings) using nylon , � insulated bushings. ' � � ' � � January 22, 1999 16781-1 98165.01 � ' 3. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION t A. Receive, store, and protect all data processing system equipment cable. � B. Install wiring from backboxes to termination points as shown on ' drawings and vendor wiring schematics. C. Coordinate sleeves with data processing system vendor for location, ' size, and quantity prior to rough-in. D. Support cables in accordance with Section 16190. � E. Where open cable is run above dropped ceilings and penetrate smoke or fire rated wa11s, provide a minimum 1" empty sleeve, extending at least 1 foot on both sides of said wall, with nylon insulated bushings on both � ends. Seal conduits inside and outside with fire-resistant sealant approved by local authorities. F. Install a11 vendor-furnished cable concealed in walls or inaccessible � (drywall) ceilings in conduit. . � END OF SECTION � , 1 ' � 1 1 , � ' January 22, 1999 16781-2 98165.01 ' . ' ' CRITICAL SYSTEMS CHECKLIST ' The following checklist must be completed by the General Contractor and the appropriate subcontractors and retumed to the Engineer at least two days prior to the Final on-site ' Observation visit. A final observation visit will not made until this systems checklist is totally complete. , i . 1 - � 1 1 1 1 1 1 . i 1 i i . 1 January 22, 1999 Electrical Systems Checklist - 1 98165.01 ' � 1 ' 1 IELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ' SYSTEM TYPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.C. Sup DATE APPROVAL ' F'ue Alarm Annunciator Panel wiring complete and operadonal. ' Verify system on life safety branch of essential electrical system. Fire Alartn� 1. Pull Stations: , i a. Alarm initiated(audio/visual) b. Annunciation by zone I , c. Door holders'release ' d. Fire shutter release(stays open) e. Verify max of 48"A.F.F. 2. Ceiling Smoke Detectors: ' � a. Alarnt initiated(audio/visual) j b. Annunciation by zone j c. Door holders'release ' i d. Fire shutter release(close on local detec6on) ie. A/C shutdown w/annunciation i f. Verify detectors installed within 5 feet of smoke doors. ' I g. Zone Smoke dampers close. � 3. Duct-mounted Smoke Detectors: ' , I a. Alarm initiated(audio/visual) � I b. Annunciation by zone ic. Door holders'release ' � i d. Fire shutter release(stays open) e. A/C shutdown w/annunciation � � ' , f. Zone Smoke dampers close. � g. Test detectors with smoke bombs. � h. Verify visual flow wheels on detectors are operating if present� ' i I I 4. Sprinkler Tamper Switch: � a Shall not inidate alarm � b. Annunciafion by zone , ; i i c. Sepazate Audio device at Annunciator panel. ' � 5. Sprinkler Flow Switches: ia Alarm initiated(audio/visual) ' I � � b. Annunciation by zone � c. Door holders' release , i d, Fire shutter release(N.O.) , e. A/C shutdown w/annunciation � , f. Zone Smoke dampers close. ' i ' January 22, 1999 Electrical Systems Checklist - 2 98165.01 � � e ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS � SYSTEM TYPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.C. Sup � DATE APPROVAL 6. Verify system power supply on life safety branch with written Certification of System by manufacturec. � 7. Verify pull stations aze located within 5 feet of all egress doors. 8. Verify fue dept is notified by F.A. System 9. Verify battery backup provided. � 10. Have rivo elechicians, one alarm rep and three walkie-talkies available for tesdng. Emergency Power • � 1. Kill power to normal side of transfer switches and dme transfer as being less than 10 seconds for: , a. Life Safety b. Equipment(may be delayed) c. Critical ' 2. Check automalic operation of Emergency Generator. 3. Check operation of alann panel. 4. Verify fire alarm system on life safety branch. ' 5. Verify communications,paging system on life safety branch. 6. Check cridcal and life safety lights after generator is running with normal power to � project azea off. 7. Provide written Certification of System by manufacturer. 8. Verify auxiliary contact in equipment branch transfer switch is interlocked with elevator controls for emergency operation. , 9. Verify emergency power supply to: a. Critical AHU Systems b. Critical exhaust fans t c. Heating Hot Water Pumps(Recirc). d. Control air system. , 10. Test and recertify existing generators which serve loads in new or renovated azeas covered by the contract documents. 11. Verify operation of power-operated doors. ' Emergency Communications Systems: 1. Provide Owner's Vendor certification of device testing and system completion. , 2. Have vendor present for random tesring of patient stations and verification of annunciadon. 3. Verify emergency power source to communicadons equipment t ' January 22, 1999 Electrical Systems Checklist - 3 98165.01 , � � ' I i 1 I � I f � i � 1 II I f � , I . i ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I ' SYITEM TIPE REQUIRED TEST DESCRIPTION TESTING G.C. Sup DATE APPROVAL I � ' I � i I Patient Bed Grounding Systems: i1. At each patient bed location perform voltage and impedance testing using test , instrument,Hampden#MVO-I-PB tester or equal as manufactured by Dynatech which meets criteria and requirements of NFPA-99. 2. Verify NFPA 99 required patient bed voltage and impedance testing is documented with a copy sent to the Engineer. ' TIO I END OF SEC N � ' ' � , � � .1 ' I 1 ' � ' � � � ' i , ' 4 V I ' I ' ! January 22, 1999 Electrical Systems Checklist - 4 98165.01